JP6337285B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine including a fraud detection circuit for discriminating fraud by using a magnet has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a two-layer protective glass body composed of a front glass and a back glass is disposed on the front side of the cell board, and a magnetism is provided between the front glass and the back glass. Sensor is arranged. This magnetic sensor is composed of a transparent conductive film sheet or the like, and both end electrodes of the conductive film sheet are electrically connected to the fraud detection circuit. The fraud detection circuit measures the magnitude of the induced current by the magnet approaching the conductive film sheet, and activates an alarm buzzer or the like if the magnetism is fraudulent.

JP 2002-282505 A (paragraph [0013], paragraph [0018], and FIG. 1)

  Incidentally, some magnetic sensors use elements that detect minute magnetism with high accuracy. However, since such a high-precision magnetic sensor is sensitive to the influence of geomagnetism, for example, there is a possibility that the magnetism by the player's health magnet may be mistakenly detected as an illegal act by the magnet. It was.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately detecting an illegal act by a magnet.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

(Solution 1)
A gaming machine comprising a front frame that is pivotally supported by an outer frame installed on a gaming island so as to be freely opened and closed and on which a game board can be mounted, and a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, The front frame includes abnormal magnetic detection means for detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism in a detection area set within a predetermined distance from the detection surface , and the abnormal magnetic detection means receives an external request signal when the power is turned on. First reference setting control means for setting the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means as a reference regardless of whether or not the abnormal magnetic detection means is used, and the first reference setting control means in the ambient environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means. After setting the magnetic state as a reference, a second reference setting for resetting the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means based on the input of the request signal from the outside. A control means, at least, the first reference setting control means is a predetermined set determination period is determined whether it was possible to set a reference magnetic state in the ambient environment of the anomalous magnetic detecting means A setting determination result output control means for outputting the setting determination result to the outside, and determining whether or not the electrical connection state to the abnormal magnetic detection means is a normal state in a predetermined connection determination period Connection determination result output control means for performing and outputting a connection determination result to the outside, wherein the game control means uses a signal that conveys the setting determination result based on a magnetic state in an ambient environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means A signal that is input from the abnormal magnetic detection means as a notification that the setting has been made and that transmits the connection determination result is an electric signal to the abnormal magnetic detection means. After the Do connection state is input from the abnormality magnetic detecting means as to convey the fact that in a normal state, a signal to tell whether the detection of the occurrence of said abnormal magnetism is input from the abnormality magnetism detection unit Rutotomoni, the request signal based on which the front frame after the front frame is opened from the outer frame is closed to the outer frame is output to the abnormality magnetic detection means, the pre-Symbol anomalous magnetic detecting means detection area of the detection surface includes a game ball entering the sphere part provided on the game board, and a discharge portion for the game balls that did not enter the sphere in the recreation sphere ball entrance portion for discharging from the game board, the A gaming machine characterized by including.

This gaming machine includes a front frame and game control means. The front frame is pivotally supported by an outer frame installed on the game island so as to be openable and closable, and can be equipped with a game board. The game control means is capable of controlling the progress of the game.

The game board or the front frame is provided with abnormal magnetic detection means. The abnormal magnetism detecting means is capable of detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism in a detection region set within a predetermined distance from the detection surface , and includes the first reference setting control means and the second reference setting control means. Have at least. The first reference setting control means can set the magnetic state in the ambient environment of the abnormal magnetism detection means as a reference regardless of whether or not a request signal from the outside is input when the power is turned on. The second reference setting control means performs an abnormality based on the input of a request signal from the outside after setting the magnetic state in the environment around the abnormal magnetic detection means by the first reference setting control means. The magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection means can be reset based on the reference.
The first reference setting control means includes at least setting determination result output control means and connection determination result output control means. The setting determination result output control means determines whether or not the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means can be set as a reference, and outputs the setting determination result to the outside during a predetermined setting determination period. It is something that can be done. The connection determination result output control means may determine whether or not the electrical connection state to the abnormal magnetism detection means is normal during a predetermined connection determination period and output the connection determination result to the outside. It can be done.

The game control means is input from the abnormal magnetism detection means as a signal that the signal indicating the setting determination result is set based on the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means, and the connection determination result is displayed. A signal that tells whether or not the occurrence of abnormal magnetism has been detected after the signal to be transmitted is input from the abnormal magnetism detection means as an indication that the electrical connection to the abnormal magnetism detection means is normal Is input from the abnormal magnetic detection means, and a request signal can be output to the abnormal magnetic detection means based on the fact that the front frame is closed to the outer frame after the front frame is opened from the outer frame. ing.

Detection area of the detection surface of the abnormal magnetic detection means, the discharge for discharging the game ball entering the sphere portion provided on the game board, the game balls that did not enter the sphere in the game ball ball entrance portion from the game board Part .

As described above, the abnormal magnetic detection means capable of detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism provided in the game board or the front frame includes a state where the front frame is opened from the outer frame and a state where the front frame is closed to the outer frame. In this case, the change in geomagnetism affects the detection of the occurrence of abnormal magnetism. For example, if a trouble occurs in a gaming machine, a clerk at a game hall (hall) opens the front frame from the outer frame and shuts off the power to the gaming machine. When the power is turned on and the front frame is closed again to the outer frame, the abnormal magnetism detection means can set the magnetic state in its surrounding environment in the state where the front frame is opened from the outer frame, and the front frame. When the front frame is closed to the outer frame after being released from the outer frame, a request signal from the game control means for controlling the progress of the game is input to the abnormal magnetic detection means, and the player plays a game The magnetic state in the surrounding environment in the state where the front frame is closed to the outer frame can be set as a reference. As a result, in a state where the front frame, in which the player is playing, is closed to the outer frame, the setting based on the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means itself can be reliably performed. ing. Therefore, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

In the present embodiment, for example, the outer frame 2 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the outer frame, the game board 4 in FIG. 9 corresponds to the game board, and the front frame configured by the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in FIG. Corresponds to the front frame, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 13 corresponds to the game control means, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the game machine, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. 9 corresponds to the abnormal magnetic detection means. and magnetic detection control side activation processing of the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21 corresponds to the "first reference setting control unit", the magnetic detection control of the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21 side main processing corresponds to the "second reference setting control unit", the offset of FIG. 22 which is carried out as the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation processing of the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21 Step SM120 in the adjustment process The process, the process of step SM125, and the determination process of step SM130 correspond to the setting determination result output control means, and the connection confirmation process of step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. 27 corresponds to the connection determination result output control means, the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 in FIG. 27 corresponds to the request signal, and the offset adjustment processing in FIG. 19B corresponds to the point of “set as reference”, and the offset adjustment failure signal in FIG. 19B output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. 19A corresponds to “signal for transmitting the setting determination result”. The normal connection signal in FIG. 19B output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. Corresponds to the signal "convey fruit, magnet detection signal shown in FIG. 19 (b) output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19 (a) tell whether it has detected the occurrence of the" abnormal magnetic 20 (a) and 20 (b) corresponds to the “detection area from the detection surface of the abnormal magnetic detection means”, and the general winning opening 2104 , 2201 and upper start opening of FIG. 2101, lower starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103 corresponds to a game ball entering the sphere portion, out port 1151 of FIG. 9 corresponds to the discharge portion.

(Solution 2)
A gaming machine comprising a game control means for controlling the progress of a game, the gaming machine further comprising an abnormal magnetism detection means for detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism, power supply to the abnormal magnetism detection means and power shutoff A power supply shut-off means that can perform the following: the abnormal magnetism detection means is based on the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetism detection means at the start of activation by power supply from the power supply shut-off means Electrical connection between the reference setting success determination result output control means capable of outputting to the game control means a determination result as to whether or not the process has been successfully executed, and the abnormal magnetism detection means An abnormal connection state determination result output control unit capable of executing a process for checking the state and outputting a determination result as to whether or not the abnormal connection state is present to the game control unit; An abnormal magnetic detection determination result output control means capable of outputting to the game control means a determination result as to whether or not the occurrence of a ki has been detected, and when the start is started, based on a predetermined order, the reference The determination result by the setting success determination result output control means, the determination result by the abnormal connection state determination result output control means, and the determination result by the abnormal magnetic detection determination result output control means are output to the game control means, The game control means includes a power supply control means for supplying power from the power supply cutoff means to the abnormal magnetic detection means by setting the logic of the control signal to power supply and outputting to the power supply cutoff means. Determination result determination control means for determining a determination result from the abnormal magnetism detection means output according to the predetermined order, the game control means, When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the power supply control means sets the logic of the control signal to the power supply cutoff means and outputs it to the abnormal magnetic detection means from the power supply cutoff means. When power is supplied and the abnormal magnetic detection means starts to start, the determination result from the abnormal magnetic detection means output based on the predetermined order is determined by the determination result determination control means by the reference setting success determination. It is determined which of the determination result by the result output control means, the determination result by the abnormal connection state determination result output control means, and the determination result by the abnormal magnetic detection determination result output control means is A gaming machine.

  This gaming machine includes game control means. The game control means is capable of controlling the progress of the game. This gaming machine further includes an abnormal magnetic detection means and a power supply cutoff means. The abnormal magnetism detecting means can detect the occurrence of abnormal magnetism. The power supply cutoff means can supply power to the abnormal magnetism detection means and shut off the power.

  The abnormal magnetic detection means includes at least reference setting success determination result output control means, abnormal connection state determination result output control means, and abnormal magnetic detection determination result output control means. Was the reference setting success judgment result output control means succeeded by executing the process of setting the magnetic state in the ambient environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means at the time of start of activation by the power supply from the power supply cutoff means as a reference? The determination result of whether or not can be output to the game control means. The abnormal connection state determination result output control means can execute processing for confirming the electrical connection state of the abnormal magnetic detection means and output a determination result as to whether or not the abnormal connection state is present to the game control means. It is. The abnormal magnetism detection determination result output control means can output a determination result as to whether or not the occurrence of abnormal magnetism in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetism detection means has been detected to the game control means. When the abnormal magnetism detection means starts, based on a predetermined order (accordingly), the determination result by the reference setting success determination result output control means, the determination result by the abnormal connection state determination result output control means, and the abnormal magnetic detection The determination result output by the determination result output control means and the game control means can be output.

  The game control means includes at least power supply control means and determination result determination control means. The power supply control means can supply power from the power supply cutoff means to the abnormal magnetism detection means by setting the logic of the control signal to power supply and outputting to the power supply cutoff means. The determination result discriminating control means can discriminate the determination result from the abnormal magnetic detection means that is output based on (in accordance with) a predetermined order.

  When a predetermined condition is established, the game control means sets the logic of the control signal to power supply to the power supply shut-off means by the power supply control means and outputs it to the abnormal magnetic detection means from the power supply shut-off means. When the abnormal magnetism detecting means starts to operate after the power is supplied, the judgment result from the abnormal magnetism detecting means output based on (in accordance with) a predetermined order is the reference result success judgment result by the judgment result discrimination control means. It is possible to determine which of the determination result by the output control means, the determination result by the abnormal connection state determination result output control means, and the determination result by the abnormal magnetic detection determination result output control means. ing.

  As described above, when the predetermined condition is established, the game control means starts the activation of the abnormal magnetic detection means by supplying power from the power supply cutoff means to the abnormal magnetic detection means, based on a predetermined order. Therefore, the determination result from the abnormal magnetic detection means to be output is the determination result by the reference setting success determination result output control means, the determination result by the abnormal connection state determination result output control means, and the abnormal magnetic detection determination result output control means. It is possible to determine which one of the determination results obtained by the above. Thus, the game control means can accurately determine whether or not the determination result from the abnormal magnetic detection means is the determination result by the abnormal magnetic detection determination result output control means. The generation of magnetism can be accurately grasped. Therefore, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 13 corresponds to the game control means, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the game machine, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. 9 corresponds to the abnormal magnetic detection means. The circuit comprising the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x and the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y in FIG. 30 corresponds to the power supply cutoff means, and the magnetic detection control side of the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. The offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the start-up process (the process in step SM115 in the offset adjustment process in FIG. 22) corresponds to the reference setting success determination result output control means, and the magnetic detection control in the power-on process on the magnetic detection control side in FIG. The connection confirmation process of step SM25 in the side activation process corresponds to the abnormal connection state determination result output control means, and the magnetic detection control of FIG. The magnetic detection process in step SM30 in the main process on the magnetic detection control side in the power-on process corresponds to the abnormal magnetic detection determination result output control means, and in the magnetic detection control-side activation process in the magnetic detection control-side power-on process in FIG. Step SM20 offset adjustment processing, step SM25 connection confirmation processing in the magnetic detection control side activation processing in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21, and magnetic detection control side in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. The point that the processing is proceeding in the order of magnetic detection in step SM30 in the main processing corresponds to “predetermined order”, and the processing in step S152 in the magnetic detection switch activation start processing in FIG. 46 corresponds to the power supply control means. 47. In step S166 in the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process of FIG. Determination of step S188, and fraud detection processing in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 45 corresponds to the determination result determination control means, the process of step S176 in is equivalent to power-off control means. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is shown in FIG. 21 only once when power is restored or only when the main frame door is changed from the open state to the closed state. When the offset adjustment process (offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22) in step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the detection control side power-on process is performed and the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed), to the magnetic detection switch 3024 The time when the power is supplied again and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is restarted after the power is turned off corresponds to the “predetermined condition”.

(Solution 3)
A gaming machine comprising a front frame that is pivotally supported by an outer frame installed on a gaming island so as to be freely opened and closed and on which a game board can be mounted, and a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, The front frame includes abnormal magnetic detection means for detecting occurrence of abnormal magnetism, and the abnormal magnetic detection means is configured to detect the abnormal magnetic detection means when the power is turned on or an external request signal is input. A magnetic state in the surrounding environment is set as a reference, and the game control means inputs a signal indicating whether or not the occurrence of the abnormal magnetism is detected from the abnormal magnetism detection means, and the front frame is attached to the outer frame. A gaming machine that outputs the request signal to the abnormal magnetic detection means based on the fact that the front frame is closed to the outer frame after being released from the frame.

  This gaming machine includes a front frame and game control means. The front frame is pivotally supported by an outer frame installed on the game island so as to be openable and closable, and can be equipped with a game board. The game control means is capable of controlling the progress of the game.

  The game board or the front frame is provided with abnormal magnetic detection means. Abnormal magnetism detection means is capable of detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism, and is based on the magnetic state in the ambient environment of the abnormal magnetism detection means based on the input of a request signal from the outside when the power is turned on. Can be set to.

  In the game control means, a signal indicating whether or not the occurrence of abnormal magnetism has been detected is input from the abnormal magnetism detection means, and the front frame is closed to the outer frame after the front frame is released from the outer frame. The request signal can be output to the abnormal magnetic detection means based on the above.

  As described above, the abnormal magnetic detection means capable of detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism provided in the game board or the front frame includes a state where the front frame is opened from the outer frame and a state where the front frame is closed to the outer frame. In this case, the change in geomagnetism affects the detection of the occurrence of abnormal magnetism. For example, if any trouble occurs in a gaming machine, a staff member of a game hall (hall) opens the front frame from the outer frame and shuts off the power to the gaming machine. When the power is turned on and the front frame is closed again to the outer frame, the abnormal magnetism detection means can set the magnetic state in its surrounding environment in the state where the front frame is opened from the outer frame, and the front frame. When the front frame is closed to the outer frame after being released from the outer frame, a request signal from the game control means for controlling the progress of the game is input to the abnormal magnetic detection means, and the player plays a game The magnetic state in the surrounding environment in the state where the front frame is closed to the outer frame can be set as a reference. As a result, in a state where the front frame, in which the player is playing, is closed to the outer frame, the setting based on the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means itself can be reliably performed. ing. Therefore, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the outer frame 2 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the outer frame, the game board 4 in FIG. 9 corresponds to the game board, and the front frame configured by the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in FIG. Corresponds to the front frame, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 13 corresponds to the game control means, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the game machine, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. 9 corresponds to the abnormal magnetic detection means. The offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 in FIG. 27 corresponds to the request signal, and the offset adjustment processing in FIG. 22 “sets the magnetic state in the ambient environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means” as a reference. Correspondingly, the magnet detection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. 19A corresponds to “a signal indicating whether or not the occurrence of abnormal magnetism has been detected”.

(Solution 4)
A gaming machine comprising a front frame that is pivotally supported by an outer frame installed on a gaming island so as to be freely opened and closed and on which a game board can be mounted, and a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, The front frame is provided with a magnetic detection means capable of determining whether an illegal act by a magnet is performed based on a detection signal from a magnetic impedance sensor element capable of detecting minute magnetism with high accuracy. The magnetic detection means can automatically perform the process of setting the detection signal from the magnetic impedance sensor element as a measurement reference when the power is turned on, and a request signal from the outside is input. The game control means can input a determination result as to whether or not an illegal act by the magnet is performed from the magnetic detection means, Gaming machine whose serial front frame and outputs the request signal based on which the front frame after being released from the outer frame is closed to the outer frame to the magnetic detection means.

  This gaming machine includes a front frame and game control means. The front frame is pivotally supported by an outer frame installed on the game island so as to be openable and closable, and can be equipped with a game board. The game control means is capable of controlling the progress of the game.

  The game board or the front frame is provided with magnetic detection means. The magnetic detection means can determine whether or not an illegal act by a magnet is performed based on a detection signal from a magnetic impedance sensor element that can detect minute magnetism with high accuracy. .

  The magnetic detection means can automatically perform the process of setting the detection signal from the magnetic impedance sensor element as a measurement reference when the power is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). In addition, it can be performed based on the input of a request acquisition signal from the outside.

  The game control means that the determination result of whether or not an illegal act by the magnet is performed is input from the magnetic detection means, and the front frame is closed to the outer frame after the front frame is released from the outer frame. The request signal can be output to the magnetic detection means based on the above.

  As described above, the game board or the front frame determines whether or not an illegal act by the magnet is performed based on the detection signal from the magnetic impedance sensor element that can detect minute magnetism with high accuracy. Since the magnetic sensing means is provided, detection from the magneto-impedance sensor element is performed by changing the geomagnetism between the state in which the front frame is opened from the outer frame and the state in which the front frame is closed to the outer frame. The signal will be affected. For example, if any trouble occurs in a gaming machine, a staff member of a game hall (hall) opens the front frame from the outer frame and shuts off the power to the gaming machine. When power is turned on and the front frame is closed again to the outer frame, the magnetic detection means automatically performs a process of setting a detection signal from the magnetic impedance sensor element as a measurement reference in a state where the front frame is opened from the outer frame. In addition, when the front frame is closed to the outer frame after the front frame is released from the outer frame, a request signal from the game control means for controlling the progress of the game is input to the magnetic detection means. It is possible to perform a process for setting a detection signal from the magneto-impedance sensor element as a measurement reference in a state where the front frame in which the player is playing is closed to the outer frame. . As a result, in the state where the front frame, which is a state in which the player plays a game, is closed to the outer frame, the process of setting the measurement standard can be performed reliably. Therefore, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the outer frame 2 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the outer frame, the game board 4 in FIG. 9 corresponds to the game board, and the front frame configured by the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in FIG. Corresponds to the front frame, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 13 corresponds to the game control means, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the gaming machine, and the two magnetic detection switches 3024 in FIG. The impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b correspond to magnetic impedance sensor elements, the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. 9 corresponds to magnetic detection means, and the offset adjustment processing in FIG. 27, the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 in FIG. 27 corresponds to the request signal, and from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. Logic set in a magnet detection signal force corresponds to the "determination result of whether or not performed an illegal act by the magnet".

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a schematic block diagram (side view) of a door frame side display device. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 9 and was seen from the front. It is a front view of the game board on which the image from a projector with which an upper plate side display device is equipped is projected. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 13. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 13. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. The block diagram (a) of a magnetic detection switch, the table (b) for demonstrating the terminal of a magnetic detection switch, and the table (c) for setting the detection distance of a magnetic detection switch. It is the schematic (a) which shows the magnetic detection range when the magnetic detection switch is seen from the upper surface, and is the schematic (b) which shows the magnetic detection range when the magnetic detection switch is seen from the side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on process at the side of the magnetic detection control performed by a magnetic detection switch. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the offset adjustment process performed in the process at the time of power-on of the magnetic detection control side. It is a timing chart which shows the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of a magnetic detection switch. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4A is a block diagram showing a power generation circuit, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing a relationship between power consumption and a power consumption suppression level accompanying the power consumption. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 24. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram for performing the power supply to a magnetic detection switch, and a power supply interruption. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 33 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 32. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a schematic block diagram of a projector. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 41 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 40. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on process of FIG. 43. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a magnetic detection switch starting start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the malfunction determination process at the time of a magnetic detection switch starting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an offset adjustment implementation request process. It is a process which shows an example of the malfunction determination process at the time of a magnetic detection switch offset adjustment execution request. It is a timing chart which starts and restarts a magnetic detection switch. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit of FIG. 51. FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 52. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pay-out ball engagement operation determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere ball movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power saving power saving mode transition determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power consumption monitoring process. The figure which shows the relationship between the value set as a master volume value for power suppression, and a power consumption suppression stage, The figure which shows the relationship between the brightness | luminance set as a brightness | luminance for power suppression, and a power consumption suppression stage (b) ). It is a figure which shows an example of effects, such as a variable display displayed on the display area of a game board side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the production | presentation by the upper dish side display apparatus with which an upper decoration unit is equipped. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the production | presentation by the upper dish side display apparatus with which an upper decoration unit is equipped. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation by the door frame side display apparatus with which a left side decoration unit is equipped. It is a figure which shows an example of the adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector with which each is equipped with an upper plate | pan display device and a door frame side display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the case where a three-dimensional model | molding body is provided in the inner wall of a right side decoration unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the case where a three-dimensional model | molding body is provided in the approximate center of the front-view front-back left-right direction of a dish unit upper-plate upper panel. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 and an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown; may be described as “pachinko island facility”). A box-shaped main body frame 3 that is pivotally supported to be freely opened and closed, and a front side is opened; A door frame 5 pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 is provided so as to close the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 from the player side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stores a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed below the gaming window 101. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 that a player operates to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 It is equipped with.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and the horizontal widths in the horizontal directions are substantially the same. The size of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than that of the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in front view, and projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. In this way, two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. The game balls and obstacle nails in the area 1100, various winning holes and bonuses cannot be touched.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates. And four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of 10, 11, 12, and 13 and connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 with the connecting member 14 to form a vertically long rectangular shape ( (Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. Note that an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light metal molds (for example, aluminum alloys) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower support plate 20 and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12. A support bracket 21, a reinforcement bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be opened and closed. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support bracket 644 of the main body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the main body frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644, the main body frame 3 can be simply mounted by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 in the support hole 20c. It can be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) attached and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 with a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 1) of a locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to each other. The engagement is released and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 that are respectively attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the main body frame base 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5; A hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into a game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out a ball, and when the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end portion of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is formed to have a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. Has been. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 through which the inside of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4, and the main body frame A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 when viewed from the front, and is recessed backward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 to the rear. The protruding door frame protruding piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The free end portions (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605 so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall when viewed from the front in the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fastened, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged in the left-right direction in a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 And. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out-ball discharge groove of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. Yes. Further, the game board locking portion can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. . Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The ball striking device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 that extends leftward and downward is formed on the left side of the front view of the ball hitting device 650 from the upper end of the shot rail 660. It is like that. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626. The game ball descending the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) in the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in the front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the opening and the left and right sides in the front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating the through hole. The opening portion of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The 800 main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. A door frame opening switch 618 is attached, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It is like that. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 will be described. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are respectively attached to the bracket mounting portions on the upper left and lower rear ends of the main body frame base 600 using a predetermined screw to attach the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. Portion 632, a shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the shaft support pin 633 in front view (FIG. 7). And the door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating in the up-down direction, and the front end of the front extension 632 hangs downward from the front end and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft support 630, the attachment portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is provided. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-like front extension 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension 642b, and the front And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end portion of the extension portion 642b when viewed from the front and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward and downward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A front extending portion 644b that protrudes, and a main body frame shaft support hole that penetrates in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion and a front extension portion 644b by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft bracket 640 is in a state where the mounting portion of the door frame shaft bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension part 642b and the front extension part 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment part of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support 640 are coaxial. The body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protruding piece 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21, so that the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed. It is like that.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640. 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. 5 is mounted on the front extension 642b of the door frame shaft bracket 642, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed on the door frame of the upper shaft bracket 630. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the pivotal support hole 634. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball launching device 650 will be described. The hitting ball launching device 650 is mounted so that the metal plate launch base 652 is mounted at a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600, and the rotary drive shaft 654a projects forward from the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. Firing solenoid 654, a hitting ball 656 fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a predetermined movement path of the tip 658 A firing rail 660 extending diagonally to the upper left when viewed from the front and attached to the front surface of the firing base 652, and a tip 658 at the tip of the hitting ball 656 passes between the firing rail 660 and the top of the firing rail 660. A ball stopper that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time. 662 and a stopper for restricting the ball hitting ball 656 (tip 658) from rotating toward the shooting rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the shooting rail 660 by the ball stopper piece 662 can be hit. 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is not shown in detail, but the rotational drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. . Further, the hitting ball basket 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654, and a gentle arc extending from the fixed portion 656a, and the tip is centered on the rotation drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a hook portion 656b with the hook tip 658 fixed to the tip at a normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the hook portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween, and a stopper portion 656c capable of contacting the stopper 664 It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  When the hitting ball launcher 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located below and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. Thus, a foul space 626 extending downward is formed. The hit ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. It has become. In a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is positioned below the foul space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored, and the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on a predetermined payout instruction. To pay out. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls supplied from the Pachinko island equipment side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 as viewed from the front, A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the rail 731; a ball stop piece 735 that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the outlet; It is equipped with. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a predetermined width that communicates with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width that is slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage that opens into the left side of the rear view when bent in a substantially square shape and communicates with the lower left side (open side) of the rear side of the distribution space, and the right side of the rear side of the distribution space (Axis support side) A ball passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is meshed with the first gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 and disposed behind the motor support plate, the second gear meshing with the first gear, and the second gear. The third gear that rotates together with the third gear and the dispensing rotator as a sprocket disposed in the distribution space and the dispensing rotator are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear interposed therebetween. A rotation detecting board having a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits formed at equal intervals in the direction, and a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage; A counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752 Hold A rotational angle switch substrate 753 includes payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotator as a sprocket has three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the game supplied from the supply passage by rotating the payout rotator. The balls are housed in the recesses one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball passage passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detecting board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are equally formed (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detecting board, and correspond to between the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The award ball device 740 is configured such that when the payout rotating body is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage is paid out to the award ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball removal passage. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end. The full branching unit 770 opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end, and the award of the prize ball device 740 is obtained. A prize ball receiving hole for a game ball flowing down the ball passage, a branching space that is arranged below the prize ball receiving hole and extends in the left-right direction, and a game from directly under the prize ball receiving hole in the branching space to the front side A normal path for guiding the ball, a normal ball outlet 774 that releases the game ball flowing through the normal path to the front and opened at the front right end of the front view, and the right side in the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving opening in the branch space A full tank passage that guides the game ball from the raised position to the front side, and a full ball exit 776 that discharges the game ball that has circulated through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left in front of the normal ball outlet 774. ing.

  In addition, the full tank branching unit 770 includes a ball receiving port that receives a game ball that opens upward at the left end portion of the rear end upper portion when viewed from the front and flows down the ball passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball receiving portion. A ball passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has circulated through the ball passage is released forward and at the left end of the front view at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball exit 776 And an open ball outlet.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) and communicates with each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540, The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. The ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side upper end of the main body frame base ball passage in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet is the main body frame of the main body frame base 600. It is to be delivered to the base ball passage.

  When a game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the upper ball ball is raised from the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that can no longer come out to the side of the tray 301 stagnate in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fill up the normal passage upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving port cannot normally enter the passage, and starts moving in the lateral direction in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved in the horizontal direction is full. So as to enter the tongue passage and be supplied from the full bulb exit to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage, and the second bulb outlet of the foul cover unit 540. It has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the substrate unit 800 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the substrate unit base 810, and a substrate. A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box attached to the rear face of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front. And board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 downward from the left and right front in front view, A discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and the front of the discharge passage 842 and the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) is opened forward and upward. A power supply board box holder 840 having a box housing portion that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side and can accommodate the front end of the power board board box 850.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 is circulated through the main body frame base ball passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600 and flows down to the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening of the substrate unit base 810. The game ball and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. It has become.

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. A power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front, and a box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 attached to the rear surface and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In the present embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 is configured such that the operation switch 860a attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when clearing the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is reported, it is operated to cancel the error, and the RAM clearing function at power-on and the power-on (time period for functioning as RAM clearing have elapsed) And a function of canceling an error in (after). A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear face of the board base 871 and fixed with a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear, and a board base. A board for lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball attached to the rear surface of 871 and having CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed to the rear, so that peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. And a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connection with a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided in the door frame 5, the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This relays connections with various units and various devices. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face the front side of the main body frame base 600, Wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the front side of the relay terminal plate cover 692. Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining rental display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the tray unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. It should be noted that the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display unit 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 are provided. The description will be described later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each decorative unit 200, 240, 280 and the decorative unit provided in the plate unit 300 or the operation unit 400 and the operation unit 400 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The relay is for relaying the connection between the various switches for detecting the operation of the drive motor 414 and the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Various wirings that are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 from the side 5 are routed to the lower back side of the door frame 5 on the closed side and to the connector provided on the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Although it is in a state of extending from the side, it is arranged in a bundled state by a white translucent spiral cable tube. With this spiral cave tube, various wirings electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 from the door frame 5 side can be neatly bundled into one, and bundled into this one. By releasing the state, the state of various wirings can be confirmed. In addition, various wirings electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 from the door frame 5 side are bundled into one by the cable tube, so that the outer diameter of the cable tube is the outer diameter of one wiring. Since it becomes much larger, it will never enter the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and one wiring of various wirings will never enter the gap between the main body frame and the panel door (door frame). When the panel door (door frame) is closed with respect to the main body frame, the gap is narrowed and the wiring is not disconnected. The decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the drive motor 414 and the rotation pressing operation provided in the operation unit 400 are also described. The description of the various switches that detect the operation of the unit 405 will be given later.

[4. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape), A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side facing the right side decoration unit 200 and attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of 100. Note that the front surface of the right side decoration unit 200 protrudes forward in comparison with the front surface of the upper decoration unit 280 and the front surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and is about twice as large as the front surface of the left side decoration unit 240. Projecting forward with a distance dimension of Further, the inner side wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed so as to protrude forward along the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and thus has a smooth surface curved in an arc shape along the gaming window 101. In the present embodiment, at least the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is painted to be black (may be gray) (in other words, an effect image in which the entire inner wall 201 includes black or gray) Can be displayed clearly). Note that an advertisement sticker for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is attached to the outer wall 202 of the right side decoration unit 200 that is opposite to the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200. Since a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are arranged in the pachinko island facility, the location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affixed to the outer wall 202 of the right side decoration unit 200. The advertisement sticker can be used as a landmark to identify the hall concourse.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door frame 5. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 to perform a game ball driving operation, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 (see FIG. 1) attached to the right side of the foul cover unit 540, a ball feed unit 580 (see FIG. 1) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame base unit 100 A glass unit 590 attached to close the gaming window 101 on the rear side; To have.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a substantially elliptical shape. An upper bracket 120 that is attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110 and fixes the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides that are attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. The speaker 130 and a handle bracket for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower part, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1) attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. 1), and a launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) that is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. A main control board mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191 and provided in a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and a game board 4 described later. A handle relay terminal plate 192 (see FIG. 1) that relays the connection to the 100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a center in the left-right direction. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 that is disposed on the opposite side to the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 (on the right side (axial support side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. (See FIG. 1) and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to a peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. And an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically illustrated, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400 are provided. Wiring for electrically connecting the various switches that detect the operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the tray unit 300, and the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140. However, the main frame relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are gathered and bundled at the right side (axial support side) position in the rear view of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and then extended backward. 882 is connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, of the decoration units 200, 240, and 280, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 is below the upper decoration unit 280. An upper dish side display device 1820 capable of displaying an effect image with the entire upper plate upper panel 314 (described later) of the arranged dish unit 300 as a projection plane is provided, and the left outer periphery of the game window 101 is in front of the door frame base unit 100. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the right side decoration unit 240 faces the left side decoration unit 240 and projects the entire inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. As a door frame side display device 1821 capable of displaying an effect image. The upper dish side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 is the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 facing the lower side of the upper dish side display device 1820 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 can project and display an effect image, and the door frame side display device 1821 provided in the left side decoration unit 240 has the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. An effect image can be projected and displayed with the entire inner side wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 as a projection plane facing slightly upward. The upper dish side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 has a U-shape in the area between the game area 1100 formed on the game board 4 and the outer periphery extending from the center to the lower side of the center accessory 2300. When the projection sheet 1150A is affixed to the front of the cell image of the gaming panel 1150, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. A projection image can be projected and displayed on the entire surface of the projection sheet 1150A and the entire surface of various units (attacker unit 2100, side prize port member 2200, variable prize port unit described later). The effect image can be projected and displayed using the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 as a projection plane. It has become the jar.

  Here, an upper pan side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame side display device 1821 provided in the left side decoration unit 240 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic configuration diagram (front view) of the upper dish side display device, and FIG. 8B is a schematic configuration diagram (front view) of the door frame side display device. 8B, the inner side wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed so as to protrude forward along the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and has an arcuate shape along the gaming window 101 as described above. Although it is a smooth surface that is curved, it is described as a plane in order to make the drawing easy to see, and the door frame side display device 1821 has the right side decoration unit 200 of the right side decoration unit 200 facing slightly upward as described above. Although the effect image is projected and displayed with the entire inner wall 201 as the projection plane, the entire inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is projected to the right (horizontal direction) for easy viewing of the drawing. As described above, the effect image is projected and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the upper dish side display device 1820 includes a housing 1825 having a box shape and a projector 1850 attached to the bottom surface of the housing 1825. The upper dish-side display device 1820 projects an image emitted from the projector 1850 toward the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 disposed below the upper decoration unit 280, so that a predetermined state corresponding to the gaming state is obtained. The effect image can be clearly displayed on the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405).

  Note that the upper-plate-side display device 1820 has a transparent projection sheet 1150A having a U-shape in a game area 1100 formed on the game board 4 and an outer periphery extending from the center to the lower side of the center accessory 2300. When pasted on the front surface of the cell image on the panel 1150, an image emitted from the projector 1850 is displayed on the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A disposed below the upper dish side display device 1820, and various units ( The entire surface of the attacker unit 2100, the side prize opening member 2200, and a variable prize opening unit described later) can be projected and displayed as projection surfaces, and the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 can be displayed. Projection images can be projected and displayed on the projection plane, and the upper plate side display By projecting toward the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A disposed below the table 1820 and the entire surface of various units (the attacker unit 2100, the side prize port member 2200, a variable prize port unit described later). The predetermined effect image according to the game state can be clearly displayed on the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A, and can be displayed on the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 disposed below the upper decoration unit 280. By projecting toward the front, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the gaming state can be clearly displayed on the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). It is like that.

  A projector drive board box 1906 that houses a projector drive board 1800 that drives and controls the projector 1850 is attached to the upper surface of the housing 1825. As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100 includes the projector 1850 in addition to the decoration board that drives and controls the decoration lamp (including the decoration LED) and the like. A projector driving substrate 1800 for driving control is provided.

  The casing 1825 can be rotated so that the optical axis of the projector 1850 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction with respect to the entire surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). There are provided a front-rear direction adjustment knob 1825a of a type and a rotation type left-right direction adjustment knob 1825b capable of adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1850 in the left-right direction. When the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a is manually rotated in one direction (forward rotation), the optical axis of the projector 1850 is gradually directed forward as the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front in accordance with the rotation operation. On the other hand, when the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a is manually rotated in the direction opposite to the one direction (reverse rotation), the optical axis of the projector 1850 is viewed from the front when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed along with the rotation operation. It is gradually turned backward. When the horizontal adjustment knob 1825b is manually rotated in one direction (forward rotation), the optical axis of the projector 1850 is gradually turned to the left when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front in accordance with the rotation operation. On the other hand, when the left / right adjustment knob 1825b is manually rotated in the direction opposite to the one direction (reverse rotation), the optical axis of the projector 1850 moves the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front in accordance with the rotation operation. It is gradually turned to the right.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, a staff member such as a store clerk in the hall starts from the back side of the door frame 5 (below the center of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 1). The front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a and the left / right direction adjustment knob 1825b can be manually operated to rotate forward or backward, respectively, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. In this state, the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1825a and the left-right direction adjustment knob 1825b cannot be manually rotated in the forward or reverse direction, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be viewed from the front. I can't do it.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a distance measuring sensor 1822. The distance measuring sensor 1822 is located at a position where the player's finger or hand enters the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (more precisely, the distance between the distance measuring sensor 1822 and the player's finger or hand). (Dimension) can be detected. A detection signal from the distance measuring sensor 1822 is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via various boards and various terminal boards, and the peripheral control board 4140 is based on the input detection signal from the distance measuring sensor 1822. Whether the distance between the distance measuring sensor 1822 and the player's finger or hand is acquired and the player's finger or hand is in the upper region of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 And the moving speed of the player's finger or hand within the upper region of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 can be measured.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the door frame side display device 1821 includes a housing 1826 having a box shape and a projector 1851 attached to the right inner surface of the housing 1826. The door frame side display device 1821 is formed on the right side decoration unit 200 that attaches the image emitted from the projector 1851 to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to face the left side decoration unit 240. By projecting toward the inner side wall 201, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the gaming state can be clearly displayed on the entire surface of the inner side wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200.

  A projector driving board box 1907 that houses a projector driving board 1801 that drives and controls the projector 1851 is attached to the left outer surface of the housing 1826. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100 includes the projector 1851 in addition to the decoration board for driving and controlling the decoration lamp (including the decoration LED) and the like. A projector driving board 1801 for controlling the driving of the projector.

  The casing 1826 includes a rotary front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a that can adjust the optical axis of the projector 1851 in the front / rear direction with respect to the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200, and a projector 1851. A rotary type vertical adjustment knob 1826b that can adjust the optical axis in the vertical direction is provided. When the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a is manually rotated in one direction (forward rotation), the optical axis of the projector 1851 is gradually directed forward when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front in accordance with the rotation operation. On the other hand, when the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a is manually rotated in the direction opposite to the one direction (reverse rotation), the optical axis of the projector 1851 is viewed from the front when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed along with the rotation operation. It is gradually turned backward. When the vertical adjustment knob 1826b is manually rotated in one direction (forward rotation), the optical axis of the projector 1851 is gradually directed upward when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front in accordance with the rotation operation. On the other hand, when the vertical adjustment knob 1826b is manually rotated in the direction opposite to the one direction (reverse rotation), the optical axis of the projector 1851 is seen from the front when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed in accordance with the rotation operation. It is gradually turned downward.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, a staff member such as a store clerk in the hall is disposed from the back side of the door frame 5 (above the side speaker 130 on the closed side of the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 1). ) The front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a and the vertical direction adjustment knob 1826b can be manually operated to rotate forward or backward, respectively, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. In this state, the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a and the vertical direction adjustment knob 1826b cannot be manually rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction, respectively, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be viewed from the front. It has become.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin, and is formed in such a manner that the gaming window 101 having a vertically long and substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. Has been. The gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. In addition, a rectangular notch that allows insertion of the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. A speaker mounting portion for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, a right side (open side) end of the front surface disposed at the lower right corner portion in front view and bulging forward The handle mounting portion for tilting the handle bracket to tilt backward, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and the upper side of the handle mounting portion. Thus, a lock hole 116 (see FIG. 1) is formed which is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short forward and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a shaft support attached along the back side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame base body 110. Side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the gaming window 101 of the door frame base body 110 And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the lower side, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  An upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof. Integrated. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 1) that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 is provided at the lower rear portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are disengaged, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The tray unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are shot through the ball feeding unit. Can be supplied to the device 650.

  The shape of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is formed so as to protrude forward in a straight line from the left direction to the right direction in a front view, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a top view. The upper dish upper panel 314 is a surface having a forward downward inclination (front downward inclined surface). In the present embodiment, at least the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is painted to be black (may be gray) (in other words, the entire upper plate upper panel 314 includes black or gray). The effect image can be clearly displayed), and the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is a surface having a forward downward slope (front downward inclined surface), so that the pachinko gaming machine The effect image displayed on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 can be made easier to see for a player seated on the front of 1.

  The inner space of the upper plate upper panel 314 is communicated with the upper plate 301, and is configured as a large capacity space by the upper plate 301 and the inner space of the upper plate upper panel 314. Therefore, a large amount of game balls can be stored in a space formed by the upper plate 301 and the internal space of the upper plate upper panel 314. Note that, in the internal space of the upper plate upper panel 314, the operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is partitioned by a partition so that the game ball does not contact.

  As described above, the upper plate upper panel 314 is a surface having a forward downward slope (front downward inclined surface), but the bottom surface communicating with the upper plate 301 in the internal space of the upper plate upper panel 314 is: It is a surface (backward downward inclined surface) having a backward downward slope toward the downstream side of the upper plate 301. That is, when a game ball is stored on the downstream side of the upper plate 301, the subsequent game ball is received and stored in the internal space of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the upper plate 301. When the number of game balls to be stored decreases, the game balls stored in the internal space of the upper plate upper panel 314 naturally fall on the downstream side of the upper plate 301 along a surface having a rearward downward inclination (rearward downward inclined surface). It is designed to roll toward.

  In this embodiment, 300 game balls can be stored by the inner space of the upper plate 301 and the upper plate upper panel 314. On the premise that the player does not have a possession ball, when starting the game, by first pressing the lending button 361 provided in the lending unit 360 that operates the CR unit described later, For example, 1000 yen of game balls are acquired as rental balls. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to pay out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. In this case, 250 balls are paid out by repeating one payout operation 10 times as the number of game balls for 1000 yen. The number of game balls that can be stored by the inner space of the upper plate 301 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is designed to be 300 balls obtained by adding 50 extra balls to the 250 balls. When the space between the upper plate 301 and the inner space of the upper plate upper panel 314 is filled with game balls, the game balls flowing toward the upper plate 301 overflow on the upstream side of the upper plate 301, although not shown. The structure flows down toward the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the tray unit 300 is a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341 (that is, a game ball stored in the inner space of the upper plate 301 and the upper plate upper panel 314). In order to pull out the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 in accordance with the operation of the lower dish ball removal button 354 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. And a ball rental unit 360 that operates a later-described CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is attached to an operation unit mounting portion provided at a substantially center in the front / rear / left / right direction of the upper plate upper panel 314, and is disposed at a substantially center of the upper plate / upper panel 314 in the front / rear / left / right direction. The player is provided with a rotation pressing operation unit 405 that can be rotated by the player and that can be pressed by the player, and accepts the player's operation or moves the rotation pressing operation unit 405 according to the gaming state. It is possible to participate not only in a game ball driving operation for a player but also in an effect during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the pressing operation of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a pressure detection switch provided in the operation unit 400. ing. The upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 is formed as a flat surface without unevenness, and protrudes about 3 mm from the surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 so that the player can operate it. When the player presses the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and the rotation pressing operation unit 405 is pushed toward the inner space of the upper plate upper panel 314 until reaching the pressing direction limit position, the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 And the surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 are arranged on the same plane. From this state, when the player releases the pressing operation of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 (that is, the player presses the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 so that the rotation pressing operation unit 405 enters the inner space of the upper plate upper panel 314. When the finger or hand that has been pushed in until it reaches the limit position in the pressing direction is removed from the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405), the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 is dished by the restoring force of a compression spring (not shown) provided in the operation unit 400. The unit 300 returns to the pressing operation standby position that protrudes about 3 mm from the surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the unit 300 again.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 can rotate the rotation pressing operation unit 405 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the rotation pressing operation unit 405 step by step with the driving force of the driving motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the rotation pressing operation unit 405, The rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from intentionally rotating, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the rotary pressing operation unit 405 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for rotating in reverse. In this embodiment, the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 and the surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the pan unit 300 are parallel surfaces, and the rotation axis of the rotary press operation unit 405 is the upper plate upper panel. It is configured to coincide with the normal line of the surface 314. That is, even if the rotation pressing operation unit 405 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to its own rotation axis, the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and the surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 Are maintained in a parallel state.

[4-2-2. Rental unit]
The lending unit 360 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball rental button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365c can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is disposed adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is attached to the inside of the ball rental unit 360. . When the ball rental unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a cash or prepaid card and the ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit. 300 can be lent out (paid out) into the top plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the remaining cash or prepaid card is returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball transport unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are supplied to the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan 302 by operating the upper pan ball release button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

  The ball feeding unit 580 is an intrusion port in which game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball opening of the door frame base body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball opening that opens below the intrusion opening and is open at the rear, and a box-like shape that closes the rear end of the front cover and opens the front, and penetrates in the front-rear direction The rear cover having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball that has entered from the intrusion port of the front cover to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball removing member that is pivotally supported and has a partitioning portion for partitioning between the entrance and the ball outlet on the rear side of the front cover, and the game balls on the partitioning portion of the ball removing member are hit one by one on the rear cover. Up and down between the front cover and the rear cover before feeding to the supply port 582a And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member accepts one game ball, while when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member accepts it. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, is cylindrical, and has a handle base whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that is rotatable relative to the handle base. Arranged at the front of the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and being rotatable integrally with the rear of the rotary handle main body. And a front end cover 508 that is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body in cooperation with the handle base.

  In addition, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and the shaft member bearing portion is fitted. A potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft portion that can be rotated together and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and is fixed to the front surface of the handle base so that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched between the handle base and A switch support member having a through-hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to the touch switch 516 at a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member; A single-shot button that is pivotally supported with respect to the switch support member and operates the firing stop switch 518. And a handle that is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member and urges the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). And a return spring. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle. In addition, after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, it is rotated from the original rotational position to the limit rotational position (rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) that is the maximum rotational position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. To do.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor. When the front part 506 of the rotary handle and the rear part of the rotary handle body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotational position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, so that the rotary handle A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launch intensity corresponding to (a match with) the rotation angle of the front of the main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle, that is, the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle. Yes.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is played by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or a ball hitting device 650 though it has been shot. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base that is open on the front side and has a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a first base that communicates with the first sphere inlet and expands to the right in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542. One ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and having a larger opening than the first ball inlet 542a, and communicated with the second ball passage and inside the cover base And a second sphere inlet 542c that extends downward and is inclined toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. Note that the second ball passage in the cover base has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end being approximately three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodating space that can be accommodated is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially upper center in the left-right direction and has a foul ball inlet 542e that opens upward, and a foul that communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage. And a ball passage. In addition, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second bulb entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank and opening / closing the shutter 792. It can be in an open state.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base and penetrates in the front-rear direction. An outlet, and a second ball outlet that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to an upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through a notch portion of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower tray ball supply bowl in the tray unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet through the ball passage opening of the door frame base main body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a from the first ball outlet to the dish unit 300 through the first ball passage. It can supply to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The plate unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply basket and the lower plate ball supply port.

  Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device When the game ball launched by 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, the game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. The foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. It can be done.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be swingable by a game ball stored in the accommodation space. A member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that biases the swing member in a non-detection state by the full switch 550. The swinging member is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base, and the upper end is rotated to the left when viewed from the front. It comes to form. Further, the swing member is biased to a position where the swing member is in a substantially vertical state by a spring. Further, the swinging member is formed with a detection piece projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is driven when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines an outer periphery, and a position that is visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front component member 1110 when viewed from the front. And a plurality of openings 1158 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 and attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100. A plate-like game panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a game panel; A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of 1150, and a.

  Further, the game board 4 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light-emitting decorative holes that penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and that can display a predetermined effect image that is visible from the player side according to the gaming state, and a lower part of the back unit 3000 Is provided with a board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160. Note that a predetermined cell image (content representing a world view by a character unit 3400 described later provided in the back unit 3000) is pasted on the surface of the game panel 1150. The back side of the cell image is an adhesive seal to which a strong adhesive is applied.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 will be described. The front component member 1110 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and has an inner shape that penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the region 1100 is partitioned. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between a closed position that extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and an open position that rotates clockwise from the front and opens the outer rail 1111. And a backflow preventing member 1116 biased by a spring so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the front component member 1110 is in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is a launch rail 660 in the hitting ball launcher 650 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 1). )). Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the biasing force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, if the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received by the start opening 2101, 2102 or the winning opening 2103, 2104, 2201, etc. of the table unit 2000, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100, The out-port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 is guided to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the out-port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. .

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. 1 (see FIG. 1) is dropped and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626. It is discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is alleviated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  In addition, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end when viewed from the front, is recessed from the front to the rear and is opened at the left end, and is spaced apart from the right end when viewed from the front in the vertical direction. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged, a fixed recess 1121 which is arranged on the left side of the front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and is formed in an arc shape on the upper side and recessed from the front side, and a lower end of the front view And a ball passage cutout 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning concave portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3, thereby allowing the game board holding port 601 (see FIG. 5). It is possible to restrict the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the front view from moving in the front-rear direction. The game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is connected to the game board. By locking to the stop portion, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 has a game board fixture 690 (see FIG. 5) pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 5) is inserted into the game board fixing tool 690, and the game board fixing tool 690 allows the game board 4 to be inserted. The lower end of the head is restricted from moving forward. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged at the lower right of the front component member 1110 when viewed from the front.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 200 includes an attacker unit 2100 that is disposed at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and above the out port 1151 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 1150, and an outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the left of the attacker unit 2100 And a side prize opening member 2200 supported along the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 disposed approximately at the center of the gaming area 1100 and supported by the gaming panel 1150. Yes.

  On the straight line between the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2300 and passing through the midpoint of the upper side of the game panel 1150 and the midpoint of the lower side of the game panel 1150 (that is, on the vertical center line of the game panel 1150) An accommodation recess (not shown) for accommodating a magnetic detection switch 3024 having a rectangular parallelepiped shape capable of detecting magnetism is formed from the front surface of the panel 1150 toward the back surface side of the game panel 1150. A through hole (not shown) for passing the electric wiring of the magnetic detection switch 3024 from the bottom side toward the back side of the game panel 1150 is formed. The shape of the housing recess on the opening side is a plus tolerance (in this embodiment, 1/10 mm to 10 mm) from the detection surface of the rectangular magnetic detection switch 3024 whose distance in the horizontal direction is longer than the distance in the vertical direction. The size is set within a range of up to 2 mm / min.) The distance between the opening and the bottom of the housing recess and the distance from the bottom to the bottom (distance in the depth direction) is a magnetic detection switch. The positive tolerance is set larger than the distance dimension in the depth direction of 3024 (in the present embodiment, the size is set in a range from 1/10 mm to 2/10 mm).

  When the connector surface side to which the electrical wiring of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is connected is inserted from the front of the game panel 1150 into the opening side of the housing recess and pushed toward the bottom surface of the housing recess, the game panel 1150 is viewed from the front, The magnetic detection switch 3024 is restrained from moving up and down, left and right, clockwise and counterclockwise, and has a rectangular magnet with a longer lateral distance than a longitudinal distance. The detection surface of the detection switch 3024 and the surface of the game panel 1150 are in the same plane, and a predetermined cell image (not shown) is pasted on the surface of the game panel 1150, thereby detecting the magnetic detection switch 3024. The front surface and the front surface of the game panel 1150 are fixed via the back surface of the cell image, so that the magnetic detection switch 3024 is moved in the front-rear direction. Movement is adapted to be bound of.

  That is, when the magnetic detection switch 3024 is housed in the housing recess of the gaming panel 1150 and the cell image is attached to the surface of the gaming panel 1150, the magnetic detection switch 3024 is fixed to the gaming panel 1150 without rattling. Therefore, vibration generated when the game ball flows down the game area 1100, vibration generated when driving the electric drive source, vibration generated when operating the movable body by driving the electric drive source The position where the magnetic detection switch 3024 is fixed (the positional relationship with respect to the ground axis) does not change due to the influence of such vibration, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 due to the influence of such vibration does not change. The magnetic change detected by is not generated. In the present embodiment, a magnetic detection switch 3024 is employed to detect fraud using a magnet, and a detailed description of the magnetic detection switch 3024 will be given later.

  The front unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150 and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, Can be changed. The table unit 2000 can decorate the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) through which game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The start port 2101, the lower start port 2102 disposed below the upper start port 2101, and the rectangular disposed below the lower start port 2102 and greatly extending in the left-right direction than the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 A large winning opening 2103 having a shape, and a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103 are provided. The game balls received in the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side.

  The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the lower start port 2102 disposed below the upper start port 2101 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by the start port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 13) between the upper start port 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 rises substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 In a state where the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102. That is, the lower start opening 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces 2106. It should be noted that the pair of movable pieces 2106 corresponds to a normal lottery result that is drawn based on detection of the passing of a game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate unit 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later (the result of the normal lottery is “winning” ”) And is opened and closed by driving the start-up solenoid 2105.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is pivotally supported at its lower side so that in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it difficult to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is turned, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be easily received. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a special lottery is drawn when a game ball is received (starts winning) into the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. Depending on the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 13) is driven to open and close.

  Furthermore, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the big winning port 2103. The game ball detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. The back unit 3000 includes an upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the upper start port 2101 and a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning port 2104. .

[5-2-2. Side prize opening member]
Next, the side prize opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150. Above, two fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and facing each other along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the front view in the attacker unit 2100 A general winning opening 2201 is provided. These two general winning holes 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can be received (winning) at all times, and the game balls received in the general winning holes 2201 are guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side. Then, it is detected by a general prize opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the side prize opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2200, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with the two general winning holes 2201 sandwiched therebetween, and the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower start opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100) A second shelf 2203 that becomes lower toward the game area 1100), and the first shelf 2202 can bring the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 toward the center of the game area 1100. It can be done.

  The two general winning ports 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game balls are brought closer to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. A third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning ports 2201.

  The side prize port member 2200 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side prize port decoration board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decorative board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side prize opening member 2200. Can be decorated with light emission.

[5-2-3. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front is in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer periphery of the game area 1100 The left outer peripheral surface is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so that a region with a predetermined width is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the game region 1100 and the outer periphery.

  The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left side from the position slightly on the right side in the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall portion located on the front surface of the game panel 1150. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down to the left of the center accessory 2300, and on the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game balls that have flowed down (invaded) flow down to the lower part of the game area 1100 through the right side of the center bonus 2300. In other words, when a game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a loose game.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered a warp inlet 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 and the warp inlet 2302. A warp exit (not shown) that releases the game ball into the frame, and a game ball released from the warp exit rolls in the left-right direction, and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame in 2300.

  Although the detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the game ball released from the warp outlet is supplied, and the game ball is placed from the first stage on the front side of the first stage. And a second stage that is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. This stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed at the rear side of the center of the first stage in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance in front of the lowermost end of the center accessory 2300. The game is discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. The chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the upper start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is received (wins) with high probability by the upper start opening 2101. ing.

  The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 is visible from the player side. It has become.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 is a transparent member extending leftward so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. Thereby, the game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch part 2315. .

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of a game ball in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a game entrance that is arranged on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate outlet of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is The portion 2315 can be seen as if diving.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light emitting elements formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction in a circular or X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the gaming area 1100 of the gaming panel 1150. The decorative hole is used for luminescent decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of light emitting decoration holes disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. An upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a rear side of the lower panel lens 2520. And a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides that have substantially the same shape as the light emitting decoration hole to be inserted. Department. In a state where the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. The ball is not affected as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can illuminate and decorate the area where the game ball flows even if an opaque game panel 1150 such as a veneer plywood is used by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate. In addition to being able to show the player the decoration of the gaming panel 1150 that has never been seen before, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be conspicuous and differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and is described as a liquid crystal display device 1900 (hereinafter referred to as "game board side liquid crystal display device 1900") at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance. ), An upper unit 3100 disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and a character unit disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. 3400 and a gear decoration body unit 3500 disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is disposed at a position corresponding to the side prize opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A side lamp decoration board 3014 and a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200, and a game received in the left general winning port 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 A left guiding member 3016 for guiding the ball downward, and a right guiding the game ball disposed on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and received in the upper start port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the attacker unit 2100. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 is disposed in the lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and has a horizontally-long rectangular lamp drive board box 3423 that accommodates the lamp drive board 4170, and a lower part of the lamp drive board box 3423. The motor drive board box 3430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed on the side and accommodates the motor drive board 4180 and the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 are arranged on the left side when viewed from the rear. A panel relay terminal plate 4161, a horizontally-long rectangular upper resistance substrate disposed at the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. Are further provided.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. Further, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 can move independently or in conjunction with each other depending on the gaming state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a game or a chance, and to entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing parts 3001a projecting outward at the front end, and on the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the fixing parts 3001a. It is supposed to be fixed. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through this opening can be viewed from the player side. Further, the back box 3001 is provided with mounting portions at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like.

  Although not shown, the back box 3001 inserts and locks one fixing piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in the rear view (right side in the rear view). A liquid crystal support portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening in the rear view. The other fixing piece 1902 (left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is supported by the lock member. A display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guide member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200 and the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. Each of the flow paths is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of the game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper start opening 2101 and the right general winning opening 2104 on the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The upper start opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the upper start opening 2101, and the general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the right general winning opening 2104.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160 and are discharged downward from the game board 4 from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed to be horizontally long as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is disposed on the front surface at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and is circular in a front view, and a lifting mechanism that moves up and down the rotational decoration body unit 3200. 3250, a swing decorative body unit 3300 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating ornament body unit 3200 can be moved up and down by an elevating mechanism 3250 between a raised position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. The rotating decorative body unit 3200 is configured such that a rotating decorative body formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface is rotated, and the rotation radius of the rotating decorative body is increased by the centrifugal force by rotating. It is like that.

  In addition, the rotating ornament body unit 3200 not only rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the rotation radius of the entire rotating ornament body expands and the appearance changes greatly. It is possible to make it possible to give a strong impact on the player, to delight the player and to suppress the interest in the game, and to attract the player's interest strongly Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko gaming machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  The swing ornament body unit 3300 includes swing ornament bodies disposed on the left and right sides of the swing ornament body unit 3200 adjacent to the rotational ornament body unit 3200 located at the ascending position. The body can be swung to the left and right at the same time.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 includes plate-like ceiling decoration bodies that extend in the horizontal direction at the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling decoration body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration body is lowered in a descending direction according to the gaming state. It has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 includes a character body that is shaped like a ninja and is three-dimensionally shaped, and the character body moves in the left-right direction from the right end position toward the center side according to the gaming state. Can be done. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body 3400 is rotated by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis in which the head extends in the left-right direction, and can reciprocate around the axis in which the right arm extends in the up-down direction. Can be done. Thus, by reciprocating the head, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is scolding. Further, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration body unit]
Next, the gear decoration body unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration body unit 3500 includes a gear-shaped gear decoration body that can be rotated around an axis extending in the left-right direction and is arranged in a plurality of vertical directions. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed piece 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral board box 1905 that houses a peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side.

[5-5. Game board on which images from the projector are projected]
Next, the game board 4 (here, “game board 4 in the second embodiment”) onto which an image from the projector 1850 provided in the upper pan side display device 1820 shown in FIG. Will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board on which an image from a projector provided in the upper dish side display device is projected. 9 and 10, substantially the same parts as the game board 4 (here, described as “game board 4 in the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIG. Is omitted.

  First, major differences between the game board 4 in the first embodiment and the game board 4 in the second embodiment will be described. The difference between the center combination 2300 of the game board 4 in the first embodiment and the center combination 2300 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment is the shape of the center combination 2300 of the game board 4 in the first embodiment. Is not a symmetrical shape, whereas the center combination 2300 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment is symmetrical and the center combination of the game board 4 in the first embodiment. The character unit 3400 is provided on the object 2300, whereas the center unit 2300 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment is not provided with the character unit 3400, and the game board 4 in the first embodiment is not provided. A gate portion 2350 (gate switch 2352) and an arch portion 2315 are provided only on the left side of the center accessory 2300, whereas the second portion The gate portion 2350 (gate switch 2352) and the arch portion 2315 are provided only on the right side of the center role 2300 of the game board 4 in the embodiment, and the center role 2300 of the game board 4 in the first embodiment. The warp entrance 2302 is provided only on the left side, whereas the warp entrance 2302 is provided on both the left and right sides of the center accessory 2300 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment.

  Further, the difference between the side prize port member 2200 of the game board 4 in the first embodiment and the side prize port member 2200 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment is that the side prize of the game board 4 in the first embodiment is different. The second shelf 2203 is provided in the mouth member 2200, whereas the second shelf 2203 is not provided in the side winning opening member 2200 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment, and the first implementation. The design is applied to the front face of the side prize opening member 2200 of the game board 4 in the form, whereas the entire front face of the side prize opening member 2200 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment displays the effect image as a projection plane. A smooth surface (for example, a surface without unevenness, a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment, a game in the second embodiment And 4 of the surface of the gaming panel 1150 can be given opposite directions toward and inflated curved surface or the like. And that it is coated is formed in black (or gray) as) a. Since the entire front face of the side winning opening member 2200 of the gaming board 4 in the second embodiment is painted in black or gray, the entire front face of the side winning opening member 2200 of the gaming board 4 in the second embodiment is used as a projection plane. The effect image including black and gray can be clearly displayed.

  The difference between the attacker unit 2100 of the gaming board 4 in the first embodiment and the attacker unit 2100 of the gaming board 4 in the second embodiment is provided in the attacker unit 2100 of the gaming board 4 in the first embodiment. On the lower side of the upper start port 2101, there is provided a variable winning port composed of a lower start port 2102 and a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a start port solenoid 2105, whereas the second embodiment Is provided with a variable prize opening comprising a lower start opening 2102 and a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a start opening solenoid 2105 below the upper start opening 2101 provided in the attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4. The design is applied to the front surface of the attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the first embodiment. In addition, the entire front surface of the attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment is a smooth surface (for example, a surface having no unevenness so that an effect image can be displayed as a projection surface, and the game board in the second embodiment. And a curved surface that bulges in the opposite direction to the surface of the gaming panel 1150 of the gaming board 4 in the second embodiment. It may be gray). Since the entire front surface of the attacker unit 2100 of the gaming board 4 in the second embodiment is painted in black or gray, the entire front surface of the attacker unit 2100 of the gaming board 4 in the second embodiment is projected as a black or gray color. The effect image included can be displayed clearly.

  Further, the difference between the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 in the first embodiment and the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment is the surface of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 in the first embodiment. While a predetermined cell image (content representing the world view by the character unit 3400) is pasted, a cell image of the seabed is pasted on the surface of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment. In addition, a transparent projection sheet 1150A having a U-shape in a game area 1100 formed on the game board 4 in the second embodiment and an outer periphery extending from the center to the lower side of the center accessory 2300 is a game panel. It is provided on the attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 according to the first embodiment and the point attached to the front surface of the cell image 1150. A variable winning opening provided below the starting opening 2101 (the variable winning opening is composed of the lower starting opening 2102 and a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by the starting opening solenoid 2105 as described above. In the gaming area 1100 formed on the gaming board 4 in the second embodiment, which is the lower right of the center accessory 2300 of the gaming board 4 in the second embodiment and in the gaming board in the second embodiment. In the upper right of the four attacker units 2100, the variable prize opening unit 2100A is arranged separately from the attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment. It should be noted that the entire front surface of the variable winning a prize opening unit 2100A (including the entire front surface of the movable piece 2106) is a smooth surface (for example, a surface having no unevenness so that the effect image can be displayed as the projection surface, and the second As examples, a plane parallel to the surface of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 in the embodiment, a curved surface swelled in a direction opposite to the surface of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 in the second embodiment, and the like can be given. It is formed and painted in black (may be gray). The entire front surface (including the entire front surface of the movable piece 2106) of the variable prize opening unit 2100A of the game board 4 in the second embodiment is painted in black or gray, so that the game board 4 in the second embodiment is variable. An effect image including black and gray can be clearly displayed with the entire front surface of the prize winning unit 2100A (including the entire front surface of the movable piece 2106) as a projection surface.

  Here, the structure of the transparent projection sheet 1150A having a U-shape will be briefly described. The transparent projection sheet 1150A has a transparent light diffusing layer containing light diffusing fine particles formed on a PET (polyethylene terephthalate) film, and has a thickness of about 120 μm, and its total light transmission. The rate is about 90%. The entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A constitutes a screen (projection surface) having a high viewing angle of an image projected from the upper display unit 1820 of the upper decoration unit 280 by the light diffusion of the light diffusing fine particles described above. Can be done.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This function display unit 1180 is mounted and disposed at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 12 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 12, the function display unit 1180 is a game state display composed of one LED for displaying a game state that is changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end when viewed from the front. An upper special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball to the upper start port 2101, which consists of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game machine 1183 and the game status indicator 1183, Upper special symbol comprising one 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result arranged as the first special symbol, which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol memory display 1184 and is drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper start port 2101 Display 1185 and the second special symbol placed on the upper right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and drawn by receiving a game ball into the lower start port 2102 A lower special indicator 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying a separate lottery result as a second special symbol, and a lower start port comprising two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the lower special symbol indicator 1186 And a lower special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball in 2102.

  The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of suspensions related to the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game balls that are arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. The normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of the four LEDs and the normal lottery result which is placed under the normal symbol memory display and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 made of one LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right, and the first prize lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, and the opening / closing of the big prize opening 2103 And a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of pattern repetitions (number of rounds).

  The gaming status indicator 1183 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and various gaming statuses (in combination with lighting / flashing) For example, a normal state, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed.

  When the upper special symbol display 1184 cannot display the first special symbol in the upper special symbol display 1185 in a variable manner, when the game ball is received in the upper start port 2101, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of stored first special symbols (stored) is displayed. In addition, the special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs. The first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on / off. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off when the number of holdings is one, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holds is 3, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of held is 4, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  When the lower special symbol display 1187 cannot display the second special symbol in the lower special symbol display 1186 variably, if the game ball is received at the lower start port 2102, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of stored second special symbols (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol memory indicator 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs. The second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on / off. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off when the number of reserved is 1, and the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving the game balls to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after it fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played according to the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. It can be made to recognize the person side.

  The normal symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the gate portion 2350 can be played by a combination of the emission color and lighting / flashing. A normal lottery result drawn by passing a ball can be displayed. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  The normal symbol memory display 1188 is a normal symbol whose start of variable display is suspended (stored) when a game ball passes through the gate part 2350 when the normal symbol display 1189 cannot display the normal symbol in a variable manner. The number of hold (number of storage) is displayed. The normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a made of predetermined LEDs and a 15-round display lamp 1190b, and can display the number of rounds in a “hit” game by lighting each lamp. It is like that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. Game status indicator 1183, upper special symbol memory display 1184, upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, normal symbol memory indicator 1188, normal symbol indicator 1189, and The round indicator 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. Note that a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180.

  In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, as compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table The position of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. Let the hall clerk recognize the position of the function display unit 1180 without confusion. So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 13, and FIG. 15 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays the electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating the continuation of FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 18 is a block diagram of the periphery of the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 13, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and performs the game operation. Various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are input to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor, and detection signals from various detection switches. Main control input circuit 4100b, main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, power failure or instantaneous And a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring signs of a stop.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 4100af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 4100af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 4100a also uses a hardware random number circuit 4100an (hereinafter referred to as "built-in main control") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. A hard random number circuit 4100an ”). The main random number circuit 4100an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value as the initial value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 4100a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 4100a is reset, the hard random number circuit 4100an with built-in main control first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 4100a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. Then, again, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 4100a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 4100an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 4100a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 4100an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 4100an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102, and the general winning port 2104 A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Yes. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, the general winning port switch 3020 for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the general winning port 2201, and the big winning port 2103 have been entered. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball, and a magnetic detection switch 3024 that is fixed to the game panel 1150 and detects an illegal act using a magnet, includes a panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 4, and The signal is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the upper special symbol display from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191 1185, Drive signals to the special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190 Or output.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Various information about the game (game information) is output to the substrate 4110, or a signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In this embodiment, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas Contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the prize opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because game balls frequently enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 Detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used as the upper start port 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning balls 2103 are opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switches are used as the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, is connected to the bus 4100ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 29). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 29). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  Note that the power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric power source as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time (3 hours in the present embodiment) even when the power is shut off. A multilayer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) BC0 (see FIG. 24) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when an operation switch 860a of a payout control board 4110 (to be described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 14, a payout control board 4110 for performing game ball launch control, ball feed control, etc., in addition to game ball payout control, performs various controls related to payout and controls game ball launch control and ball feed control. A payout control unit 4120 for performing the above operations, an operation switch 860a that also functions as various functions, and an error LED display 860b that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the operation switch 860a having a function as a RAM clear switch is stored in the RAM (main control built-in RAM described above) built in the main control MPU 4100a based on the detection signal output by being operated. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing information is output.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 14, a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to payout and controls the launching of the game ball and the ball transport control controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is predetermined after the power is turned on. Dispensing is a microprocessor with a built-in various control programs including a payout control program for controlling a payout operation of game media executed after a lapse of time, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like Control MPU 4120a, payout control input circuit 4120b to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout and detection signals from various detection switches relating to the launch of game balls are input, and payout for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like The control output circuit 4120c and the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. It includes a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a signal, and a CR unit output circuit 4120e for exchanging various signals between the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 4120a includes a launch ball feed control circuit 4120ag that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. A launching ball feed failure monitoring circuit 4120ah for monitoring whether or not a failure has occurred in the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag is incorporated. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), A watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also incorporated.

  The discharge ball feeding control circuit 4120ag built in the dispensing control MPU 4120a that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 corresponds to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotating handle body shown in FIG. And a touch switch for detecting whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 for electrically adjusting the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100. A detection signal from 516 and a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launching (launching) of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will are a handle relay terminal plate 192, a power supply board 851 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the launch ball feed control circuit 4120ag transmits a CR connection signal to that effect to the CR unit input / output of the payout control board 4110. It is input via the circuit 4120e.

  The shot ball feed control circuit 4120ag adjusts a drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on an operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and a payout control output circuit 4120c (with a reset function to be described later) A discharge control output circuit 4120c (a payout control with a reset function, which will be described later) is performed on the power supply board 851 (a launch solenoid drive circuit 858 which will be described later) via the payout control output circuit 4120ca) and a firing control by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. The ball of the ball feeding unit 580 is output to the power supply board 851 (ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 859 described later) via the output circuit 4120ca) and a constant current is outputted to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the handle relay terminal plate 192. The feeding member is the upper plate 30 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Receiving 1 ball the accumulated game balls, control is performed to send the game ball Tamaoku member accepts the hitting launcher 650 side.

  The firing ball feed control circuit 4120ag operates in accordance with the payout control program. When the firing operation permission is set, the game ball 1905 is played in the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle shown in FIG. An operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) to be launched toward the head, a detection signal from a touch switch 516 that detects whether a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle, The detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launching (launching) of the game ball is forcibly stopped at the will of the player, and the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected. Control of the game ball is performed based on the CR connection signal indicating that the connection is established. On the other hand, when the launch operation prohibition is set, the above-described launch control of the game ball is forcibly stopped.

  The launch control of the game ball by the launch ball feed control circuit 4120ag is 99.93 to 99.95 as the number of game balls that can be launched (launched) toward the game area 1100 per minute. It is preset so that it does not exceed 100 balls. This is realized by a PWM circuit (not shown) for generating a PWM (abbreviation of Pulse Width Modulation) signal (not shown) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. The pulse width of the PWM signal output from this circuit is such that the number of game balls that can be launched (launched) toward the game area 1100 per minute is 99.93 to 99.95. The PWM signal is set in advance, and the circuit is connected so that the PWM signal is input to the shot ball feed control circuit 4120ag. The shot ball feed control circuit 4120ag measures the launch timing of the game ball based on the input PWM signal.

  As described above, the firing ball feed failure monitoring circuit 4120ah monitors whether or not a failure has occurred in the firing ball feed control circuit 4120ag, and stores the monitoring result (whether or not a failure has occurred) as status information. It can be held. When the payout control program obtains status information from the launching ball feed failure monitoring circuit 4120ah and determines that a failure has occurred in the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag, it controls the launching of the game ball by the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag. In order to forcibly stop, the launching operation prohibition is set to the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag.

  The payout control program sets the launching operation prohibition to the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag as an initial state (default) when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after the power is turned on. After that, when the status information is acquired from the shooting ball feeding failure monitoring circuit 4120ah and it is determined that the shooting ball feeding control circuit 4120ag is not defective, the shooting ball sending control circuit 4120ag starts the launch control of the game ball. The launching operation permission is set for the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag, while the status information is acquired from the launching ball feed failure monitoring circuit 4120ah and it is determined that the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag is malfunctioning. Launch to maintain the state where the launch control of the game ball by the ball feed control circuit 4120ag is stopped Setting the firing operation prohibition against sending control circuit 4120ag.

  Here, as a problem in the shot ball feed control circuit 4120ag, it is difficult to adjust the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512. If the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 is affected by noise, it becomes a highly distorted signal, and the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 cannot be specified. Is difficult to adjust, the detection signal from the touch switch 516 turns into a very distorted signal due to the influence of noise, and whether the player's palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle If it is difficult to identify the detection signal, the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 is affected by noise. In addition to the case where it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the launching (launching) of the game ball has been forcibly stopped by the player's will due to the distorted signal, When 4120ag itself is destroyed for some reason and cannot be used, or when the number of game balls launched (launched) toward the game area 1100 per predetermined time exceeds a predetermined number (this embodiment) In this case, the number of game balls shot (launched) toward the game area 1100 per minute may exceed 100).

  When the payout control program obtains the status information from the launching ball feed failure monitoring circuit 4120ah and determines that there is no malfunction in the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag, the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag performs the launch control of the game ball. In order to start, the launching operation permission is set for the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag. On the other hand, when it is determined that the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag is defective, the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag launches the game ball. In order to forcibly stop the control, the launching operation prohibition is set to the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag.

  The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 4120b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later, and the information Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. In contrast, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function does not reset the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A detection signal from a ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 and a count switch 751 that detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball device 740 is first a prize. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the prize ball case substrate 754 of the ball device 740 and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device 740 are first a rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740, a prize ball case inner board 754, and It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 4120b. To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Further, the detection signal from the full switch 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 851 and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b in the serial data mode at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 860a. Signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the main control board 4100.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a sends out various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, thereby issuing the payout without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function is output. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4120d to the payout motor 744 via the prize ball case substrate 754, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state of the gaming machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the error LED indicator 860b with the reset function payout control output circuit 4120ca. Or output to

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). The fact that there is an abnormality in electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 4110) is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is clear” (specifically, Is based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and the payout rotator is difficult to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “counter switch error” (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the count switch 751 based on a detection signal from the count switch 751) is notified, and the number “ When “5” is displayed, it is informed that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is, it is informed that it is “full” (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (specifically, the electrical connection is cut off from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (award ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out yet) That a predetermined number of balls has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, thereby providing payout control with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls is output from the output circuit 4120ca to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). In addition to the payout control board 4110, various information from the peripheral control board 4140 (number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls, etc.) is also input to the external terminal board 784. The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1). The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The hall computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 4100 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the payout control board that controls the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 that controls the progress of the production, so that malfunction or failure does not occur. The hall computer includes the number of game balls actually paid out as a winning ball by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as the winning ball by the pachinko gaming machine 1. By grasping this, the player's game and game ball payout information (so-called play information) by the payout operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are monitored.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 2 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first the frequency display board 365 and the main door relay terminal board 880. And, it is input to the CR unit 6 through a lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the input / output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c, such as a game sphere. The signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Yes.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 is a capacitor BC1 as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time (1 hour in the present embodiment) even when the power is shut off. (See FIG. 24). With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 4120a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 4120a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of CR unit 6 and gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and payout control board 4110, gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”) in this embodiment) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and generates a ground LG. At the same time, it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and is supplied to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Yes.

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending switch 365a, which is a push button switch, mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the lending button 361 of the lending unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display section 363 of the rental unit 360.

  The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (the ball lending switch 365a is turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 365b is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three digit segment indicators, one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicator, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are connected from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball and the main door relay terminal board When input via the 880, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment indicators The contents due to the light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball rental state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 361 is pressed, and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connecting terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has been started or ended, to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return switch 365 b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power supplies. 5, a launch solenoid drive circuit 858 for driving the launch solenoid 654 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit for driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 shown in FIG. 859. The launch solenoid drive circuit 858 is controlled by a launch ball feed control circuit 4120ag built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and launches a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 (launch). The drive current to the firing solenoid 654 is adjusted so that it can be The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 859 is controlled by the launch ball feeding control circuit 4120ag built in the dispensing control MPU 4120a of the dispensing control board 4110, and the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 is the upper plate of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. One game ball stored in 301 is received, and the driving current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 is adjusted to be a constant current so that the game ball received by the ball feeding member can be sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. It has become so.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power control unit 855 operates the power switch 852 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. Power factor correction circuit 855b, smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improvement circuit 855b, and various direct currents for supplying power smoothed by smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates A power generation circuit 855d for generating a power supply.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 16, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, an upper plate side display device 1820, and While performing the drawing control of the door frame side display device 1821, the sound housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs control, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time, and time information that specifies hour, minute, and second; A knob for controlling the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame It includes a volume control volume 4140a be adjusted by moving the operation, the.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 16, the peripheral control unit 4150 for effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as an effect control program that is executed and controls the effect operation, a peripheral control ROM 4150b for storing various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for the purpose) and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ), A peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally, and a power source. A value transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal from the board 851 (power consumption suppression stage described later) is sampled at a predetermined cycle via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 (in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later). In the power consumption status history information creation process), it is stored and retained sequentially as power consumption status history information. And includes a power consumption status history RAM4150f, a battery 4150g supplies backup power to the power consumption status history RAM4150f to hold the contents stored in the power consumption status history RAM4150f at the time of power-off, the.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is detached from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Loses its contents because it can no longer hold.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is provided on the game board 4 based on the various commands. Of the game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in various winning ports such as the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the general winning port 2104, 2201, and the large winning port 2103 shown in FIG. Each time the number of balls reaches a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, it is set to 10), a main prize ball number information output signal for notifying the fact from the parallel I / O port It outputs to the external terminal board 784 via the control output circuit, and informs that the air cooling device described later provided in the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820 is operating. An operating signal is input to the parallel I / O port via the projector drive board 1800, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). While monitoring the operating signal, an operating signal that indicates that an air cooling device (described later) provided in the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is operating is a projector driving board 1801, a frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and a peripheral door relay. Via the terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the operation signal is input to the parallel I / O port, and at least one of these operation signals is input. Otherwise, it is assumed that the air-cooling device is not operating, or the projector driving board 1800, the frame decoration driving arm. Route to the circuit board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, the projector drive board 1801, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame periphery Of the paths extending to the relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140, wiring for electrically connecting the projector driving board 1800 and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the projector driving board 1801 and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. Wiring that electrically connects the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and electrical connection between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 Wiring, and wiring for electrically connecting the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140. A maintenance information output signal for notifying that the air cooling device is to be inspected is output from the parallel I / O port to the external terminal board 784 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), assuming that the wire or a plurality of wires are disconnected. To do.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor 1822 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 as a frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). The distance dimension between the distance measuring sensor 1822 and the player's finger or hand is acquired based on the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor 1822 and shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, or a game in the upper area of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is performed. Measure the movement speed of a person's finger or hand.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 to the serial I for lamp driving board. The / O port outputs a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Game board side motor drive data for this purpose is transmitted from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or an electric drive source such as the drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to be transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 The door-side emission data for output is output from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Or send to.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400 for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and a pressure detection for detecting the pressing operation of the rotation pressing operation unit 405. The detection signal from the switch is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized operation unit information acquisition data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal. The signal is input to the operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the serial transmission circuit on the game board via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I's centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and the power Various data are read from and written to the consumption status history RAM 4150f via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d. The peripheral control I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, the hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, Based on the game balls entered in various winning ports such as the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the general winning port 2104, 2201 and the big winning port 2103 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be played reaches a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 10 is set), the main prize ball number information is used as main prize ball number information for notifying that effect. An in-operation signal that outputs an output signal to the external terminal board 784 and that the air-cooling device, which will be described later, provided in the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820 is operating. And monitoring an operating signal that indicates that an air cooling device (described later) included in the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is operating, and when at least one of these operating signals is not input, Assuming that the air-cooling device is not activated, or the projector drive board 1800, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140 and the projector drive Among the paths extending to the board 1801, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, the projector drive board 1800 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 Wiring for electrically connecting, projector driving board 1801 and frame decoration driving amplifier Wiring for electrically connecting the plate 194, wiring for electrically connecting the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and for electrically connecting the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 Of the wiring connecting to the frame and the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140 are informed that one or a plurality of wirings are disconnected, and the air cooling device is inspected. Maintenance information output signals for output to the external terminal board 784 and detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 to the motor drive board 4180 Serialized by a game board serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided, and this serialized movable body detection data is transmitted from the game board serial transmission circuit to the peripheral control MPU 415. Outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for reception at the motor drive board serial I / O port of 0a, and outputs a lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decoration board of the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 Or This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. Note that the output control of the main prize ball number information output signal, the output control of the maintenance information output signal, and the LED lighting control are performed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. In addition, lighting control of other LEDs other than LEDs that are controlled to be lighted in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 and the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects flow from the provided speaker 130. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. .

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen spread on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The sound volume flows from the mute to the maximum volume by a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 416 described later). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a). The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speakers and doors housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, the sound volume is increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. In the embodiment, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state may be shifted to an advantageous game state. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821, and light emission for generating light emission modes of various LEDs. Schedule data for mode generation, schedule data for sound generation for generating music, sound effects, etc., electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, etc. Main prize ball information for generating a main prize ball information output signal for transmitting to the hall computer as main prize ball information that the number of game balls has reached a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment). There are schedule data for output signals. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 are arranged. The order of screens to be drawn is specified. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The main award ball information output signal schedule data is a hall with main award ball information indicating that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball has reached a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment). Output waveform data for generating a main prize ball information output signal to be transmitted to the computer is arranged in time series, and an output waveform of the main prize ball information output signal is defined.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. If December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of 75%, the brightness setting is set so that the brightness is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to 75%, to 85%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted to light up.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b, etc. Various control data copy area 4150ce for storing the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing the information not updated for backup among the various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 4150cf.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 40) from the main control board 4100 is cleared to RAM when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. Instructing the start of the effect and the gaming state (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 14 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that the sound source built-in VDP 4160a draws drawing data for one screen (one frame) on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821. Is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. Then, since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every frame (1 frame), it is appended to “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information) (1fr) and effect backup information (1fr) described later are also used in the same meaning)As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the lighting data, flashing signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad has an RTC control unit 4165 (RTC 41654a described later). Various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). A storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, and a distance measurement. A sensor information acquisition storage area 4150cam and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is set. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a game for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 is stored. It is a storage area in which the board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah has various types provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of the movable body is set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai includes Various information (for example, in the operation unit 400) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and the pressing operation of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. In a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and pressing operation history information of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided are set. In the distance measurement sensor information acquisition storage area 4150cam, the dish unit 300 is based on a detection signal from the distance measurement sensor 1822 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The position where the player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 (more precisely, the distance measurement A storage area history information of the distance dimension) in the fingers and hands of the capacitors 1822 and the player is set.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the Bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match, Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are the power-on state commands (see FIG. 40) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). ) Instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 14 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By operating the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are cleared (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state). On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[7-4-1e. Power consumption status history RAM]
The power consumption status history RAM 4150f externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a samples the value (power consumption suppression step) transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal from the power supply board 851 at a predetermined cycle (peripheral to be described later) This is stored and held as power consumption status history information (in the power consumption status history information creation processing in the control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, and in this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, a power consumption suppression signal from the power supply board 851 is executed. Is sampled and stored in the power consumption status history RAM 4150f as power consumption status history information. In this embodiment, the power consumption status history information can store and hold the value (power consumption suppression stage) transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal for 3000 times as the number of samplings. When the transmitted value (power consumption suppression stage) is stored and held, the values (power consumption suppression stage) transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal already sampled up to the previous time are shifted one by one so that they are arranged in time series. The value (power consumption suppression stage) that is sampled and transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal is stored and held, and when the number of sampling reaches 3000 times, the value that is sampled and transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal (power consumption) Each time the suppression stage is stored, the value that the oldest sampled power consumption suppression signal conveys ( Power consumption inhibiting step) is adapted to be discarded one by one in sequence. In other words, the power consumption status history information includes the value (power consumption suppression stage) conveyed by the power consumption suppression signal sampled this time for the most recent 3000 times (in other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process). Each time the value (power consumption suppression stage) transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal from the power supply board 851 is sampled and sequentially stored in the power consumption status history RAM 4150f as power consumption status history information, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing Is executed 3000 times so that values (power consumption suppression steps) transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal for 3 seconds (= 1 ms × 3000 times) are arranged in time series.

  In the power consumption status history RAM 4150f, the power consumption status history information stored in the power consumption status history RAM 4150f is stored in the power saving status history RAM 4150f when the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the power saving mode transition determination process during power recovery described later. Based on the above, when the power is turned off (immediately before the power is turned off), the power status consumed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is grasped at the time of power recovery, and the power saving mode is switched to the power recovery mode to suppress the power consumed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 There is provided a transition number holding area 4150fa that can determine whether or not to perform the transition, count the number of times of transition to the power saving mode at the time of power recovery, and obtain and store the sum (the value of the integration result). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the power consumption status history information stored and held in the power consumption status history RAM 4150f in the power saving power saving mode transition determination processing in the power recovery mode power-on processing described later. Each time a transition is made to the power saving power saving mode, the value of the counter (value of a power saving power saving mode transition number counter ECO-CT described later) stored in the number-of-transitions holding area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f is 1. Is added (incremented) to count the number of times of transition to the power saving mode at the time of power recovery and update the sum (the value of the integration result). The power consumption status history RAM 4150f is supplied with backup power from the battery 4150g of the peripheral control unit 4150 when the power is cut off, so that the counter value (recovered power to be described later) is stored in the transition count holding area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f. A power saving mode transition number counter ECO-CT) is stored and held.

  Here, a method for taking out the value of the counter (the value of the power saving mode transition frequency counter ECO-CT, which will be described later) stored and retained in the transition frequency retention area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f will be briefly described. First, the manufacturer operator removes the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140, and replaces the peripheral control MPU 4150a with a so-called ICE (abbreviation of In-Circuit Emulator. (Registered trademark)) probe. By operating the ICE (abbreviation of In-Circuit Emulator. (Registered trademark)), the counter value stored in the transition number holding area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f (recovered power to be described later) is operated. A program for extracting the power saving mode transition number counter ECO-CT) is executed. Thus, the counter value stored in the transition count holding area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f taken out from the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the plurality of game boards 4 (power saving mode shift count counter ECO- The CT value) is sent to the development department of the manufacturer for analysis.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a may update the value of the counter (the value of the power saving mode transition frequency counter ECO-CT, which will be described later) stored and retained in the transition count holding area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f. Although configured to be able to do so, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not configured to extract this value and use it for the progress of the performance. This is because the value of the counter stored in the transition count holding area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f (the power saving mode shift count counter ECO-CT described later) is the pachinko gaming machine installed in the hall. To develop future pachinko gaming machines and game boards when the game board 4 is exchanged from 1 to another game board and collected by the manufacturer (for example, when it is collected by the manufacturer for recycling) This is because it is one of the information extracted as valuable development reference information. The manufacturer extracts the value of the counter (the value of the power saving mode transition frequency counter ECO-CT, which will be described later) stored and held in the transition count holding area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f, and this extracted value (described later). Accurately calculate the number of times of transition to power-saving mode during power recovery (that is, the sum of the number of times of transition to power-saving mode during power recovery (value of integration result)) Because it can be grasped, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 installed in the hall is actually in operation and the number of times of transition to the power saving mode at the time of power recovery and that the manufacturer transitions to the power saving mode at the time of development at the development stage. It is possible to contribute to the examination of the presence or absence of an improvement point for suppressing the power consumed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by comparing the number of times of the above.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
From the drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG. 16, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls sound such as flowing music and sound effects has a built-in sound source for sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”). VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4160a for controlling drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821, and the game board side In addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821, sound And a sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as sound and sound effects, and an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmitting serialized music and sound effects as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. ing.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to the VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. Side character data, upper plate side character data, and door frame side character data are extracted to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821. A VRAM for generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) is also incorporated (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The built-in sound source VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1, and draws data for the upper plate side display device 1820. From the channel CH2, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a frame decorative drive lamp substrate 194, and a projector drive substrate 1800 accommodated in the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5. To the upper platen side display device 1820 and drawing data for the door frame side display device 1821 from the channel CH3, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a frame Ornamental drive lamp substrate 194 and the left side ornament unit 2 of the door frame 5 By outputting to the door frame side display device 1821 via the projector drive board 1801 accommodated in 0, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 are synchronized. I am trying.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is transmitted from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame decoration drive lamp board 194, and the projector drive board 1800 accommodated in the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 are output to the upper dish side display device 1820, and the channel The drawing data output from CH3 is accommodated from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame decoration drive lamp board 194, and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5. The image is output to the door frame side display device 1821 via the projector driving substrate 1801. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as described above, the peripheral control board 4140 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 have Although the wiring length required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is short by being attached to the game board 4, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the peripheral data as described above. While the control board 4140 is attached to the game board 4, the upper dish side display device 1820 is housed in the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5, so that the upper dish side display of the door frame 5 from the channel CH 2. Since the length of the wiring required for the route to the device 1820 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the noise Susceptible to sound. The drawing data output from the channel CH3 is that the peripheral control board 4140 is attached to the game board 4 as described above, whereas the door frame side display device 1821 is the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5. Since the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH3 to the door frame side display device 1821 of the door frame 5 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the cable is easily affected by noise.

  In the present embodiment, the effect produced by the display on the upper dish side display device 1820 is treated as the same effect produced by the light emission of the decorative lamp (including the decorative LED) provided in the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5. At the same time, the effect produced by the display on the door frame side display device 1821 is treated as the same effect produced by the light emission of the decorative lamp (including the decorative LED) provided in the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5. This is because, if the rendering data output from the channel CH2 is affected by the above-described noise and the effect image is disturbed, a clear effect image from the upper dish display device 1820 is displayed on the upper side of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. Even if the entire dish upper panel 314 is not displayed as a projection plane, or the drawing data output from the channel CH3 is affected by the above-described noise and the effect image is disturbed, the effect image is clear from the door frame side display device 1821. Even if the entire inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 shown in FIG. 7 is not displayed as a projection plane, the decoration effect image from the upper plate side display device 1820 and the decoration image from the door frame side display device 1821 The effect image also changes from the next to the next according to the progress of the effect, so that one of the effect images for decoration changes from the next to the next. As well as it disturbed momentarily under the influence of the figure, difficult to give an uncomfortable feeling to the player, because any hard to create an obstacle to the progress of the production (the progress of the game).

  The channels CH1 to CH3 use a serial differential interface called LVDS (abbreviation of Low Voltage Differential Signaling).

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is serial data. When the drawing data is received by the LVDS receiver IC (not shown) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the received LVDS receiver IC converts the received serial data into a red video image. The game board side liquid crystal display is restored to parallel data composed of three video signals: a signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals: a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is output to the liquid crystal module circuit (not shown) of the device 1900 and displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The image data output from the channel CH2 is serial data, and includes a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a frame decoration drive lamp board 194, and an upper decoration of the door frame 5. When transmitted to the projector drive board 1800 accommodated in the unit 280 and received by the LVDS receiver IC 1800v of the projector drive board 1800, the LVDS receiver IC 1800v converts the received serial data into a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue color. DLP (Abbreviation of Digital Light Processing) (DLP) is restored to parallel data composed of three video signals called video signals and three sync signals called horizontal sync signals, vertical sync signals, and clock signals. D by method It is output to a DMD drive circuit 1800w that drives a video display system using MD (abbreviation of Digital Micromirror Device). The DMD drive circuit 1800w, which will be described in detail later, drives and controls an optical engine composed of DMD elements and various LEDs provided in the projector 1850 of the upper display device 1820. The LVDS receiver IC 1800v Are input in accordance with drawing data composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. The optical engine composed of a DMD element and various LEDs provided in the projector 1850 of the dish-side display device 1820 is driven and controlled to draw drawing data for one screen from the upper-plate side display device 1820 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. The entire upper plate upper panel 314 is projected and displayed as a projection plane.

  The image data output from the channel CH3 is serial data, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a frame decoration drive lamp board 194, and the left side of the door frame 5 When transmitted to the projector drive board 1801 accommodated in the decoration unit 240 and received by the LVDS receiver IC 1801v of the projector drive board 1801, the received LVDS receiver IC 1801v converts the received serial data into a red video signal, a green video signal, and DLP (Digital Light Processing) is an abbreviation (registered trademark) of DLP (Digital Light Processing) that is restored to parallel data composed of three video signals called blue video signals and three sync signals called horizontal sync signals, vertical sync signals, and clock signals. ) According to the method Output to a DMD driving circuit 1801w that drives a video display system using DMD (abbreviation of Digital Micromirror Device). The DMD driving circuit 1801w, which will be described in detail later, drives and controls an optical engine composed of DMD elements and various LEDs provided in the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821. The LVDS receiver IC 1801v The door is in accordance with drawing data composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, input from The optical engine composed of a DMD element and various LEDs provided in the projector 1851 of the frame side display device 1821 is driven to control drawing data for one screen from the door frame side display device 1821 to the right side decoration unit shown in FIG. The entire inner wall 201 of 200 is projected and displayed as a projection plane.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Then, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts the character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data to create the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side display device 1821 is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is played from the channel CH1. Output to the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900, and to the upper plate-side display device 1820 Image data is transmitted from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a frame decoration drive lamp board 194, and a projector drive board accommodated in the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5. 1800, the image data for the door frame side display device 1821 is output from the channel CH3 to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame The image is output to the door frame side display device 1821 via the decoration drive lamp substrate 194 and the projector drive substrate 1801 accommodated in the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5. That is, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” means one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821. ) For generating the drawing data on the built-in VRAM.

  Also, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and image data for the upper plate side display device 1820 from the channel CH2 is not shown in the drawing. An upper pan side display is provided via a control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a frame decoration drive lamp substrate 194, and a projector drive substrate 1800 housed in the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5. Output to the device 1820, image data for the door frame side display device 1821 from the channel CH3, peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, frame decoration drive lamp board 194, and door frame 5 through a projector driving board 1801 accommodated in the left side decoration unit 240. Te, and outputs to the door frame side display device 1821, and outputs a V blanking signal informing of a state capable of accepting screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a the peripheral control MPU4150a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the V blank signal is output is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 is displayed as a frame buffer. (Built-in VRAM) and drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is used for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side. This is a method of outputting to the display device 1821.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, as shown in FIG. 18, stores music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set and the music accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 Incorporates a sub-volume value that adjusts. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by moving to a setting mode, which will be described later, by operating the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound command data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound sources in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value excluding the master volume value for power suppression, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value. The sound volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is set to an allowable maximum sound volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set sound adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually applied to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker to be accommodated and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Indicates the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track used and the sound of the notification sound incorporated in the track used. Is combined with the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually Amplification is performed up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized to be audio data as audio data The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound in order to notify the store clerk etc. of fraudulent behavior, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The track sound data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value where the notification sound volume is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the produced effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set to the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  In other words, the sound that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is only the notification sound of the maximum volume. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is used for the sound generation described above. Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period of time elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The volume value is set again (at this time, when the adjustment is made by moving to the setting mode by operating the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the subvolume value of the adjusted effect sound is set. Flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It has become way.

  Thus, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 When a notification sound flows in order to notify a store clerk or the like of a fraudulent act to the hall, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the silenced effect sound flows from the speaker 130 and proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the speaker is accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of time. When the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound starts to flow. So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 18, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b includes the game board side character data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the dish shown in FIG. The upper plate side character data for the upper plate side display device 1820 for projecting and displaying (drawing) on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the unit 300, and the entire inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 shown in FIG. The door frame side character data for the door frame side display device 1821 for projecting and displaying (drawing) is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance. It is remembered.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay not shown. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as left and right difference type serial data, for example, a positive signal of left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 16, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured with the RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, if it is December 25, the screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821, On New Year's Eve, the screen for executing the New Year countdown may be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. And the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to perform backlight ON / OFF control or only ON.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date information is entered on the production line as the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, etc. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set to the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode so that the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. When the rotation pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the standby state and the demonstration is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device. 1900 is displayed. By operating the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and the time information are reset, or the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted to a desired brightness. Can be. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance reduction accompanying the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the luminance setting information. And when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has been powered on for the first time, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob portion to adjust the volume of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects flow from the speaker 130.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announce contents related to game effects (for example, an announcement that the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful, or that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) The notification sound for the flow of sound from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is also operated. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the sound volume, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4 with built-in sound source) So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the 60a).

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speakers and doors housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, the sound volume is increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. In the embodiment, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 is rendered more powerful. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. By operating, you can switch to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. When the rotation pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the standby state and the demonstration is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device. 1900 is displayed. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is performed. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to increase or decrease the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the rotation pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in a waiting state. When the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the operation unit 400 is displayed according to the screen of the setting mode. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the rotary pressing operation unit 405. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The rotary press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume of the hall clerk feels loud and music and sound effects are felt loud, the rotary press operation unit of the operation unit 400 is used. 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, and when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly demonstrated (for example, 10 times). ) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and has been sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game last time. In the case where the player feels the volume adjusted to be loud and feels loud music and sound effects, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game operates the rotary press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 this time. Thus, the volume can be reduced to a desired level.

[8. Magnetic detection switch]
Next, a straight line between the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2300 and passing through the middle point of the upper side of the gaming panel 1150 and the middle point of the lower side of the gaming panel 1150 (that is, on the vertical center line of the gaming panel 1150). FIG. 19 to FIG. 22 show the magnetic detection switch 3024 that is housed in the housing recess formed on the game panel 1 and is fixed to the game panel 1150 by attaching a predetermined cell image (not shown) to the surface of the game panel 1150. To explain. FIG. 19 is a block diagram (a) of the magnetic detection switch, a table (b) for explaining the terminals of the magnetic detection switch, and a table (c) for setting the detection distance of the magnetic detection switch. FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram (a) showing a magnetic detection range when the detection switch is viewed from the upper surface, a schematic diagram (b) showing a magnetic detection range when the detection switch is viewed from the side, and FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the magnetic detection control side power-on process performed. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the offset adjustment process performed in the magnetic detection control side power-on process. FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the contents of the output signal from OUT terminal. First, the characteristics of the magnetic detection switch will be described, and then the magnetic detection control side power-on process, the offset adjustment process, and the contents of the output signal from the magnetic detection switch will be described.

[8-1. Features of magnetic detection switch]
The magnetic detection switch 3024 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the distance in the vertical direction is 9 mm, the distance in the horizontal direction is 22 mm, and the distance in the depth direction is 20 mm. The range from the reference point to the detection distance (the radius of the sphere from the reference point) with the center position of the detection surface of the rectangular magnetic detection switch 3024 having a longer distance in the horizontal direction than the distance in the vertical direction as a reference point It is possible to detect magnetism in a region extending to SR.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the magnetic detection switch 3024 is provided with a Vcc terminal as a power supply terminal, and a predetermined power supply line (+12 V power supply for magnetic detection described later) of the main control board 4100 through a panel relay terminal plate 4161. Line) and a predetermined voltage (+12 V for magnetic detection described later) is applied (power is supplied), and a GND terminal as a ground terminal (ground terminal) is provided to connect the panel relay terminal plate 4161. And is electrically connected to the ground of the main control board 4100 through the ground. As shown in FIG. 19A, the magnetic detection switch 3024 is provided with an OUT terminal as an output terminal, and is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, so that the magnetic detection switch 3024 is provided. Are output to the main control board 4100, an OFFSET terminal is provided as an input terminal, and is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 so that the control signal from the main control board 4100 is transmitted. CTL0 to CTL2 terminals are provided as input terminals and electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, and the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above is used as a reference point. The range from this reference point to the sensing distance at which magnetism can be detected (from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere). It is adapted to be set by hardware that detection distance setting circuit to be described later is provided on the main control board 4100 areas) over.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the magnetic detection switch 3024 mainly includes two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b, a magnetic detection control IC 3024c, an output circuit 3024d, and four input circuits 3024e to 3024h. The two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b can detect a minute magnetism (magnetic field) with high accuracy. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c is mainly configured by a magnetic detection control side MPU which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various control programs, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are built. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c outputs various signals from the OUT terminal to the main control board 4100 via the output circuit 3024d. The output circuit 3024d is an open collector output configured with a transistor as a center, and an OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor is connected to a main control side input circuit of the main control board 4100 described later. Is input to the main control MPU 4100a, and is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor electrically connected to a predetermined voltage line in the main control input circuit and pulled up to a predetermined voltage side.

  As described above, since the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b can detect minute magnetism (magnetic field) with high accuracy, the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b include power recovery (including power recovery due to instantaneous power failure or power failure). When moving from the measurement reference position (which is based on the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 when the power is turned on), the two magneto-impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b generate detection signals. An effect occurs. Therefore, when moving from the measurement reference position, the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b in which the influence of the magnetism (magnetic field) due to this movement has occurred are used as the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a at the measurement reference position. , 3024b to obtain a measurement reference position (zero point, that is, a magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 at the present time as a new reference) by performing offset adjustment to remove from the detection signal from the detection signal from the detection signal. The zero adjustment can be performed. The input terminal for performing such offset adjustment is the OFFSET terminal, and when the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 is input to the OFFSET terminal, the input is input to the magnetic detection control IC 3024c via the input circuit 3024e. It has come to be. The offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 is shown in FIG. 1. (1) The main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. (2) When the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3 while the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (3) The door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 while the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, the logic is maintained and set to HI (logic H) for a predetermined period (100 ms in this embodiment). After that, the logic is maintained and set to LOW (logic L).

  The magnetic detection control IC 3024c is configured to detect the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above based on detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b according to the logic state input to the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal. With the central position as a reference point, a range (region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere) extending from the reference point to a detection distance at which magnetism can be detected can be set. As described above, the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal are electrically connected to the main control board 4100. In the detection distance setting circuit described later, the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal are grounded and the CTL2 terminal is pulled. It is pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection + 12V described later) by an up resistor. When the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal are grounded and the logic is set to LOW (logic L), and the CTL2 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage side and the logic is set to HI (logic H), the magnetic detection control The IC 3024c uses the detection signal from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b as a reference point with the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above as a reference point, and a detection distance that can detect magnetism from this reference point. (Range extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere) is set to 22 cm.

  Here, the various terminals of the magnetic detection switch 3024 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 19B, the Vcc terminal is a power source to which a predetermined voltage (+12 V for magnetic detection described later) is applied from the main control board 4100. A terminal (that is, a power supply terminal to which power is supplied from the main control board 4100), and a GND terminal is a ground terminal that is grounded to the ground of the main control board 4100.

  The CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal are input terminals for setting a detection distance capable of detecting magnetism from this reference point with the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above as a reference point. The OFFSET terminal is The magnetic detection control IC 3024c is an input terminal for setting whether or not to perform offset adjustment based on the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100, and the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is HI ( When the logic detection control IC 3024c performs offset adjustment when the logic detection control IC 3024c is set to LOW (logic L), the magnetic detection control IC 3024c performs offset adjustment. Do not implement.

  The OUT terminal changes the content of the output signal in accordance with the timing when the magnetic detection control side power-on process described later is started. The magnetism detection control IC 3024c outputs a magnet detection signal in the magnetism detection process in the magnetism detection control side power-on process described later, and turns off the transistor in the output circuit 3024d when it is determined that the magnet is in the magnet detection state. The OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor is pulled up to a predetermined voltage side by a pull-up resistor in the main control side input circuit of the main control board 4100 described later, and the logic of the magnet detection signal becomes HI (logic H). On the other hand, when it is determined that the magnet is not detected, the transistor in the output circuit 3024d is turned on, so that the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor is pulled down to the ground side and the magnet detection signal is output. Set logic to LOW (logic L). In addition, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c outputs an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal in the offset adjustment processing performed in the magnetic detection control side activation processing and the magnetic detection control side main processing in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing described later. When the above-described offset adjustment is being performed or when the above-described offset adjustment has been performed successfully, the transistor in the output circuit 3024d is turned on, so that the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor is While being pulled down to the ground side and setting the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal to LOW (logic L), when the offset adjustment is unsuccessful, the transistor in the output circuit 3024d is turned OFF, thereby the collector terminal of this transistor. And electrically connected Was pulled up to a predetermined voltage side by the pull-up resistor in the main control side input circuit of the main control board 4100 OUT terminal will be described later to set the logical offset adjustment failure signal to the HI (logic H). In addition, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c outputs a normal connection signal in a connection confirmation process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process described later, and turns on the transistor in the output circuit 3024d when it is determined that the connection is normal. When the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor is pulled down to the ground side to maintain and set the logic of the normal connection signal to LOW (logic L), the output circuit determines that the connection is abnormal. By turning ON the transistor in 3024d for 30 ms, the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor is pulled down to the ground side, and the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained and set to LOW (logic L) for 30 ms. The transistor in the output circuit 3024d By turning OFF for 0 ms, the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor is pulled up to a predetermined voltage side by a pull-up resistor in the main control side input circuit of the main control board 4100 described later, and the normal connection signal The logic is maintained and set at HI (logic H) for 30 ms, and the logic L and logic H are alternately set for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four periods).

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), when the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal are all grounded to the ground and the logic is set to LOW (logic L) as shown in FIG. With the center position of the detection surface of the switch 3024 as a reference point, the detection distance SR that can detect magnetism from this reference point can be set to 24 cm, the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal are grounded to the ground, and the logic is LOW. When the logic level is set to (HI) and the logic level is set to HI (logic H) when the CTL2 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection + 12V described later) side, the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above is set. The detection distance SR that can detect magnetism from this reference point can be set to 22 cm. The CTL0 terminal is grounded and the logic is set to LOW (logic L), the CTL1 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection + 12V) side, and the logic is set to HI (logic H). When the CTL2 terminal is grounded and the logic is set to LOW (logic L), detection that can detect magnetism from this reference point using the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above as a reference point The distance SR can be set to 20 cm, the CTL0 terminal is grounded and the logic is set to LOW (logic L), and the CTL1 terminal and the CTL2 terminal are set to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection + 12V described later) side. When it is pulled up and the logic is set to HI (logic H), the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above is used as a reference point. The detection distance SR at which magnetism can be detected from this reference point can be set to 18 cm, the CTL0 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection + 12V described later) side, and the logic becomes HI (logic H). When the CTL1 terminal and the CTL2 terminal are grounded and the logic is set to LOW (logic L), the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above is used as a reference point from the reference point. The sensing distance SR capable of detecting magnetism can be set to 16 cm, the CTL0 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnet detection + 12V described later) side, the logic is set to HI (logic H), and the CTL1 terminal Is grounded and the logic is set to LOW (logic L), and the CTL2 terminal is set to a predetermined voltage (+ 12V for magnetic detection described later). ) Side and when the logic is set to HI (logic H), the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above is used as a reference point, and the detection distance SR that can detect magnetism from this reference point. Can be set to 14 cm, the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal are pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection +12 V described later) side, the logic is set to HI (logic H), and the CTL2 terminal is grounded. When the logic is set to LOW (logic L), the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above is used as a reference point, and the detection distance SR that can detect magnetism from this reference point is set to 12 cm. The CTL0 terminal to the CTL1 terminal are all pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection + 12V described later) side and the logic becomes HI (logic H). That setting are the settings that are in the magnetic detection switch 3024 side reserved (Reserved), it is impossible to set the detection distance SR. In this case, assuming that the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal is in an abnormal connection state, if the logic is maintained at LOW (logic L) for 30 ms, the logic is maintained at HI (logic H) for 30 ms. Thus, the logic L and the logic H are alternately repeated and maintained for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four periods).

  With the central position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above as a reference point, the detection distance SR that can detect magnetism from this reference point is as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b). On the front side of the detection surface 3024, the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal are set, whereas on the rear side of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024, the detection distance SR is substantially constant at 12 cm. It has become.

  As described above, the detection distance SR is substantially constant at 12 cm on the rear side of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024. However, within this range, electrical problems such as motors and solenoids occur due to structural problems. Although there is a case where the drive source is inevitably arranged, a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, from the detection surface (front surface), the upper surface, the lower surface, the left and right side surfaces, and the connector surface (rear surface) of the magnetic detection switch 3024 It is set to 3 cm.) The electric drive source is arranged at a position farther away. When the electric drive source is arranged within a range from the detection surface (front surface), the upper surface, the lower surface, the left and right side surfaces, and the connector surface (back surface) of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to a predetermined distance dimension, the electric drive source There is a possibility that the amount of magnetic change that occurs when the is driven reaches a level that the magnetic detection switch 3024 can determine as the magnetic detection state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electric drive source is arranged in a range from the detection surface (front surface), the upper surface, the lower surface, the left and right side surfaces, and the connector surface (back surface) of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to a predetermined distance dimension. The magnetic detection switch 3024 does not discriminate the amount of magnetic change generated by driving the electric drive source as a magnetic detection state. Yes.

  Here, the game balls that are launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 and flow down the game area 1100 of the game board 4 are magnetized into various winning ports (two general winning ports 2201, 2201 of the side winning port member 2200 shown in FIG. 9). In the attacker unit 2100, the left and right general winning ports 2104 and 2104, the attacker unit 2100 upper starting port 2101 and lower starting port 2102, and the attacker unit 2100 large winning port 2103) are cheating (referred to as "magnet goto"). A brief explanation will be given. The fraudster who performs the magnet goto holds the game window 101 of the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 7 while holding the magnet in the left hand while turning the front 506 of the rotary handle shown in FIG. A game ball that flows close to the front surface of the transparent glass unit 590 to be closed and flows down the game area 1100 is captured, for example, the game ball is guided to enter the upper start port 2101, and the game ball enters the upper start port 2101. Try to increase the ball ratio.

  In such a fraudulent act, every time a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 is captured by a magnet, the fraudulent person holds the magnet in his left hand and approaches the front of the glass unit 590, and the hall clerk who goes around the hall It is easy to be discovered by the staff. Recently, in addition to such cheating (conventional cheating), a game ball that flows down (falls) in the game area 1100 is formed so as to block with the following game ball between the obstacle nail. On top of this, a new type in which the game balls that flow down (fall) are piled up one after another to form a block of game balls (referred to as “grape”) that guides the game balls to the above-mentioned various winning holes. Cheating is also taking place. In such a new type of fraud, the fraudster holds a magnet in his left hand and approaches the front of the glass unit 590, but until the state where the gap between the obstacle nail and the obstacle nail is closed with the following game ball is formed. The time spent for cheating is extremely short compared to the time spent for cheating by catching the game balls flowing down the game area 1100 with a magnet and guiding them to various winning holes, and the magnet is brought closer to the front surface of the glass unit 590. The operation can be performed at one time. For example, even if a fraudster holds a magnet with his left hand and approaches the front surface of the glass unit 590 so that grapes are formed around the out port 1151 formed on the most downstream side of the game area 1100, the out port 1151 Since the upper plate 301 and the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 are arranged in front of the, there is no mystery even if the left hand is in such a place (the hall It does not seem to be fraudulent to the staff such as store clerk)

  However, if an illegal act of forming grapes around the out mouth 1151 is performed, game balls are piled up around the out mouth 1151 one after another. The winning entrances 2201 and 2201, the left general winning entrance 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, and the upper starting entrance 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 are entered, and the illegal game ball is paid out as a prize ball and is acquired by the fraudster. In addition, by increasing the game ball entrance rate of the upper start opening 2101, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a big hit game state by increasing the number of lotteries.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the conventional fraudulent act of capturing the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 with a magnet and guiding it to various winning holes, a new fraud that forms grapes around the out mouth 1151 In order to be able to detect an action, a straight line between the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2300 and passing through the upper middle point of the gaming panel 1150 and the lower middle point of the gaming panel 1150 (that is, the gaming panel 1150). The magnetic detection switch 3024 is arranged on the vertical center line) and the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to 22 cm, so that the two general winning ports of the side winning port member 2200 are within the detection distance SR. 2201, 2201, left and right general winning ports 2104, 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, attacker Various winning ports such as the upper starting port 2101 of the knit 2100, the lower starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100, the large winning port 2013 of the attacker unit 2100, and the out port 1151 are accommodated. A magnet approaching the mouth 1151 can be detected by the magnetic detection switch 3024 (see FIG. 9).

[8-2. Magnetic detection control side power-on processing]
Next, magnetic detection control side power-on processing performed by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A will be described.

  When power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), as shown in FIG. When +12 V) is applied (power is supplied), the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 performs a process when the magnetic detection control side is turned on.

  When the magnetic detection control side power-on process is started, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 performs a CTL terminal input process as shown in FIG. 21 (step SM10). In this CTL terminal input process, the logic states respectively input to the CTL0 terminal to CTL2 terminals which are input terminals of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. As described above, the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal are electrically connected to the main control board 4100. In hardware called a detection distance setting circuit (described later) provided on the main control board 4100, the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal are grounded. And the CTL2 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection + 12V described later) side by a pull-up resistor. For this reason, the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal are grounded to set the logic to LOW (logic L), and the CTL2 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage side to set the logic to HI (logic H). In this CTL terminal input process, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c determines that the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal are set to logic L and the CTL2 terminal is set to logic H.

  Subsequent to step SM10, a magnetic detection distance setting process is performed (step SM15). In this magnetic detection distance setting process, based on the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal examined in the CTL terminal input process of step SM10, the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above is used as a reference point, from this reference point. A range (a region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere) extending to a detection distance capable of detecting magnetism is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal are electrically connected to the main control board 4100, and the CTL0 terminal is used in hardware called a detection distance setting circuit (described later) provided on the main control board 4100. And the CTL1 terminal are grounded, and the CTL2 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage (magnetic detection + 12V described later) side by a pull-up resistor, so that the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal are grounded and the logic is LOW. In addition to being set to (logic L), the CTL2 terminal is pulled up to a predetermined voltage side and the logic is set to HI (logic H). The magnetic detection control IC 3024c performs the magnetic detection switch 3024 described above based on detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Using the center position of the detection surface as a reference point, a range extending from the reference point to a detection distance capable of detecting magnetism (region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere) is set to 22 cm.

  Subsequent to step SM15, an offset adjustment process is performed (step SM20). In this offset adjustment processing, the position of the magnetic detection switch 3024 (when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, when power is restored to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (including power recovery due to momentary power failure or power failure)) ( Specifically, the position of the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b of the magnetic detection switch 3024 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) is set as a measurement reference position. Process. In this offset adjustment process, detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b of the magnetic detection switch 3024 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure) are used as measurement standards. In order to obtain a position (zero point), offset adjustment is performed to move the level of the detection signal to the zero point.

  Subsequent to step SM20, connection confirmation processing is performed (step SM25). In this connection confirmation process, the logic of the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A can be discriminated in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. As a timer for measuring the connection state determination period CDT (in this embodiment, set to 1000 ms), a connection confirmation timer (not shown) is started, and the CTL0 terminal to CTL2 examined in the CTL terminal input process of step SM10 The logic of the terminal is checked again, and if any one of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal has changed, it is determined that the connection is abnormal, and the output preparation period (main In the embodiment, it is set to 20 ms.) After a lapse of time, in the connection state determination period CDT, in FIG. When the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained and set to LOW (logic L) for 30 ms from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to the main control board 4100, the logic is maintained and set to HI (logic H) for 30 ms and the logic L And logic H are alternately repeated and output for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four periods), while one of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal does not change in the normal connection state. In the connection state determination period CDT, the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained at LOW (logic L) from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A toward the main control board 4100. Output. When the connection state determination period CDT elapses, the connection confirmation timer is stopped and the connection confirmation timer is initialized in preparation for the next activation. Note that the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal examined in the CTL terminal input process of step SM10 is examined again. Since it is set (Reserved), it is determined that it is in an abnormal connection state, and a normal connection signal is output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A toward the main control board 4100 in the connection state determination period CDT. Is maintained at LOW (logic L) for 30 ms, the logic is maintained at HI (logic H) for 30 ms, and the logic L and logic H are alternately repeated for a predetermined period (4 in this embodiment). (Period) is output.

  As described above, in the process of step SM25, the logic of the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is maintained and set to LOW (logic L). While it can be communicated to the main control board 4100, when the output preparation period elapses, the logic of the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Is maintained for 30 ms, the logic is maintained at HI (logic H) for 30 ms, and the logic L and logic H are alternately repeated for a predetermined period (four periods in this embodiment). As a result, the main control board 4100 can be notified of the abnormal connection state.

  The processes in steps SM10 to SM25 are referred to as “magnetic detection control side activation process”.

  Subsequent to step SM25, magnetic detection processing is performed (step SM30). In this magnetism detection process, with the center position of the detection surface of the magnetism detection switch 3024 set in the magnetism detection distance setting process in step SM15 as a reference point, a range extending from this reference point to a detection distance at which magnetism can be detected ( In the area extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the ball, it is determined whether or not the magnet is going to be detected by detecting the presence of a magnet having the ability to change in the direction in which the game ball flows down. When the magnet detection state is determined, the logic of the magnet detection signal is set to HI (logic H) from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the magnet is not being detected, the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Set the logic of the magnet detection signal to LOW (logic L) I outputs.

  Subsequent to step SM30, an OFFSET terminal input process is performed (step SM35). In this OFFSET terminal input process, the logic state of the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 input to the OFFSET terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. As described above, the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 is (1) the main body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. (2) When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and closed. (3) While the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the logic is HI (logic H) only for a predetermined period (100 ms in this embodiment) when it is in any state. After the maintenance setting, the logic is maintained and set to LOW (logic L).

  Following step SM35, it is determined whether or not offset adjustment is performed (step SM40). This determination is performed based on the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 input to the OFFSET terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. When the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is HI (logic H), offset adjustment processing is performed (step SM45). The offset adjustment process in step SM45 is the same process as the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process described above. As described above, since the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b can detect minute magnetism (magnetic field) with high accuracy, the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b include power recovery (including power recovery due to instantaneous power failure or power failure). When the power is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure) in the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process, the measurement reference position that is initially set ( In other words, when moving from the magnetic detection switch 3024 when the power is turned on, the detection signal is affected by the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b. Therefore, when moving from the initially set measurement reference position when the power is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) in the offset adjustment process of step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side start-up process, When the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b affected by magnetism (magnetic field) are turned on in the offset adjustment process of step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process (when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) In order to remove from the detection signals from the two magneto-impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b at the measurement reference position initially set in (1), the offset adjustment process is performed in the offset adjustment process of step SM45 to thereby set the measurement reference position (zero). Point, that is, magnetism at present Intended to magnetic state as a new reference in the surrounding environment of the output switch 3024.), And thereby making it possible to perform the zeroing of the calibration.

  On the other hand, when the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is LOW (logic L) at step SM40, or following step SM45, the process returns to step SM30 again, the magnetic detection process at step SM30, the OFFSET terminal input process at step SM35, The determination at step SM40 and the offset adjustment process at step SM45 are repeated.

  The processes in steps SM30 to SM45 are referred to as “magnetic detection control side main process”.

  Thus, the magnetic detection control side activation process, which is the process in steps SM10 to SM25, is performed only once when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). On the other hand, the magnetic detection control side main process, which is the process in steps SM30 to SM45, is greatly different in that it is repeatedly performed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

[8-3. Offset adjustment process]
Next, offset adjustment processing will be described. The offset adjustment process includes the offset adjustment process of step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 and the magnetic field of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is a process performed in the offset adjustment process in step SM45 in the detection control side main process.

  When this offset adjustment processing is started, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts the offset adjustment timer OFTMR as shown in FIG. 22 (step SM100). In the process of step SM100, the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A can be discriminated in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 19A. The offset adjustment timer OFTMR is started as a timer for measuring the offset adjustment determination period ODT (in this embodiment, set to 600 ms) so that it can be performed.

  Subsequent to step SM100, the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to LOW (logic L) (step SM105). In the process of step SM105, the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal is set to LOW (logic L) in order to notify the main control board 4100 that the offset adjustment is being performed.

  Subsequent to step SM105, detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A are acquired (step SM110), and the level of the acquired detection signal is measured as a measurement standard. Offset to set the position (step SM115). In the process of step SM115, the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b of the magnetic detection switch 3024 at the time acquired in the process of step SM110 are used as the measurement reference positions (zero points). Adjust the offset to move the level to zero.

  Subsequent to step SM115, it is determined whether or not zero adjustment has been achieved by the offset (step SM120). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the level of the detection signal from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b of the magnetic detection switch 3024 can be moved to the zero point by the offset adjustment in the process of step SM115. . When it is determined in step SM120 that the offset adjustment can move to the zero point, the offset adjustment that is output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 set in step SM105 to notify the main control board 4100 that the offset adjustment is successful. While the logic of the unsuccessful signal is maintained at LOW (logic L), when it is not possible to move to the zero point by offset adjustment in the determination at step SM120, the magnetic detection switch 3024 changes in magnetism and normal detection is performed. In the case where the magnetic field detection switch 3024 is affected by a strong magnetic field or the like, the magnetic detection switch 3024 is affected by a strong magnetic field. In such a case, in order to notify the main control board 4100 that the offset adjustment has failed. Offset adjustment output from OUT terminal of magnetic detection switch 3024 The logic of the success signal is set to HI (logic H) (step SM125).

  If the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 can be moved to the zero point by the offset adjustment in the determination of step SM120, or set to LOW (logic L), or If the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 cannot be moved to the zero point by the offset adjustment in the determination and is set to HI (logic H) in step SM125, then the offset adjustment timer Based on OFTMR, it is determined whether or not the offset adjustment determination period ODT has elapsed (step SM130). In this determination, since the offset adjustment timer OFTMR has already been started in step SM100, the timing by the offset adjustment timer OFTMR waits until the offset adjustment determination period ODT has elapsed.

  As described above, in the determination of step SM130, the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is maintained at LOW (logic L) during the offset adjustment determination period ODT. Can be communicated to the main control board 4100 while the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to HI (logic H). The main control board 4100 can be notified that the execution has failed.

  When the time measured by the offset adjustment timer OFTMR has passed the offset adjustment determination period ODT in step SM130, the offset adjustment timer OFTMR is stopped (step SM135), and the offset adjustment determination period ODT can be accurately measured again at the next activation. As described above, the offset adjustment timer OFTMR is initialized (step SM140), and this routine is terminated as it is.

  Here, as described above, the offset adjustment process includes the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21, and the magnetic detection control shown in FIG. The reason why each is performed in the offset adjustment process of step SM45 in the main process of the magnetic detection control side in the process at the time of power-on will be described.

  The two magneto-impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A can detect minute magnetism (magnetic field) with high accuracy, and the game board shown in FIG. The four game panels 1150 are fixed without rattling. The game board 4 is mounted and fixed from the front side to the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. The main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 1 installed in an island facility (not shown) of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed. The door frame 5 shown in FIG. Is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close the front side of the player from the player side.

  In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the state where the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 is fixed to the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 without rattling. Since the position of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is completely different, the geomagnetism detected by the magnetic detection switch 3024 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are opened to the outer frame 2. Is different from the geomagnetism detected by the magnetic detection switch 3024.

  As an example in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on while the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2, an attendant such as a store clerk in the hall performs maintenance of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is released from the outer frame 2 and the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 3 is turned off. After the maintenance is completed, the power switch 852 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the main body frame 3 is closed again to the outer frame 2 in a state where it is thrown into the state where the game can be performed, in order to solve the trouble in the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the operation of the hall, A staff member such as a store clerk releases the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 and turns off the power switch 852 to shut off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and after the trouble is solved, turns on the power switch 852. Power on penis gaming machine 1, can be given if such a state capable of performing a game again closed body frame 3 in the outer frame 2 while the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on. When a staff member such as a hall clerk performs maintenance and trouble-solving operations as described above, the power switch 852 is turned on while the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2, and the pachinko machine is operated. When the gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instantaneous power failure or power failure may occur, and then power may be restored.

  Then, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on while the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2, the magnetic detection switch 3024 in the state where the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 performs the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. Therefore, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on while the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2, and then the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game frame is ready to be played, the magnetism detected by the magnetic detection switch 3024 in a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 is used. , So that the measurement reference position deviates. Thus, in a state where the measurement reference position is shifted, in the magnetic detection process of step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. However, it is impossible to accurately determine whether or not a magnet is going to be performed by detecting the presence of a magnet having the ability to be added, for example, a health magnet (game) around the player's left wrist Magnets that cannot be changed in the direction in which the ball flows down) and magnets attached to some of the accessories as decorations (those that cannot change in the direction in which the game ball flows down) There is a risk that the presence of a magnet having the ability to change in the direction in which the sphere flows can be detected and the magnet gotten to be mistakenly determined A.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the offset adjustment process of step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power on process shown in FIG. 21 is performed, and the magnetic detection control side power on process shown in FIG. This is a control flow capable of performing the offset adjustment process of step SM45 in the main process of the magnetic detection control side. The offset adjustment process in step SM45 in the main process on the magnetic detection control side is performed based on an offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100. As described above, the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 is (1) the main body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. (2) When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and closed. (3) While the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the logic is HI (logic H) only for a predetermined period (100 ms in this embodiment) when it is in any state. After the maintenance setting, the logic is maintained and set to LOW (logic L).

[8-4. Contents of output signal from magnetic detection switch]
Next, the contents of the output signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied to the magnetic detection switch 3024 and the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 is started, the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is described above according to the timing. It changes to any one of an offset adjustment failure signal, a normal connection signal, and a magnet detection signal.

  First, as shown in FIG. 23A, when a predetermined voltage (+12 V for magnetic detection described later) is applied to the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 (that is, power is supplied) (timing MST0). The magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 is started, and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A performs the magnetic detection control shown in FIG. When the CTL terminal input terminal process in step SM10 in the side power-on process and the magnetic detection distance setting process in step SM15 in the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 are performed, the magnetic field shown in FIG. An offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the detection control side power-on process is performed (timing MST1). In this offset adjustment process, as described above, in the offset adjustment determination period ODT (in this embodiment, set to 600 ms) based on the offset adjustment timer OFTMR, as shown in FIG. While the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is maintained and set to LOW (logic L), the fact that the offset adjustment has been successfully performed can be transmitted to the main control board 4100. By setting the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to HI (logic H), it is possible to notify the main control board 4100 that the offset adjustment has been unsuccessful (timing). MST2).

  When the offset adjustment determination period ODT elapses, the connection confirmation process in step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 is subsequently performed (timing MST3). In this connection confirmation process, as described above, in the connection state determination period CDT (in this embodiment, set to 1000 ms) based on the connection confirmation timer, as shown in FIG. When the logic of the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is maintained and set to LOW (logic L), the main control board 4100 is informed of the normal connection state. On the other hand, when the output preparation period (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms) has elapsed (timing MST4), the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. If the logic is set to LOW (logic L) for 30 ms, the logic is set to HI (logic H) for 30 ms. Each other (in this embodiment, four cycles) repeated a predetermined period can be transmitted to the effect that an abnormal connection state by becoming to the main control board 4100.

  When the connection state determination period CDT elapses, that is, the magnetic detection control side activation process, which is the process from step SM10 to SM25 in the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. Then, the main process of the magnetic detection control side in which the processes from step SM30 to step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 are repeated is started (timing MST5).

  When performing the magnetic detection control side main processing, as shown in FIG. 23C, the offset from the main control board 4100 inputted to the OFFSET terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Based on the logic of the adjustment execution request signal, when the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is HI (logic H), the offset adjustment process of step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. MST6). The logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal changes from HI (logic H) to LOW (logic L) after 100 ms. In this offset adjustment process, as described above, in the offset adjustment determination period ODT (in this embodiment, set to 600 ms) based on the offset adjustment timer OFTMR, as shown in FIG. While the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is maintained and set to LOW (logic L), the fact that the offset adjustment has been successfully performed can be transmitted to the main control board 4100. The main control board indicates that the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is unsuccessfully implemented by setting the logic of HI (logic H). 4100.

  In addition, as described above, the detection distance at which the magnetism can be detected from the reference point with the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 as the reference point by the magnetic detection process in step S30 in the main process on the magnetic detection control side. Whether the magnet is going to be detected by detecting the presence of a magnet having the ability to change in the direction in which the game ball flows down in the range extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the ball. If it is determined that the magnet is in the magnet detection state, as shown in FIG. 23C, the logic of the magnet detection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Is set to HI (logic H) to notify the main control board 4100 that the magnet is being detected (timing MST7). When it is determined that the magnet is in a state, the logic of the magnet detection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is set to LOW (logic L) to indicate that the magnet is not detected. Can be transmitted to the main control board 4100.

[9. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 25 is a block diagram (a) showing a power generation circuit, and a diagram showing a relationship between power consumption and a power consumption suppression level accompanying power consumption ( b) and FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 851 and are the same ground (GND).

[9-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 3 is turned on, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on, while FIG. When the power switch 852 is turned off, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island facility is not supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered off. The power switch 852 is normally kept in an ON-operated state, and when a staff member such as a hall clerk starts operation, a plurality of rows are arranged in the pachinko island facility by turning on (inserting) the breakers installed in the hall. The pachinko machines 1 installed are turned on all at once. Then, a staff member such as a store clerk in the hall turns off the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in a plurality of rows on the pachinko island facility by turning off (breaking) the breakers installed in the hall. For this reason, among pachinko machines 1 arranged in a plurality of pachinko island facilities, when pachinko machines 1 are individually powered on or off, for example, when a staff member such as a hall clerk performs maintenance When the power switch 852 is turned off again and the power switch 852 is turned on again when the maintenance is completed, in order to solve the trouble for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which some trouble has occurred, For example, a staff member may turn off the power switch 852 and turn on the power switch 852 again when the trouble is solved.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the power supply board 851 includes a power supply control unit 855, a firing solenoid drive circuit 858, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 859. The power supply control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The drive circuit 858 is a circuit that drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5, and the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 859 drives the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 shown in FIG. Circuit.

  The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power supply generation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 and to the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. The synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies 24 volt (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 855b. The power factor improvement circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the firing solenoid driving circuit 858, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 859, and the power generation circuit 855d.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch solenoid drive circuit 858 is controlled by a launch ball feed control circuit 4120ag built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 14 using + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power source, and is a potentiometer 512. The driving current to the firing solenoid 654 is adjusted so that the game ball can be launched (launched) toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from. Thereby, the game ball can be launched (launched) toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body shown in FIG. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 859 is controlled by a launch ball feed control circuit 4120ag built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 14 using + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power supply. Thus, the drive current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 is adjusted to be a constant current. As a result, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, and the game ball received by the ball feeding member is directed to the ball hitting device 650. Can send.

  The power generation circuit 855d includes a power consumption monitoring circuit 855da, a + 5V power generation circuit 855db, a + 12V power generation circuit 855dc, and a + 24V power generation circuit 855dd. + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c is supplied to the + 5V power generation circuit 855db, the + 12V power generation circuit 855dc, and the + 24V power generation circuit 855dd via the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da.

  The power consumption monitoring circuit 855da monitors the power consumption of + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c. The power consumption monitoring circuit 855da monitors the power consumption of +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c, and determines a power consumption suppression stage indicating how much power consumption should be suppressed based on the power consumption. The determination result is output to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 as a power consumption suppression signal. The power consumption suppression signal output from the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da of the power generation circuit 855d is configured as three signal wires (that is, configured as three parallel signals), and has a value 0 to a value 7 Can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, while being input through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is input (see FIG. 26B). Then, the power consumption suppression signal from the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da of the power generation circuit 855d is input to the decorative board or the like of the door frame via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 (FIG. 26 ( see b)).

  Specifically, the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da includes a power measurement circuit 855daa and a power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab, as shown in FIG. + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c is supplied to the + 5V power generation circuit 855db, the + 12V power generation circuit 855dc, and the + 24V power supply generation circuit 855dd via the power measurement circuit 855daa. The power measurement circuit 855daa measures the power consumption of + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c in real time and outputs it to the power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab. The power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab determines a power consumption suppression stage indicating how much power consumption should be suppressed based on the power consumption measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa. The value of the power consumption suppression signal configured as a signal wiring is set and output to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868.

  The relationship between the power consumption suppression stage indicating how much power consumption should be suppressed, the power consumption measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa, and the power consumption suppression stage indicating how much power consumption should be suppressed (ie, power The relationship between the consumption and the power consumption suppression level accompanying the power consumption) will be briefly described. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the power (AC24V) is supplied to one pachinko gaming machine 1 for one transformer (maximum allowable capacity: 250VA) provided in the pachinko island facility, and FIG. As shown, when the horizontal axis represents the power consumption with respect to the maximum allowable capacity of the transformer and the vertical axis represents steps 0 to 7 as the power consumption suppression step, the power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab is a power measurement circuit. When the power consumption of + 37V measured at 855daa is 0% or more and less than 10%, it is determined that the power consumption suppression stage is stage 0, the value 0 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal, and measurement is performed by the power measurement circuit 855daa. When the power consumption of + 37V is 10% or more and less than 20%, it is determined that the power consumption suppression stage is stage 1, and the value 1 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal. When the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 20% or more and less than 30%, it is determined as stage 2 as the power consumption suppression stage, and the value 2 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal, When the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 30% or more and less than 40%, it is determined as stage 3 as the power consumption suppression stage, and the value 3 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal. When the power consumption of + 37V measured at 855 daa is 40% or more and less than 50%, it is determined as stage 4 as the power consumption suppression stage, and the value 4 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal, and measurement is performed by the power measurement circuit 855daa. When the power consumption of + 37V is 50% or more and less than 60%, the power consumption is judged to be stage 5 as the power consumption suppression stage. When the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 60% or more and less than 70%, the value 5 is set as the control signal value, and it is determined as step 6 as the power consumption suppression stage, and the power consumption suppression signal The value 6 is set as the value, and when the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measuring circuit 855daa is 70% or more, it is determined as the stage 7 as the power consumption suppression stage and the value 7 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal To do.

  It should be noted that in the pachinko island facility, a system is usually used in which, for example, four pachinko gaming machines 1 are supplied as a group to one transformer, for example, to supply power (AC24V), respectively (for example, in one row). In the pachinko island facility in which 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed, four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group (a total of five transformers). ), Because a system in which power (AC24V) is supplied is adopted), a plurality of transformers having a maximum allowable capacity of 1000 VA are provided in the pachinko island facility.

  The + 5V power supply creation circuit 855db creates DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c via the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da. The +12 V power supply generation circuit 855 dc generates DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”) from +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855 c via the power consumption monitoring circuit 855 da. The + 24V power supply generation circuit 855dd generates a direct current + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c via the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da. + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system supplied with + 5V is supplied as a + 5V power supply line, a power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied as a + 12V power supply line, and a power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied as a + 24V power supply line.

  As described later, + 5V generated by the + 5V power supply generation circuit 855db of the power supply generation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is used as a + 5V power supply line in the payout control board 4110 via the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and also has a payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. It is applied to the power supply terminal. + 12V generated by the + 12V power supply generation circuit 855dc of the power supply generation circuit 855d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from + 12V from the payout control board 4110. + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g is used as a + 5V power supply line in the main control board 4100 via the main control filter circuit 4100h, and is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. Is supplied to the power supply terminal.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 4110 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 855db of the power supply creation circuit 855d on the power supply board 851 flows current toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply of the payout control built-in RAM is forward by the diode PD0. A current flows toward the terminal and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the supply control board 4110 and again from the supply control board 4110 to the power supply board 851 by + 5V generated by the + 5V power supply generation circuit 855db of the power supply generation circuit 855d in the power supply board 851. With a simple connection method, + 5V is supplied and charging is possible. As a result, when + 5V generated by the + 5V power generation circuit 855db of the power generation circuit 855d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. Thus, the stored contents are held.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 4100g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. Can be done. As a result, + 12V generated by the + 12V power generation circuit 855dc of the power generation circuit 855d in the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V generation circuit 4100g becomes + 5V. Since the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a Although the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. Yes.

[9-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  The three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the + 5V power generation circuit 855db, the + 12V power generation circuit 855dc, and the + 24V power generation circuit 855dd of the power generation circuit 855d on the power supply board 851 are as shown in FIG. In addition, two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V among these three types of voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the + 5V power generation circuit 855db, the + 12V power generation circuit 855dc, and the + 24V power generation circuit 855dd of the power generation circuit 855d on the power supply board 851 are the frame peripheral relay terminals. In addition to being supplied to the board 868, it is supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 4, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 4.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 4140b that generates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generation circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power source 1900b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to various decorative boards and the like of the door frame 5.

  Further, the voltage of +12 V supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is supplied to the projector drive boards 1800 and 1801, as shown in FIG. 26B, but is not used in the project drive boards 1800 and 1801. It is supplied to the upper plate side display device 1820 and the door frame side display device 1821 as they are. The voltage of +24 V supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is supplied to the voltage generation circuit 1800a of the projector drive board 1800 and the voltage generation circuit 1801a of the projector drive board 1801 as shown in FIG. Yes. The voltage generation circuit 1800a of the projector driving substrate 1800 generates a plurality of types of voltages and supplies them to the upper dish display device 1820. The voltage generation circuit 1801a of the projector driving substrate 1801 generates a plurality of types of voltages and supplies them to the door frame side display device 1821.

[9-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 24, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. For example, + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). Circuit. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. . Note that +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110 at all.

[9-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 24, the main control board 4100 includes a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. In the main control board 4100, a power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is a + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V power creation circuit 855db of the power supply creation circuit 855d in the power supply board 85 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured so as not to be connected, the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 855db of the power supply creation circuit 855d in the power supply board 851 is electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100. In other words, the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the main control board 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[10. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 28 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 29 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. 30 is a circuit diagram for supplying power to the magnetic detection switch and shutting off the power. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 24 will be described, followed by the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 4100. Various input / output signals to and from, the interface circuit for communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, and the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 and the power cutoff will be described.

  The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a + 5V generation circuit 4100g, and In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 27, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz) )) Mainly.

[10-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 27, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V becomes a + 5V power supply line in the main control board 4100, which is a power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. Each is applied to the VDD terminal or the like. Note that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 24 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. Accordingly, as described above, + 12V generated by the + 12V power generation circuit 855dc of the power generation circuit 855d in the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 24 is transferred to the + 5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. When the + 5V generation circuit 4100g cannot generate + 5V because it is not supplied, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Although the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the MPU 4100a, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM. ing.

[10-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 27, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic is LOW. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The attached main control output circuit 4100ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 27, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a clock signal of 24 MHz is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[10-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100b receives the detection signals from the general prize opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like is input from the operation switch 860a provided in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 and the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a is mainly input. Will be described.

[10-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 860a includes the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 4100a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after a period during which the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period elapses from power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 4100 does not have the error canceling function of the payout control board 4110, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch 860a within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 4100 receives the main control board 4100. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  The main control board 4100 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is not operated, while the logic from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is operated. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 4110 (detailed explanation of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 27, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 860a provided in the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 860a. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 860a is operated. The operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Is done. The main control MPU 4100a does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, an operation signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic level HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Is done. The main control MPU 4100a instructs to clear the RAM for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 860 a is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the boards of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, it is higher than the control reference voltage +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper start opening switch 3022, and the lower start opening switch 2109 that are directly input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. On the other hand, the detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352 input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor in the same manner as the operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

[10-4-2. Circuit to which signal from magnetic detection switch is input]
As described above, when the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 is started, the magnetic detection switch 3024 outputs from the OUT terminal shown in FIG. 19A according to the timing. The content of the signal changes. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A includes the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. In the offset adjustment process of step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 3, the above-described offset adjustment is being performed or the above-described offset adjustment was performed successfully. Sometimes the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal is set to LOW (logic L), while when the offset adjustment is performed unsuccessfully, the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal is set to HI (logic H). In addition, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c determines that the normal connection signal is received when it is determined that the connection is normal in the connection check process in step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. While the logic is maintained and set to LOW (logic L), when the abnormal connection state is determined, the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained and set to LOW (logic L) for 30 ms. Subsequently, the logic of the normal connection signal is set to HI ( The logic H) is maintained and set for 30 ms, and the logic L and the logic H are alternately set for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four periods). In addition, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c determines whether the magnet detection signal is in the magnet detection state in step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. While the logic is set to HI (logic H), when it is determined that the magnet is not detected, the logic of the magnet detection signal is set to LOW (logic L).

  As shown in FIG. 27, the transmission line for transmitting a detection signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR6 whose one end is electrically connected to a magnetic detection + 12V power supply line to be described later. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 through the resistor MR7. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR7, one end of the transistor MTR1 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR8 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR1 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR9, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inversion buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10B) without inversion). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB.

  As described above, the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is an open collector output, and the transmission line for transmitting the detection signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR6. .

  The magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 includes the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21, and the magnetic detection control side power supply shown in FIG. In the offset adjustment process of step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the on-time process, the output circuit of the magnetic detection switch 3024 when the above-described offset adjustment is being performed or when the above-described offset adjustment has been performed successfully By turning on the transistor in 3024d, the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor is pulled down to the ground side, and the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal is set to LOW (logic L), and the main control board 4100 while offset When the adjustment is unsuccessful, the transistor in the output circuit 3024d of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is turned off, so that the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR6. Thus, the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal is set to HI (logic H) and input to the main control board 4100.

  Further, when the magnetic detection control IC 3024c determines in the connection confirmation processing in step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation processing of the magnetic detection control side power-on processing shown in FIG. By turning on the transistor in the output circuit 3024d, the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor is pulled down to the ground side, and the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained and set to LOW (logic L). When it is input to the control board 4100 and it is determined that it is in an abnormal connection state, the transistor in the output circuit 3024d of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is turned on for 30 ms, so that the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor Is pulled down to the ground side When the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained at LOW (logic L) for 30 ms and is input to the main control board 4100, the transistor in the output circuit 3024d of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is subsequently turned off for 30 ms. The OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR6, and the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained and set at HI (logic H) for 30 ms and input to the main control board 4100. , Logic L and logic H are alternately set for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four periods) and input to the main control board 4100.

  Further, when the magnetic detection control IC 3024c determines in the magnetic detection process of step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. By turning off the transistor in the output circuit 3024d, the OUT terminal electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR6, and the logic of the magnet detection signal becomes HI (logic H). While being set and input to the main control board 4100, when it is determined that the magnet is not detected, the transistor in the output circuit 3024d of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is turned on to be electrically connected to the collector terminal of this transistor. OUT terminal is Gran Pulled down to the side logic magnet detection signal is input is set to LOW (logic L) to the main control board 4100.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR6 and MR7 and the transistor MTR1 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024.

  When the logic of the signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to LOW (logic L) and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1, the transistor MTR1 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR9, the logic becomes HI (logic H), and is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 4100a.

  On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to HI (logic H) (that is, pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR6, the logic is HI (logic H)). In some cases, when a signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1, the transistor MTR1 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the logic becomes LOW (logic L), and is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024. This detection distance setting circuit 4100z mainly includes a + 12V power supply line for magnetic detection described later, a ground, and a pull-up resistor MR10. One end of the detection distance setting circuit 4100z is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line for magnetic detection described later. The other end of the MR 10 is electrically connected to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A, and the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is pulled up to the + 12V side on the main control board 4100 side. In addition, the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A are grounded, and the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are pulled down to the ground side on the main control board 4100 side. It has been. The fixed position of the magnetic detection switch 3024 may change depending on the number and position of the electric drive sources attached to the game board 4, so that the fixed position of the magnetic detection switch 3024 designed by the game board designer The detection distance SR is narrowed down by experiment, and the detected detection distance SR can be set in the detection distance setting circuit 4100z. That is, even when the specifications of the game board (number and position of electrical drive sources) are different for each model, the detection distance SR can be set in the detection distance setting circuit 4100z individually for each model. .

  The signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is configured to be pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR6. Even if an unauthorized modification is made such that the wiring that transmits the signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is not input to the main control board 4100 side (that is, the above-described magnet Even if an unauthorized modification of cutting the wiring that transmits the output signal is performed so that the signal is not detected), the state of being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR6 is maintained on the main control board 4100 side. As a result, the transistor MTR1 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic becomes LOW (logic L), and the input of the main control MPU 4100a. The state input to the input terminal PB0 of the port PB is maintained. Note that when the logic input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MUP 4100a is LOW (logic L), either the offset adjustment is unsuccessful or the magnet is detected. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a determines that an abnormality has occurred in the magnetic detection switch 3024 and transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG.

[10-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 24, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and detects a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 4100a when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign. 4110 is output to the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[10-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 28, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage by the capacitor MC20). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the + 24V monitor voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 28, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[10-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 28, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied, Are connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[10-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of output in the main control-side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 4100cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 4110 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  The main control input circuit 4100b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a has a D type flip-flop as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input port PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 becomes the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 4110 as a payout blackout signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. In the circuit 4120b, one end of the circuit 4120b is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. And are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In FIG. 16, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). 4140 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 4100b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 has one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is sent out to the payout control board 4110 No reset function to output as a power failure warning signal The control circuit 4100cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 4140. The logic of the signal is inverted and is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 4100a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is Wiring through a (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control input circuit 4100b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. 4100, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting between the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, between the boards with 4110 and between the boards with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, Dispensing control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a Is performed blackout notice by the logic of a control reference voltage + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

[10-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 13 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as a main payout serial data transmission signal and do not have a reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the payout control board 4110 and transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, and detection signals from various switches such as the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 13 are respectively input via the main control input circuit 4100b. Either the state in which the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 1 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, or both states In this case, a main frame door opening signal, which will be described later, is input from the payout control board 4110 via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, or various displays such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is output to the various display devices from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, or various information about the game (game information) is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to output the main signal with the reset function. Various information (game information) related to the game is output from the control output circuit 4100ca to the payout control board 4110, or the offset shown in FIG. 22 with respect to the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. FIG. 19A shows an offset adjustment execution request signal output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function by outputting an offset adjustment execution request signal for requesting to perform the adjustment process to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Output to the OFFSET terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 A magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y (described later with reference to FIG. 30) is provided with + 12V for magnetic detection which is a dedicated power supply for the magnetic detection switch with respect to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 30 shown in FIG. A magnetic detection power supply signal is output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x that can be generated and cut off.

[10-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 24 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. The + 5V power line in the main control board 4100 is provided via the main control filter circuit 4100h. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

  + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 27 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The unit 4100aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 4100aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control board 4100. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec and transmits it. When transmission is performed from the shift register 4100aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When electric power or a momentary power failure occurs, + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is sent to the main control MPU 4100a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 4100cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being broken, and to prevent omission of the command, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  A plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a reset that causes all of the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 4100cb, the peripheral control board 4140 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

[10-8. Supplying power to and shutting down the magnetic detection switch]
Next, power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 and power interruption will be described with reference to FIG. In addition to the various circuits described above, as shown in FIG. 30, the main control board 4100 has a dedicated power supply for the magnetic detection switch with respect to the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 30 shown in FIG. A magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y capable of creating a certain magnetic detection + 12V, and switching between power supply and power supply cutoff for the magnetic detection switch 3024 using the magnetic detection + 12V by the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y as a power source. A magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x capable of

  The magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x mainly includes resistors MR60 to MR62 and a transistor MTR60. The transmission line for transmitting the magnetic detection power supply signal from the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR60 via the resistor MR60. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR60, one end of the transistor MTR60 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR61 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR60 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR60 is electrically connected to a gate terminal of a field effect transistor MFET0 (to be described later) constituting the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y, and has one end. Is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR63, which will be described later, constituting the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR60 and MR61 and the transistor MTR60 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal from the main control MPU 4100a is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR60 is + 5V. As a result, the transistor MTR60 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal from the main control MPU 4100a is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR60 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the resistor MR61 to turn off the transistor MTR60. The switch circuit is also turned off.

  The magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y mainly includes a resistor MR63, a field effect transistor MFET0, and a capacitor MC60. The other end of the resistor MR63, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the field effect transistor MFET0, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR60 constituting the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x. And one end of the resistor 62 to which one end is electrically connected. The source terminal of the field effect transistor MFET0 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the drain terminal of the field effect transistor MFET0 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC60 whose one end is grounded (GND). At the same time, the magnetic detection switch 3024 is electrically connected to a Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal via wiring (harness). In the present embodiment, the capacitor MC60 is for removing and smoothing the + 12V ripple for magnetic detection supplied via the field effect transistor MFET0, and its capacitance is 1 microfarad (μF). Those having 10 to 10 microfarads (μF) are employed. The power of +12 V for magnetism detection smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC60 is supplied to the resistor MR10 constituting the sensing distance setting circuit 4100z shown in FIG. 27, and is supplied from the magnetism detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The voltage is supplied to a pull-up resistor MR6 that is electrically connected to a transmission line that transmits a detection signal, and is supplied to a Vcc terminal that is a power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 via a wiring (harness).

  When the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal from the main control MPU 4100a is HI, as described above, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR60 constituting the magnetic detection power drive circuit 4100x is raised to the + 5V side. Since the transistor MTR60 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR60 becomes the same potential as that of the emitter terminal of the transistor MTR60, thereby being pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The voltage applied to the gate terminal of the field effect transistor MFET0 constituting the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y is also pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the drain terminal of the field effect transistor MFET0 becomes the same potential as the source terminal of the field effect transistor MFET0 and is pulled up to + 12V, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC60 and smoothed as + 12V for magnetic detection (harness). Is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 and pulled up to the magnetic detection + 12V side, and the magnetic detection +12 V power supply from the main control board 4100 is supplied to the magnetic detection switch 3024. Can do.

  On the other hand, when the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal from the main control MPU 4100a is LOW, as described above, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR60 constituting the magnetic detection power drive circuit 4100x is the ground (GND). ), The transistor MTR60 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR60 is brought to the + 12V side via the resistor 63 constituting the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y. By pulling up, the voltage applied to the gate terminal of the field effect transistor MFET0 constituting the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y is also pulled up to the + 12V side. Thereby, when the discharge by the capacitor MC60 is completed, the drain terminal of the field effect transistor MFET0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is also connected to the ground (via the harness). GND), the magnetic detection + 30V power supply from the main control board 4100 for the magnetic detection switch 3024 can be cut off.

[11. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 32 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 33 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 32, and FIG. 35 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 35 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 36 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[11-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 31, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 to which + 5V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 24 is applied and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply board 851 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the like. . Note that the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is subject to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 24 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. As a result, as described above, when + 5V created by the + 5V power generation circuit 855db of the power generation circuit 855d in the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 24 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the capacitor BC1 is charged. Since the discharged charge is supplied as the payout VBB to the payout control board 4110, the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate. The stored contents are held by applying the pay VBB to the VBB terminal of the built-in RAM.

[11-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 31, the payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control input circuit 4120b, a payout control output circuit 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e as peripheral circuits. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[11-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 31, + 5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[11-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 31, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[11-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 14, and the blackout monitor circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A circuit, a handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 14, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input via the power supply board 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, and the like. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full switch 550 and the various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 14 have an output terminal of an open collector output type. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal is input is substantially the same, here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input will be described.

[11-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the door frame 5 opened from the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a door opening signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 13 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR20 is The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side, thereby turning on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, When the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

[11-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 3 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 13 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 4100 is electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the outer end frame door opening information output signal becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 4100 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is inputted to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 3 does not occur during a normal game, and an outer end frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. Because it is supposed to be entered Whether the frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Although it cannot be determined whether or not the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, a state in which the player that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 is opened does not occur during normal games. Can be determined.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when a short circuit occurs, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the main body is not used for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 4100 even when a normally open switch is used or a disconnection occurs. An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[11-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of a condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and a condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the dispensing control board 4110. When the condition is satisfied, the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal of the voltage applied to the collector terminal wiring logic by via (harness) is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above it becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When both of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. In some cases, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by a payout power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 4100e. Is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure at voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU4100a are the same logic.

[11-2-3 (d). Circuit that receives detection signal from full switch]
A detection signal from the full switch 550 provided in the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is sent to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Have been entered. The output terminal of the full switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. This full-tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 via the resistor PR44b. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off in response to a detection signal from the full switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is paid out via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851. When the control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851, and a signal whose logic is LOW is sent out. Input to the control board 4110.

  When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to a switch circuit constituted by the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full switch three-terminal filter PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, counting switch 751, and rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. It is a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5, the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 provided in the prize ball device 740 attached to the main body frame 3. Compared to the above, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and it is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. The payout control MPU 4120a If it is determined that the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the drive control of the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. To do. In other words, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped, or the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled even though the storage space is full with the stored game balls. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by rotating the payout rotator and continuing to pay out the game ball, the payout rotator itself can no longer rotate and the payout motor 744 The load is abnormal, the payout motor 744 is overloaded, abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted to the rotary motion of the payout rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is adopted so that the noise component is first removed from the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. .

[11-2-3 (e). Circuit that receives operation signals from operation switches]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43. Is input.

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is +12 V in the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 860a repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time of turning on the power). In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43, which is a voltage applied to the base of the subsequent stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned OFF, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 860a is the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic clear signal HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 42. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW because the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as described above, the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[11-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied thereto, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4120da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor driving voltage, and the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 through the Zener diode PZD60 The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, and supplied to the dispensing motor 744.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 744. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744, and rotate the dispensing motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[11-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 15 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and one payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 15 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 connects the lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 35, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, one end of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80A) without inverting it). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 851 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 851. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 851. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Then, the BRDY signal whose logic applied to HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal notifying that the one-time payout operation is started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. The photocoupler PIC 73 is turned OFF when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the non-reset payout control output circuit 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, and when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[11-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives serial data from the main control board 4100 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b as shown in FIG. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a has the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout blackout signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) For example, a main pay ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. 14, detection signals from the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like shown in FIG. 14 are input via the payout control input circuit 4120 b, respectively, The operation signal from the meter 512, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the like shown in FIG. Detection signal is power supply board 851 from Tan switch 550 etc., and the like or are input via the payout control input circuit 4120b payout control board 4100.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Or outputs a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and outputs a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition, for example, a payer ACK signal for notifying completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function pays off. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 14 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to drive the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Is output to the error LED indicator 860b, or a control signal for adjusting the drive current to the firing solenoid drive circuit 858 shown in FIG. 14 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to output a payout control output circuit with a reset function. Outputs drive current from 4120ca to firing solenoid 654 14 outputs a control signal for adjusting the drive current to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 859 shown in FIG. 14 to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and sends the drive current from the ball feed solenoid output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Output to 585 or the like.

[11-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[11-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36A, the payout control board 4110 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has a 15 round big hit information output signal, a two round big hit information output signal, etc. Jackpot information output signal, probabilistic fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and middle information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

[11-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), in addition to the outer frame door opening information output signal described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. Winning ball number information output signal output every time, 15 round jackpot information output signal and 2 round jackpot information output signal via main control board 4100 through payout control board 4110, information output during probability variation A game information signal such as a signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  In addition to the various signals described above, the main terminal ball number information output signal and the maintenance information output signal from the peripheral control board 4140 are supplied to the external terminal board 784 as shown in FIG. Have been entered. The main prize-ball number information output signal will be briefly described. The main control board 4100 includes an upper start opening 2101, a lower start opening 2102, general winning openings 2104, 2201, and the like shown in FIG. The number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls entered in various winning openings such as the big prize opening 2103 is set to a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment). ), A main prize ball number information output command, which will be described later, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140, based on the received main prize ball number information output command, Based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the general winning port 2104, 2201, and the big winning port 2103, etc. Each time the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 10 is set), the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to the external terminal as the main prize ball number information. The data is output to the board 784 and transmitted to the hall computer. The main prize ball number information output signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  Next, the maintenance information output signal will be briefly described. In the peripheral control board 4140, an air cooling device (described later) provided in each of the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 and the projector 1851 of the door frame display device 1821 operates. The in-operation signal that indicates that the projector is operating is monitored via the projector drive boards 1800 and 1801, and either one or both of the in-operation signal from the projector 1850 and the in-operation signal from the projector 1851 are input. If not, a maintenance information output signal for notifying that the air cooling device is inspected and checking the air cooling device is output to the external terminal board 784 and transmitted to the hall computer. This maintenance information output signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 4110 side and a prize ball number information output signal, and a 15 round big hit from the main control board 4100 side. There are seven signals: an information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability changing information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time medium information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal. Two signals, that is, a main prize ball number information output signal and a maintenance information output signal from the peripheral control board 4140 side, are output through (pass through) the payout control board 4110.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits and the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a player determines whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit of two rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of big hits for rounds and the number of occurrences of big hits for two rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of big hits for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of big hit gaming status, Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[12. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 shown in FIG. 3, and the rear side is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes an outer frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, and a probability varying signal. An information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time medium information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are input from the payout control board 4110, and a main prize ball number information output signal is These are inputted from the peripheral control board 4140, and these various signals are outputted to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The hall computer is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 so that a signal larger than the minimum detection signal width (for example, a signal width of 60 ms) can be detected as various signals from the external terminal board 784. It has become.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. The signal indicating that a state has occurred. The prize ball number information output signal is displayed every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening 2102, the general winning opening 2104, 2201, and the large winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been hit, and the 15 round big hit information output signal has generated 15 round big hits It is in a state 2 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that reports that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and that the probability variation information output signal is in a state where probability fluctuation has occurred. The special symbol display information output signal is a state in which the special symbol variation display is ended (stopped) on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal tells that the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 12 is in a state where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped). The time short / medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time short state has occurred, and the start opening prize information output signal is the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening shown in FIG. 102 to the game ball is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 37, output terminals PT1 to PT11 are arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out as award ball by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the output terminal PT1 is set to 0.106 seconds (in this embodiment, 2 ms is set as an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed, so an output period of 0.106 seconds (that is, The signal width of the award ball number information output signal output from the output terminal PT1) is output during a period in which the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated 53 times) based on an interrupt period of 2 ms). ing. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the prize motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a prize ball every time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that 10 game balls have been paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls that have been paid out and to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 it can.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 are opened from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. And / or it can grasp | ascertain that the main body frame 3 is open | released.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is displayed in a state where the special symbol variation display is ended (stopped) on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is 0.128 at the time of termination (stop) of the special symbol variation display on the function display board 1191 from the output terminal PT3 on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186. It is output for 2 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, and then the upper special symbol on the function display board 1191 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended (stopped), and the upper special symbol of the function display board 1191 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is counted by counting the number of times. The total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT4 is yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start opening winning information output signal is a signal to notify that every time a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 shown in FIG. Every time a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 from the terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start opening prize information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer starts the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 every time the start opening prize information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the mouth 2102 and count the number of times the start opening prize information output signal is input to enter the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The total number of game balls played can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 15-round jackpot has been generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates 15 round jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. The number of times that the 15 round jackpot information output signal has been input can be counted, and the total number of times that 15 round jackpots have occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be determined.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 2-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When a 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. It is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of two round big hits in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by counting the number of times the two round big hit information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol change display of the normal symbol display unit 1189 of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 when the normal symbol variation display 1189 of the function display board 1191 is ended (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer displays the normal symbol display on the function display board 1191 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the normal symbol display information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped) in the device 1189, and the number of times is counted to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can grasp the total number of times.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal for a short time. As described above, the time reduction / medium information output signal is a signal indicating that a time reduction state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time reduction state is occurring. ing. When the time and medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time and time state has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the time and medium information output signal is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided with an orange color and outputs a probability changing information output signal. As described above, the probability variation in-progress information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the probability variation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where probability variation occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the information output signal during probability variation is input. And the total number of times the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the information output signal during probability variation is input.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is based on a command from the main control board 4100 (main prize ball number information output command described later), and the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 shown in FIG. , Every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls entered in various prize openings such as the general prize opening 2104, 2201 and the big prize opening 2103, the fact is output. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT10 performs 0.128 seconds (peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, as the interrupt cycle when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed in this embodiment. Unlike the interrupt cycle (2 ms), the output period is set to 1 ms. Signal width of the main prize cell count information output signal), based on the interrupt period of 1ms, the period being repeated peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing 128 times), it is outputted. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 pachinko gaming machines 1 as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. The number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be determined by counting the number of game balls to be paid out. Can be grasped. It should be noted that, based on commands from the main control board 4100 (main prize ball number information output command to be described later), various types such as an upper start opening 2101, a lower start opening 2102, a general winning opening 2104, 2201, and a large winning opening 2103, for example. When the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 20 or more based on the game balls entered in the winning opening and the main prize ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the number of main prize balls The information output signal is output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the external terminal board 784 with an interval of 0.128 seconds so that the information output signal is one continuous signal for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times). It has come to be.

  The output terminal PT11 is provided in yellow-green to output a maintenance information output signal. As described above, the maintenance information output signal is based on the in-operation signal indicating that the air cooling device provided in each of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 and the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is operating. When either or both of the operating signal from the projector 1850 and the operating signal from the projector 1851 are not input, it is assumed that the air cooling device is not operating or the projector driving board 1800 and the frame decoration driving. The path extending from the amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, the projector driving board 1801, the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame periphery A route to the relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140 Among them, the wiring for electrically connecting the projector driving board 1800 and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the wiring for electrically connecting the projector driving board 1801 and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 Wiring for electrically connecting the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, wiring for electrically connecting the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control board 4140 Air wiring devices that are respectively provided in the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 and the projector 1851 of the door frame display device 1821 on the assumption that one or a plurality of wires are disconnected. It is a signal that tells you to check. When the maintenance information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer sends the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820 and the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 respectively. Either one or both of the air cooling devices provided are not in operation, or the projector drive board 1800, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control Of the path extending to the board 4140 and the path extending to the projector driving board 1801, the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, the projector driving Substrate 1800 and frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 Wiring that electrically connects the projector, the wiring that electrically connects the projector driving board 1801 and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the wiring that electrically connects the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, Of the wiring that electrically connects the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the wiring that electrically connects the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control board 4140, one wiring or a plurality of wirings It is possible to grasp that the wiring is in a state where the wiring is disconnected, or that one of the problems occurs. In the hall management room where the hall computer is installed, the hall manager looks at the contents displayed on the display of the hall computer and looks at the projector 1850 and the door frame of the upper dish side display device 1820 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to contact a staff member such as a store clerk who circulates in the hall by using a radio so as to check the air cooling devices provided in the projector 1851 of the side display device 1821.

  As described above, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 includes the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit. 400 for relaying the connection between the various switches for detecting the operation of the drive motor 414 and the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Various wirings that are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 from the door frame 5 side are routed to the lower back side on the closed side of the door frame 5 and provided on the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Although it extends from the door frame 5 side to the connector, it is organized in a state of being bundled together by a white translucent spiral cable tube.

  Grapes in the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3 (when the game balls falling through the game area 100 are closed together with the following game balls between the obstacle nails, the falling game balls are stacked one after another. In order to remove this, a staff member such as a hall clerk inserts a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and performs a rotation operation in order to remove this. The door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 in order to periodically maintain the game board 4 (cleaning dust, cigarettes, etc.). When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a load is applied to various wirings collected in one cable tube. It will take a break There is.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cable for the operating signal that conveys that the air cooling device provided for the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820 and the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is operating is also one cable tube. Therefore, the operating signal is generated by one load when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. It is also used to convey that there is a possibility that the various wires collected in the cable tube may be disconnected. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation signals from the air-cooling devices provided in the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 and the projector 1851 of the door frame display device 1821 are combined into one cable tube. It also functions as a signal to notify that the disconnection state of other wiring is confirmed. Accordingly, the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the disconnection of the wiring for driving and controlling the decorative substrates provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 are provided. Since there is no need to provide dedicated wires for confirming the disconnection of the wires from the various switches that respectively detect the operation of the drive motor 414 and the rotation pressing operation unit 405, the number of wires collected in one cable tube The increase in the outer diameter of the cable tube can be prevented, and the door frame 5 can be opened with respect to the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3. Contribute to preventing the disconnection of the wiring by being able to suppress the load on the wiring when closing the door frame 5 It can be.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT11 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 4110 side, and the output terminals PT3 to PT9 output on the main control board 4100 side. The various signals are output (passed) through the payout control board 4110, and the output terminals PT10 and PT11 are arranged so that signals output on the peripheral control board 4140 side are output. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT11 is colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors as these colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT11, the other wirings are mistakenly electrically connected. Connection can be prevented. The payout control board 4110 does not mix various signals output on the payout control board 4110 side, various signals output on the main control board 4100 side, and signals output on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting various signals output on the side to the hall computer are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 4100 side to the hall computer. The output terminals PT3 to PT9 are arranged in a row from the center left side to the right side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT10 and PT11 for transmitting signals output on the peripheral control board 4140 side to the hall computer are external terminal boards. The output terminals PT1 to PT11 are arranged on the right side of 784. By arranging them in a line, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 4110 side to the hall computer and the various signals output on the main control board 4100 side are also transferred to the hall computer. It is possible to prevent an erroneous electrical connection between the wiring for transmitting to the wiring and the wiring for transmitting a signal output on the peripheral control board 4140 side to the hall computer.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 4110 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the peripheral control board 4140 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If the 15-round big hit happens to happen in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time when there is a short remaining, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as prize balls will be insufficient. (For example, if a clogged ball or a ball is generated in the prize ball device 740, the game ball cannot be paid out unless it can be eliminated). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 4110 side is, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal to notify that every time, it becomes impossible to pay out the game ball, so that the payout control board 4110 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. The hall clerk, for example, checks the position of the ball clogging by checking a hose-like supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the Pachinko Island facilities to the prize ball tank 720 (for example, in the prize ball device 740) When the generated ball clogging position and the position of the ball stagnation are specified and resolved, the game ball is returned to a state where it is paid out.

  However, even if the hall clerk etc. is working, the game by the main control board 4100 is in progress, and after the big round of 15 rounds is finished, the game ball is paid out by the work of the hall clerk etc. When the state returns to the state, the payout control board 4110 pays out unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 4110 is in a period when the 15th round big hit ends and the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Outputs an award ball number information output signal indicating that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 reaches 10 balls, and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, in spite of the fact that 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. There arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the number of balls.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 4110 and is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 4110. As shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 4100 is based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the general winning ports 2104, 2201, and the big winning port 2103 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as award balls reaches ten, a command (a main prize ball number information output command to be described later) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, and the peripheral control board 4140 Based on the received command (main prize ball number information output command described later), the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the general winning opening 2104, 2 Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls entered in various winning openings such as 01 and the grand prize opening 2103, it is indicated as main prize ball number information. A mechanism was adopted in which the main prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784 and transmitted to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (troubles such as clogging of the refilling nozzle or the like, clogging of the ball in the prize ball device 740, or ball clogging) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and this gaming state It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be paid out and the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[13. Driving the projector]
Next, drive control of the projector 1850 provided in the upper dish side display device 1820 shown in FIG. 8 and drive control of the projector 1851 provided in the door frame side display device 1821 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic configuration diagram of projectors 1850 and 1851. Since the projector drive boards 1800 and 1801 are boards having the same function, the projector drive board 1800 will be described here, and the projectors 1850 and 1851 have the same structure. The reference numerals relating to the projector driving board 1801 and the projector 1851 are described in parentheses after the reference numerals relating to the projector driving board 1800 and the projector 1850, respectively. First, the projector driving board 1800 for driving the projector 1850 (1851) will be described, and then the optical engine of the projector 1850 (1851) and the driving method of the projector will be described.

[13-1. Projector drive board circuit]
As shown in FIG. 38, the projector driving substrate 1800 (1801) mainly includes an LVDS receiver IC 1800v (1801v) and a DMD driving circuit 1800w (1801w).

  The LVDS receiver IC 1800v (1801v) displays drawing data output as serial data from the channel CH2 (channel CH3) of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal. When received via the plate 882 and the frame decoration drive lamp board 194, the received serial data is converted into three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. , And a clock signal are restored to parallel data composed of the three synchronization signals and output to the DMD driving circuit 1800w (1801w).

  The DMD drive circuit 1800w (1801w) receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal input from the LVDS receiver IC 1800v (1801v). The optical element 1850n (1851n), which is a DMD provided in the projector 1850 (1851), is driven and controlled according to the drawing data constituted by the three synchronization signals, and the red LED 1850a (1851a) provided in the projector 1850 (1851) is controlled. The green LED 1850b (1851b) included in the projector 1850 (1851) is controlled by driving through the R-LED drive circuit 1800x (1801x) (by outputting a control signal to the R-LED drive circuit 1800x (1801x)). Is controlled via the G-LED drive circuit 1800y (1801y) (by outputting a control signal to the G-LED drive circuit 1800y (1801y)), and the blue LED 1850c (1851c) included in the projector 1850 (1851) is set to B. Drive control is performed via the LED drive circuit 1800z (1801z) (by outputting a control signal to the B-LED drive circuit 1800z (1801z)).

[13-2. Projector optical engine]
The projector 1850 (1851) includes red LEDs 1850a (1851a), green LEDs 1850b (1851b), and blue LEDs 1850c (1851c) as light sources. The red light emitted from the red LED 1850a (1851a) is collected by the condenser lens 1850d (1851d), and the green light emitted from the green LED 1850b (1851b) is collected by the condenser lens 1850e (1851e), and the blue LED 1850c. The blue light emitted from (1851c) is condensed by the condenser lens 1850f (1851f). Red light emitted from the red LED 1850a (1851a) and collected by the condenser lens 1850d (1851d) is reflected by the mirror 1850g (1851g), and emitted from the green LED 1850b (1851b) and collected by the condenser lens 1850e (1851e). The emitted green light is reflected by the mirror 1850h (1851h), and the blue light emitted from the blue LED 1850c (1851c) and collected by the condenser lens 1850f (1851f) is reflected by the mirror 1850i (1851i). It has become. The mirror 1850g (1851g) reflects red light and transmits green light and blue light, and the mirror 1850h (1851h) reflects green light and transmits blue light. The optical path of each color light reflected or transmitted by the mirrors 1850g (1851g) to 1850i (1851i) is condensed along the same optical axis via the condenser lens 1850k (1851k) (that is, the condenser lens 1850k (1851k)). ) To be incident on a polarized beam spiriter 1850m (1851m).

  Each color light reflected by the polarization beam splitter 1850m (1851m) is bent to an optical element 1850n (1851n) which is a DMD, reflected by the optical element 1850n (1851n), and again reflected by the polarized beam spiriter 1850m (1851m). ) And transmitted through the polarized beam spiriter 1850m (1851m) and emitted from the projection lens 1850p (1851p). The projection lens 1850p (1851p) functions as an ultra-wide angle single focus lens composed of a plurality of lenses.

  In this embodiment, each color LED 1850a (1851a) to 1850c (1851c), condenser lens 1850d (1851d) to 1850f (1851f), mirror 1850g (1851g) to 1850i (1851i), condenser lens 1850k (1851k), polarizing beam spirit. The optical engine including the optical element 1850m (1851m), the optical element 1850n (1851n) which is a DMD, and the projection lens 1850p (1851p) is mounted on the housing of the projector 1850 (1851) in order to maintain a stable arrangement. Has been. Further, since the temperature inside the projector 1850 (1851) rises due to the heat generated by the optical engine described above, an air cooling device FAN0 (FAN1) is provided to release this heat to the outside. The air-cooling device FAN0 (FAN1) is driven by being supplied with power by a voltage of + 12V from the projector driving substrate 1800 (1801). When a voltage of +12 V is supplied, the air cooling device FAN0 (FAN1) outputs an in-operation signal indicating that a fan (not shown) is rotating and operating. The in-operation signal output from the air cooling device FAN0 (FAN1) is controlled by the projector drive board 1800 (1801), the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The operation state of the air cooling device FAN0 (FAN1) is monitored by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the air cooling device FAN0 (FAN1) is not operating when the operation signal from the air cooling device FAN0 (or FAN1) is not input, or the projector driving board 1800 (1801), frame decoration Of the paths extending to the drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, the projector drive board 1800 (1801) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are electrically connected. Wiring to connect, wiring to electrically connect frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, wiring to electrically connect peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and frame Of the wirings that electrically connect the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140, one wiring As the plurality of wirings is disconnected, and outputs the maintenance information output signal for informing of inspecting air cooler FAN0 the (FAN1) to the external terminal board 784.

  Note that + 24V supplied from the peripheral control board 4140 to the projector driving board 1800 (1801) is supplied to the voltage generation circuit 1800a (1801a) as described above. A plurality of types of voltages generated by the voltage generation circuit 1800a (1801a) are LVDS receiver IC 1800v (1801v), DMD drive circuit 1800w (1801w), R-LED drive circuit 1800x (1801w), G-LED drive circuit 1800y ( 1801y) and a voltage corresponding to the B-LED driving circuit 1800z (1801z) are supplied, and a voltage corresponding to the optical engine of the projector 1850 (1851) is supplied.

[13-3. Projector driving method]
Next, the driving method of the projector 1850 (1851) will be briefly described. The LVDS receiver 1800v (1801v) of the projector driving board 1800 (1801) is a sound source of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. When drawing data output as serial data from the channel CH2 (channel CH3) of the built-in VDP 4160a is received via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame decoration drive lamp board 194, this reception is received. The serial data is restored to parallel data composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. DMD drive circuit 1800w And outputs it to the 1801w). The DMD driving circuit 1800w (1801w) receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are input from the LVDS receiver IC 1800v (1801v), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and The red LED 1850a (1851a), the green LED 1850b (1851b), and the blue LED 1850c (1851c) included in the projector 1850 (1851) are sequentially caused to emit light one by one in accordance with drawing data composed of three synchronization signals called clock signals. Therefore, the control signals are output to the R-LED drive circuit 1800x (1801x), the G-LED drive circuit 1800y (1801y), and the B-LED drive circuit 1800z (1801z), respectively, and the red LED 1 50a (1851a), green LED1850b (1851b), and controls the driving of the optical element 1850n (1851n) is a DMD in accordance with the emission of the blue LED1850c (1851c). Accordingly, each color light emitted from the projection lens 1850p (1851p) is projected onto the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 (the entire inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 shown in FIG. 7). Then, the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 (the inner side wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200) of the plate unit 300 is sequentially switched in order of a red screen, a green screen, and a blue screen. Thus, each image is displayed as an afterimage in the player's eyes and is clearly recognized by the player as a full color screen.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process described later is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, and this period of about 33.3 ms is time-divisionally divided. Then, red, green, and blue are emitted in order one by one. That is, in the present embodiment, the entire surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 (the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200) of the dish unit 300 is time-divided over a period of about 33.3 ms, and the red screen, green By switching one after another in the order of blue screen and blue screen, one full-color screen in about 33.3 ms, in other words, one full-color screen in about 33.3 ms is clearly recognized by the player. The Rukoto.

[14. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 40 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 42 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[14-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When inputted, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper plate 301 or When the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device that pays out a game ball as a rental ball (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. In addition, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated. In the command 11H, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as balls for lending) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 39 (b), paying out from the main control board 4100 Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110, one prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 39C, and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[14-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, ordinary synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[14-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the upper start-up switch 3022 shown in FIG. 13, and, as shown in FIG. 40, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the upper special symbol display 1185, it is composed of commands with names of special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. Note that the probability and short-time state include a low-probability short-time state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-time state, a high-probability time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and a short-time state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a short-time state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-short state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the short time state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. Compared with the non-short-time state (normal game state), the time for displaying the symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. In addition to increasing the number of times of stop display compared to the non-time-short state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 9 is set longer than that of the non-time-short state (normal game state). A state where a lottery opportunity for special symbols can be obtained without reducing the number of possessed balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the lower start opening 2102 shown in FIG. In comparison with the state, the determination of whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2106 is increased, and in the case of opening / closing the pair of movable pieces 2106, the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2106 is lengthened. Thus, the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the lower start port 2102 is increased).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[14-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 13, and is divided into the functions of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the lower special symbol display unit 1186, it is composed of commands having names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[14-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 40, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the winning prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the attack unit 2100 shown in FIG. 9). The command indicating that the Nth round of the grand prize winning opening 2103 is being opened or the opening of the Nth round is instructed. 2103 during the closing of the round or the start of closing), and the winning prize 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls counted from 0 to 10 is counted (the count switch shown in FIG. 13). The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2103 detected by the H.210, and the jackpot ending command is large. Ri is intended to instruct the ending start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or releasing the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) and is sent to the winning prize. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the winning prize opening 1 (when the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[14-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 40, the power-on category is composed of commands named “power-on state”, “power-on main control return destination”, and “power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification”. . These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) )), The information indicating which state (probability and short-time state) to recover from among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state, And information indicating the model code of the pachinko gaming machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which game is for which copyright, what game specifications (for example, probability variation is When the game happens, the game will continue until the next jackpot game state is generated, and the game where the probability variation occurs when the number of changes in the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is to specify whether it is a specification (so-called ST machine). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine specifies the series code for specifying which type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type indicating the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, the game will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and the probability of a special symbol with a limited number of changes) It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes fluctuation.

  The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 4100 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 13 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  The main notification ball number information output determination counter notification command when the power is turned on includes an upper start opening 2101, a lower start opening 2102, a general winning opening 2104, 2201, a large winning opening 2103, etc., on which the main control board 4100 is provided in the game board 4. Main control built-in RAM that indicates the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that counts the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in the various prize opening Is stored and backed up as one piece of game backup information. The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command at power-on is main when power is turned on (including when power is restored and when power is restored due to a power outage or momentary power failure). The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out and created from the game backup information stored and backed up (backed up) in the control built-in RAM. When the RAM is cleared by operating the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 14, the game backup information stored and backed up in the main control built-in RAM is initialized to initialize the main game backup information. The value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value 0 (zero) (that is, when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 14 is operated to clear the RAM. Is forcibly set to zero game balls to be paid out as prize balls).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command, the main control board power-on (in addition to power-on, (Including when power is restored due to a power outage or instantaneous power failure). Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board in step S120 in the main control side timer interruption process In the command transmission process, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are transmitted.

[14-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 13, and, as shown in FIG. 40, the normal symbol display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. As described above, the probability and the short time state include a low probability short time state that indicates a low probability state and a short time state, and a high probability short time state that indicates a high probability state and a short time state. A low-probability non-time-short state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-short state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-short-time state is set).

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[14-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 9 that are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named “Opening per figure”, “Opening of public power”, and “Ending per common figure”. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command for general power is started during normal power release. The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[14-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 41, the notification display section is composed of commands named as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (while the condition device is operating) (a game ball enters the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit) (When the count switch 2110 detects), an instruction to start winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, Instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection occurs. When the abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 13 (indicated command indicates that the offset is unsuccessful from the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A or the magnet detection state. In the case of), the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification is instructed.

  Further, the door opening command is generated based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The door opening notification is instructed when the state is one of or both of the state opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and the state where the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The door frame closing command is a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main body frame When 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door opening notification end is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command. , Which is transmitted when a break or short circuit occurs, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door opening command is used when the door opening is detected (based on detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, Sent when the frame 3 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 and / or when the door frame close command detects that the door is closed (door frame open). Based on detection signals from the switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the door frame 5 is in a state of being closed with respect to the body frame 3, and the body frame 3 is being closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Sent).

[14-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 41, the status display section is composed of commands having the names of frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command. These various commands are assigned “7 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 41, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[14-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 41, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 16). Inspects various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the operation of the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, And the test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[14-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 41, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, special It consists of a command with the name of symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect and main prize ball number information output. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect. When the game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022, Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 2109, it instructs to start the production when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102. The command for instructing state transition to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state is instructed. The high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol. 1 hold 0-4 pieces (a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 9 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 still displays the variation of the special symbol. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to transmit 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold commands (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 9). The special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls that have not been used yet for the special symbol variation display (the number of holdings), and the normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 normal symbol 1 holds. (A game ball passes through the gate part 2350 shown in FIG. 9 and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls that have not yet been used for normal symbol variation display (the number of holdings)). The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read based on the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display on the special display 1118 on the function display board 1191. special The special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is used to instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the design indicator 1185. Is used for pre-reading and informing the start of a pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol indicator 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold before the display of the fluctuation of the main symbol, and the main winning ball number information output The command is to be paid out as a winning ball based on game balls that the main control board 4100 has entered in various winning ports such as the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the general winning port 2104, 2201, and the big winning port 2103. Each time the number of game balls reaches 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to the hall via the external terminal board 784 as the main prize ball number information. It tells the computer to tell.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening prize (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or the lower start opening switch 2109 (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 5 is transmitted mainly from the speaker 130 provided in order to notify the fact by voice, and the change shortening operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the end of the change after confirming the change of the specified number of changes (the elapse of the stoppage period) The high-probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the lapse of the stoppage period). The special symbol 1 storage command is used when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and is still used for the special symbol change display on the special display 1118 on the function display board 1191. In the state where there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the retained number increases, the upper special symbol display 1185 is used to display the variation of the special symbol from the retained number. The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of special symbol 2 actuated balls is changed (a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the lower special symbol of the function display board 1191). In the state where there is a number of holdings that are not yet used for the change display of the special symbol on the display unit 1186, when the number of holdings increases when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 or when the number of holdings increases, the lower special symbol table The normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350). In the state where there is a reserve number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and the reserve number increases, or the reserve Is sent to the normal symbol display 1189 when the number of reserved symbols decreases and the number of reserved symbols decreases. Is sent when the game ball enters the mouth 2101 and the number of held balls increases, and the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of the special symbol 2 action held balls increases (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102) The main prize ball number information output command is sent at the time of various prize opening prizes (based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022) and the game ball enters the upper start opening 2101. When a ball is played, a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109. When the game ball enters the lower start port 2102, the general winning port 2104, 2201 is input based on the detection signal from the general winning port switches 3020, 3020. When a game ball enters the game ball, and when a game ball enters a winning port such as when a game ball enters the big winning port 2103 based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is received at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or from the lower start opening switch 2109. (When a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal), the speaker is housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly by voice. Although it is transmitted in order to notify that, the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 16 may use the start opening prize command in some cases depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored. It is the specification of using for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening prize command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 Some specifications do not notify by voice from 130.

[14-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and include frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  In the frame state 1 command, a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection are prepared in 50 or more stocks. Value 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when full, bit 1 (B2) is set to 1 when there are 50 or more stocks, and bit 3 (B3) is set when connection is abnormal 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error canceling navigation command, there are provided a sphere, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the case of a sphere, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in a count switch error, a value is set in bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 14 has a problem. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  In the frame state 2 command, a shot ball feed control circuit error is prepared, and in the shot ball feed control circuit error, a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, the frame state is changed, and the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[15. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 13 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 50. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the magnetic detection switch activation start process, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the malfunction detection process at the time of activation of the magnetic detection switch, and FIG. 48 is an offset adjustment execution request process. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a failure determination process when a magnetic detection switch offset adjustment is requested, and FIG. 50 is a timing chart for starting and restarting the magnetic detection switch. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by initial value update type counter movement, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, magnetic detection switch start start processing, magnetic detection switch start A description will be given of time failure determination processing, offset adjustment execution request processing, magnetic detection switch offset adjustment execution failure determination processing, and magnetic detection switch activation and restart.

[15-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated Reach determination random number for use in determination, and a variable display pattern for use in determination of the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 shown in FIG. A random number for use in determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display unit 1185 and the lower special symbol display unit 1186 when the jackpot gaming state is generated, and the random number for the jackpot symbol Random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value, the upper special symbol indicator 1185 for generating the small hit gaming state, and Random numbers for small hit symbols for use in determining the small hit symbols derived and displayed by the special symbol display 1186, random numbers for determining initial values for small hit symbols for use in determining the initial values of the random numbers for small hit symbols, etc. Is prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a determination random number for normal symbols for use in determining whether or not to move the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. 9 and an initial value of the random numbers for determination per normal symbol are determined. Random numbers for determining initial values for normal symbols to be used, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns for use in determining the fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbols that are variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 4100an built in the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 4100a is reset, the main random number built-in circuit 4100an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 4100a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 27), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at a high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 4100a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 4100an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 4100a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 4100an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 4100an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 14 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values is stored in the main control side power-off process (when the power is turned off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the check sum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal value per symbol is the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. Takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this extracted ID code, it is a fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination Always run the initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. If the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are attached, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a ′ provided in the other game board 4 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 4 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is not useful at all on the other game board 4 ', that is, the other pachinko gaming machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure occurs at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 9, the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. A gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the lower start port 2102 cannot be generated.

[15-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  The main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The main control built-in RAM can be updated by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 4100af shown in FIG. 13 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 4100af for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 4100a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 4100a”). The timer setting value is set in the “WDT control register”), the main control built-in WDT 4100af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 4100a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 4100af is activated, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 4100af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a) is reached by the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 4100a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 4100af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 4100af is activated and time measurement is started, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value. Timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 4100af is cleared, and timekeeping is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 4100a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 4100af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this power failure clear process, first, output of a power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the power failure clear process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, thereby starting the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilize after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program determines whether or not the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 14 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program is performed based on whether or not an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 being operated is input to the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 860a is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 0 (step S20). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a, and game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, main prize ball number information) This flag indicates whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the output determination counter is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the various information is erased and a value of 0 when the various information is not erased. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Waiting for the system to start to boot (boot). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When a power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 4100a for the main control built-in WDT 4100af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 4100af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 4100a is forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 4100af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased and a value 0 when various information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when various information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 4100, when the main control board 4100 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28, and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has been normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (that is, main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which the power is turned on after being turned off, a state in which power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 4100 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 4100a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. Therefore, the main control-side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when various information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 4100a instructs the RAM clear of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a, erases various information, does not match the sum value, or performs a process when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates a random number for judgment per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the normal value determining random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol determining random value described above. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0 (zero).

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 4110) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 4140 are incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main random number circuit 4100an with built-in main control shown in FIG. 13 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 4100a for updating by hardware the random number for determining the big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state In addition, a setting such as latching and acquiring a random number is set, and activation of the hard random number circuit 4100an with built-in main control is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 4100an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 27) input to the main control MPU 4100a. Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 4100a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping. When the main control MPU 4100a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main random number 4100an with built-in main control, it outputs a latch signal to the main random number circuit 4100an with main control, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 4100an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. Main control built-in RAM as transmission information by creating the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command shown in Stored in the transmission information storage area. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various commands are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S51). The magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to perform control for starting the magnetic detection switch 3024 by starting the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The value is set to 1 when the power supply to the switch 3024 is started and the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts to be activated, and the value is set to 0 when the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is started and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is activated. The The magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG is set to a value of 1 as an initial value, and is initialized at the time of power recovery. In the process of step S51, the value of 1 is set again. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S51, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. The drive signals output to the symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the game state display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. are stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 4100a for the main control built-in WDT 4100af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 4100af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 4100af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power supply from the Pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island facility is The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power is shut off until about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility When the power is cut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process at step S22 at the time of power recovery, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side display by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the device 1820 and the door frame side display device 1821 starts (boots) is started. However, if a momentary power failure or a power outage occurs just before the standby time is reached, the electric charge charged in the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, as + 5V. Within a period of 7 ms, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then interrupt is enabled in step S52. The main control side power interruption process in the main control side power on process is completed even if the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated. May not be possible. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or power failure. If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, even if the operation switch 860a is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and the intention of the hall clerk such as RAM clear is not displayed, the game backup information described above is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that will be erased.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 4100a for the main control built-in WDT 4100af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 4100af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 4100af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 4100a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input (ie, step If the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination of step S24, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 4100 can be restarted. Game information and other information (for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) It is possible to prevent the various kinds of information including to information, etc.) is updated, so that never change occurs in the checksum calculation result. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process) Even if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the game information and other information by the progress of this game can be obtained by supplying power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Various information including (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is stored. Because the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 can complete the main control side power-off process constituted by the process of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop that is the backup process for When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control MPU 4100a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation value stored in step S64) are displayed. Since it is determined that they match, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 4100 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 4100a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 4100af so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control MPU 4100a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 27 is applied to the VDD terminal as the power supply terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 In step 24 immediately after that, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to clear the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 4100a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 4100af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 4100a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 4100af by setting the set value and clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 4100af and making it impossible to start the time measurement again. . The main control MPU 4100a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT 4100af, so that the step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, the number of main winning balls) are set by interrupt permission to prevent progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A mechanism is adopted in which it is possible to avoid updating various information) including information indicating information output determination counter values). Thus, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination counter) The various information including the information indicating the value of the data) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other The information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is divided into two parts that are covered by hardware so that the information is not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. It has been cut way.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command shown in FIG. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2105 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. Yes. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2105 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on in step S50 is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 4140 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven and the big prize opening 2103 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored. The drive of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the state where the special winning opening 2103 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 is changed to the opened state; That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 4140 receives various commands from the main control board 4100 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 4140 can return based on the probability indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 4100 at the time of power restoration and the short-time state. However, when the main control board 4100 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 4140 is in the main control board 4100 when power is restored. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and returned based on the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. In other words, for example, a winning prize opening 1 count display command is transmitted that informs the number of gaming balls that have entered the big winning opening 2103 and are detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 4100 transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 and the peripheral control board 4140 receives the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control board 4140 has a game ball ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, it is not possible to display which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 4100 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) in the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. From the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board for instructing to shift from the closed state to the closed state (that is, closing start between rounds of the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100). 4140, when the main control board 4100 starts 5 rounds (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the big winning opening 2103 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 To the state of being released from the state (that is, the big prize opening 2103 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) times th round from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 finally switches the screen of starting five rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and short time state, and displays it on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Become.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a game indicating that the movable piece has been expanded) indicating that the gaming state is such that the gaming ball can be received at the lower start port 2102 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 4140 controls the display on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the main control board 4100 drives the start port solenoid 2105 to display the pair of screens shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction and then power is restored, the main control board 4100 displays the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the start port solenoid 2105 is opened by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a pair of the movable piece 2106 is up standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction by.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 4140 receives various commands from the main control board 4100 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 4140 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 4100 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 4100 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received in the lower start port 2102 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 4140 plays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 4100 when the power is restored. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and returned, it becomes a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received in the lower start port 2102 and is in a gaming state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 4140 cannot display the display screen on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 at all. For this reason, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is received at the lower start port 2102 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the game state is enabled. In such a case, the game state at the time of power recovery is returned to the game state where the game ball can be received at the lower start port 2102. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, a screen for instructing a game in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the lower start port 2102) is not displayed. There is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he plays.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko gaming machine appears to be in a state where the system of the pachinko gaming machine is clumped, a so-called frozen state, when a power failure occurs after a momentary power failure or power failure, There was a problem of misunderstanding.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 4100 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 4140, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Then, a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 4140, for example, in the above-described example, in the four rounds of the big hit gaming state, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 4100. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, as the return destination of the main control board 4100, the attacker solenoid 2108 starts to be driven and the special winning opening 2103 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107. The peripheral control board 4140 can tell the peripheral control board 4140 that it is to shift to the current state, so that the peripheral control board 4140 has specified that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, A screen (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game is played in the big prize opening is displayed.) The driving of the casoleole 2108 is started and the big prize opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. Play the game to make the ball enter the player. ”Is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is restored. It is possible to instruct the game to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening 2103 after the electric train. For example, in the above-described example, the game state is such that the game ball can be received at the lower start port 2102. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a game state advantageous to the user and then power is restored, the start port solenoid 210 is used as a return destination of the main control board 4100. A screen (e.g., “The movable piece is widened. A game ball is inserted into the lower starting port” is displayed to indicate that the pair of movable pieces 2106 has been expanded in the horizontal direction. The peripheral control board 4140 displays on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and displays the message “Please play the game to the player” to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine. It is possible to instruct the game to enter the game ball into the lower start port 2102 after power is restored. Thereby, when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 4140 can be finely instructed on the main control board 4100 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine has a power outage after a momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the pachinko machine system appears to be clumped, so-called frozen, and has failed. Misunderstanding can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 4100, when the main control board 4100 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 4100 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68 which are backup processes and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on time shown in FIG. By creating a counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at the time of insertion, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In these main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, first, a power-on state command is transmitted, followed by a power-on main control return destination command, followed by a power-on main prize ball number. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 4100 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the power-on state command is sent from the main control board 4100 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 14 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in the figure is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, (Including the time of recovery to recover)) In any of the above states (probability and short-time state) among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state Information indicating whether or not to perform, and information indicating a model code of the pachinko gaming machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko gaming machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko gaming machine is the type of pachinko gaming machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 4100) which is created when each of the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type is created. What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability change occurs, the game will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and the number of special symbol changes is limited ( For example, it is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) in which the probability variation occurs in the state of 30 times or 70 times))).

  In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the main control board 4100 is manufactured, the main control board 4100 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 4100 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 4100, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among a plurality of types of works. Although the main control board 4100 flows to the production line to manufacture the 4100, the main control board 4100 is used to manufacture the main control board 4100 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F). There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 4100 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the main control boards 4100 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the operator of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm which copyright of the work is the main control board 4100 manufactured in, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what game specifications (game specifications or ST machines that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur) . Thus, when the main control board 4100 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the main control board 4100 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control over the copyrights of the types of works is mixed. The board 4100 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 4100 to the game board 4. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 4100 that does not correspond to the game board 4 for the copyright of the work to the game board 4. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 4 decreases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 4100 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model of the pachinko gaming machine In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating a code to the peripheral control board 4140, in step S50, a power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A command and a main notice ball number information output determination counter notification command upon power-on are created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 1 turns on the main control board 4100 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus can control the main control board. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko gaming machine included in the power-on state command received from 4100, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko gaming machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, A series code for specifying which type is a middle type or a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of a work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next jackpot In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until the game state occurs, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited Based on a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which a probability variation occurs, the main control board 4100 determines which work piece the main control board 4100 displays by checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor. It is possible to determine whether it is for the copyright, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) and how It is also possible to determine whether the game specification is a game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs). Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 4100 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the main control board 4100 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection of the manufacturing line The operator of the process can determine the model type of the main control board 4100, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications accurately by visually checking the inspection monitor, so that the main control board 4100 with respect to the copyright of the work is sorted and followed. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 4100 corresponding to the game board 4 for the copyright of the work to the game board 4, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 4 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 4 from being lowered due to the work of attaching 4100 to the game board 4. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 4.

[15-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program switches register banks as shown in FIG. 45 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 is normal for various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that it has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020 shown in FIG. 13 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2104, 2201 shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 13 for detecting a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2103 shown in FIG. 9, and a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. FIG. 9 shows a detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022, a detection signal from the lower start opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 13 that detects a game ball entering the lower start opening 2102 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 13 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 shown, a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. A payout control for notifying that the door frame 5 shown in the figure is in one of or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that indicates that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 13 has successfully received the main frame door opening signal from the board 4110 and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Are stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 and a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 41 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In other words, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, A start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2103 are shown. , A detection signal from an upper start switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 is read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. It is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 for the first time. -False detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by reading twice in total, that is, twice reading compared for the third time and twice reading compared for the second time to the fourth time Therefore, the reliability of detection signals from the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a magnetic detection switch activation start process (step S105A). In this magnetic detection switch activation start process, a process of starting the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 9 and starting the magnetic detection switch 3024 is performed. A detailed description of the magnetic detection switch activation start process will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S105A, the main control program performs malfunction detection processing at the time of starting the magnetic detection switch (step S105B). As described above, the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is (1) an offset adjustment that tells whether or not the offset adjustment has been successfully performed. Unsuccessful signal, (2) normal connection signal for reporting whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the CTL0 terminal and the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A, and (3) magnetic detection With the center position of the detection surface of the switch 3024 as a reference point, the game ball flows down to a range (a region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere) extending from the reference point to a detection distance at which magnetism can be detected. It changes to any of the magnet detection signals that detect whether or not a magnet is going to be detected by detecting the presence of a magnet that has the ability to change its direction. Therefore, in this magnetic detection switch start-up failure determination process, the contents of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal of (1) among (1) to (3) and (2). It is determined that the signal is one of the normal connection signals, and a process for identifying a defect is performed. A detailed description of the malfunction detection process when the magnetic detection switch is activated will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S105B, the main control program performs an offset adjustment execution request process (step S105C). In this offset adjustment execution request process, the logic of the main frame door opening signal from the payout control board 4110 is acquired based on the input information stored in the input information storage area in the switch input process of step S104, and FIG. 22) to determine whether or not to request the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 22 to perform the offset adjustment processing shown in FIG. 22, and to set the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal. Do. A detailed description of the offset adjustment execution request process will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S105C, the main control program performs a failure determination process when a magnetic detection switch offset adjustment is requested (step S105D). When the offset adjustment execution request process in step S105C is performed, the offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22 is performed on the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The offset adjustment unsuccessful signal indicating whether or not the offset adjustment has been successfully performed is output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. In this magnetic detection switch offset adjustment execution request failure determination process, it is determined that the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal and the failure is specified. A detailed description of the failure detection process at the time of requesting the magnetic detection switch offset adjustment will be given later.

  Subsequent to step S105D, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are set in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize information shown in FIG. 39 for reading out the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on this input information is created, or the main control board 4100 and The self-check command shown in FIG. 39 for confirming the connection state between the board and the payout control board 4110 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2103 shown in FIG. 9, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to notify that, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110. If the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 4110 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on this input information. In order to notify that, the main prize ball number information output command classified into others shown in FIG. 41 is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102 provided in the game board 4, The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings, such as the general prize opening 2104, 2201, and the big prize opening 2103, and the award in step S108. In the ball control processing, the award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored and updated. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number is 10 When the number of game balls is over (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the fact, and as transmission information The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the value is used as the main prize ball number information output determination counter value. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 42 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command) Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 860a. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program reformats the command received normally as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (a variety of commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified in the status display of FIG. 41). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the magnet is going to be performed based on the magnet detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the abnormal display is classified into the notification display shown in FIG. A magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, or when a detection signal is input from the count switch 2110 when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (the game is input to the big prize opening 2103) For example, when a ball enters), a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 41 as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit 4100an with built-in main control shown in FIG. (Random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in main control built-in main control MPU 4100a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Whether or not the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 4100a) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches with the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) set higher than that at the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control built-in main control MPU 4100a) and the built-in main control. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 4100a) Is determined by whether or not is included in the big hit determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the upper start port switch 3022, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 40 are created, while the lottery results are based on the lower start port switch 2109. In FIG. 40, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower symbol is displayed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so that the special symbol display 1186 is lit, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big prize opening 1 open Nth display command, big prize place 1 shown in FIG. Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 9 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two times, 2 to turn on the two-round indicator lamp 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in FIG. When the output of the lighting signal to the wind display lamp 1190a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1190b is set so as to be lit, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or to the gaming state display 1183 so that the presence / absence of probability variation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information by extracting the counter value etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the lower start port 2102 is achieved, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol per unit matches the normal symbol per-unit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2106, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol taken out does not match the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol based on the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern described above is used. The variable display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the general drawing synchronization effect shown in FIG. The lighting information is stored in the signal information storage area, and the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Store in the area.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and various signals are output based on the output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. Or a drive signal to the starter solenoid 2105 for opening / closing the movable piece 2106, or a drive signal for the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning prize opening 2103. 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start Pay various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a prize winning information output signal And outputs to the control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes various commands classified in relation to the special figure 1 tuning effect and various kinds classified in relation to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. Command, various commands classified into jackpot related, various commands classified into power-on, various commands classified into general figure synchronized production related, various commands classified into ordinary electric role production related, shown in FIG. Various commands classified into notification displays, various commands classified into status displays, various commands classified into tests, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 4100 has an upper start port 2101, a lower start port Games that are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in various prize openings, such as 2102, the general prize opening 2104, 2201, and the grand prize opening 2103 Main prize ball number information output command for instructing that the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, every time the number of balls reaches 10 balls. ) Is stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 27 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, as +5 V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 29 shifts at least a command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb by the serial management unit 4100aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 4100aea as the main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure after power is turned on, when power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. In the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball shown in FIG. Since the counter notification command for the number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, Then, it is sent to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order of the sum value, and then the status, mode, Are sent to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order of the sum value, and then the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command at the time of power-on is configured. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order of the sum value. Send. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read out from the game backup information and the various information is Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 4100af shown in FIG. 13 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 4100af in step S22 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 4100a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 4100af is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT 4100af is started again, so that the main control MPU 4100a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT 4100af.

  As described above, the main control board 4100 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be completed based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as a return destination of the game progress by the main control board 4100 at the time of power recovery. When the power is turned off, the power-on main control return destination command in FIG. It is possible to output to the substrate 4140. That is, the main control board 4100 sets the main control side RAM at the time of power-on processing at step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery), the power-on status command classified as power-on in FIG. A control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in this routine In the transmission process, as the main peripheral serial data, the status, mode , And are transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order of the sum value, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order of the status, mode, and sum value constituting the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. It transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order of status, mode, and thumb value, which constitutes the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at the time of insertion. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 determines the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 4100 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 4100. It is possible to display effects in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 4100 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is gathered, so-called It is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a broken state that appears frozen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 4100, when the main control board 4100 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thus, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on and a main notification ball count information output judgment counter notification command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, Status that constitutes a power-on state command as serial data, which is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then constitutes a main control return destination command at power-on , Mode, and sum value are sent to the main control board inspection process inspecting device, and then the main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command at power-on is configured, status, mode, and sum value order Is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko gaming machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 4100, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko gaming machine, The series code for specifying which type of the above-described Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, and the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, Game specifications (for example, a game specification in which if a probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and a probability specification will occur with a limited number of special symbol changes. (ST machine) etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code It has become way.

[15-4. Magnetic detection switch activation start processing]
Next, a description will be given of a magnetic detection switch activation start process that can start the magnetic detection switch 3024 by starting the supply of power to the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. This magnetic detection switch activation start process is performed in step S105A in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 45, which is repeated every 4 ms.

  When the magnetic detection switch activation start process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program determines whether or not the restart standby timer RBTTMR is activated as shown in FIG. 46 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. Is determined (step S140). The restart standby timer RBTTMR starts supplying the magnetic detection switch 3024 after the power of +12 V for magnetic detection is cut off to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. FIG. 45 is a timer for measuring a standby period RBT until the restart is started (in this embodiment, set to 300 ms). When the restart standby timer RBTTMR is started, the timer is repeatedly performed every 4 ms. Subtraction is performed in the timer subtraction process in step S102 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown.

  When the restart standby timer RBTTMR has been started in the determination of step S140, that is, until the power supply of + 12V for magnetic detection is cut off from the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 and the supply is started. When it is in the state, it is determined whether the standby period RBT has been reached based on the restart standby timer RBTMR (step S142). When the restart standby timer RBTTMR reaches the standby period RBT in the determination of step S142, that is, the magnetic detection + 12V power supply is shut off to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024, and then the supply starts and the magnetic When the detection switch 3024 enters a state of starting restart, the restart standby timer RBTTMR is stopped (step S144), and the standby period RBT is accurately set again based on the restart standby timer RBTTMR by starting the next restart standby timer RBTTMR. The restart waiting timer RBTTMR is initialized so that it can be timed (step S146).

  Subsequent to step S146, the magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG is set to 1 (step S148). As described above, the magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to perform control for starting the magnetic detection switch 3024 by starting the supply of power to the magnetic detection switch 3024. The value is set to 1 when the power supply to the switch 3024 is started and the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts to be activated, and the value is set to 0 when the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is started and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is activated. The In step S148, in order to restart the magnetic detection switch 3024, to supply power to the magnetic detection switch 3024 and to start starting the magnetic detection switch 3024, the magnetic detection switch start setting flag MISW- Set the value 1 to FLG.

  On the other hand, when the restart standby timer RBTTMR is not started in the determination in step S140, that is, the magnetic detection switch 3024 has already been supplied with the power of + 12V for magnetic detection supplied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024. When it is in the activated state (or in the middle of being activated), or when the restart waiting timer RBTTMR has not reached the waiting period RBT as determined in step S142, that is, the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 If the magnetic detection switch start setting flag MISW-FLG is 1 or not after the power supply for magnetic detection + 12V is cut off and the supply is started and restart is not started, or following step S148 Is determined (step S150).

  If the magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S150, that is, if the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is started and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is activated, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S150, that is, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is started and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is activated (or restarted). When starting, power supply start setting to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is performed (step S152). Here, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x shown in FIG. 30 is set to HI (logic H) and stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To do. Thereby, in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 45, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal becomes HI (logic H) and is output to the magnetic detection power drive circuit 4100x. As a result, the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x starts to supply + 12V for magnetic detection to the magnetic detection switch 3024 from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y.

  Subsequent to step S152, a startup state determination timer SDTMR is started (step S154). This startup state determination timer SDTMR is a magnetic detection control from step SM10 to step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side power-on timing shown in FIG. 21 by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. This is a timer for measuring the execution period of the side activation process by the main control MPU 4100a. In step S152, the start time of the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is started to start. By measuring the time, the execution period of the magnetic detection control side activation process by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 23 (that is, the period from the timing MST0 to the timing MST5 shown in FIG. 23) is controlled mainly. Main control MPU 410 on substrate 4100 And timed precisely at a, achieve synchronization with the main control MPU4100a and the magnetic detection switch 3024. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can identify the defect by determining the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S154, the magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG is set to a value of 0, that is, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is started and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is being activated (step S156). This routine is finished as it is.

[15-5. Failure detection process when the magnetic detection switch is activated]
Next, a failure determination process at the time of starting the magnetic detection switch that can determine the failure by determining the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A will be described. This failure determination process at the time of starting the magnetic detection switch is performed in step S105B in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 45 which is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

  As described above, the contents of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are (1) an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal indicating whether or not the offset adjustment has been successfully performed, depending on the timing, and (2) FIG. 19 (a), a normal connection signal indicating whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the CTL0 terminal and the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024, and (3) the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024. Can be changed in the direction in which the game ball flows down in a range extending from the reference point to a detection distance in which magnetism can be detected (region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the ball). It changes to any one of the magnet detection signals that tells whether or not the magnet is going to be performed by detecting the presence of the magnet having the capability. Therefore, in the malfunction detection process at the time of starting the magnetic detection switch, the contents of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are (1) to (3) of the offset adjustment failure signal of (1) and (2). It is determined that the signal is one of the normal connection signals, and a process for identifying a defect is performed.

  When the failure detection process at the time of starting the magnetic detection switch is started, the main control board 4100 starts the start state determination timer SDTMR as shown in FIG. 47 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. It is determined whether or not (step S160). As described above, this start-up state determination timer SDTMR is performed at steps SM10 to SM25 in the magnetic detection control side power-on timing shown in FIG. 21 by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. This is a timer for the main control MPU 4100a to count the execution period of the magnetic detection control side activation process up to the execution period of the magnetic detection control side activation process by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 23, the period from timing MST0 to timing MST5) is accurately measured by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024c. Synchronize with.

  If the startup state determination timer SDTMR is not started in the determination of step S160, this routine is ended as it is, whereas if the startup state determination timer SDTMR is started in the determination of step S160, the startup state determination timer Based on SDTMR, it is determined whether or not it is within the offset adjustment determination period ODT (step S162). In the offset adjustment determination period ODT, as described above, the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. This is a period set so that it can be determined. That is, as described above, the synchronization between the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is achieved, so that the offset adjustment failure signal is output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024. That the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 can output, and the main control board 4100 that the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal. The main control MPU 4100a matches the offset adjustment determination period ODT that can be determined. Thereby, it is possible to identify whether or not a malfunction due to the offset adjustment has occurred in the offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22 from the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024. In this embodiment, it is set to 600 ms.

  If it is determined in step S162 that the current time is within the offset adjustment determination period ODT based on the startup state determination timer SDTMR, an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal check process is performed (step S164). In this offset adjustment unsuccessful signal check process, the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal is obtained by determining that the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal, Every time the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal check process is performed (that is, every 4 ms in which the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly performed), a process of creating logic history information of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal is performed. .

  Following step S164, it is determined whether or not the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (step S166). In this determination, based on the history information of the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal created in the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal check process in step S164, the most recent consecutive predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 5 is set). In other words, a period of 20 ms (= 5 times × 4 ms), which is 5 times continuously for every 4 ms in which the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly performed, is set.) Offset When the logic indicating that the adjustment is successful is continued, it is determined that the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is successful, while when the logic indicating that the offset adjustment is successful is not continuous ( That is, when the offset is being adjusted or when the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed) Offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC3024c switch 3024 output is determined to have unsuccessful.

  When the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is successful in the determination of step S166, the offset adjustment unsuccessful flag OST-FLG is set to 0 (step S168). This offset adjustment unsuccessful flag OST-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is unsuccessful. (When offset adjustment is in progress or when offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed)), the value is set to 1, respectively.

  Subsequent to step S168, the offset retry counter ORC is set to 0 (step S170), and this routine is terminated. When the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is unsuccessful, the offset retry counter ORC cuts off the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024, starts the power supply again, and restarts to adjust the offset. It is a counter that counts the number of times to perform. In step S170, since it has already been determined in step S166 that the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 has been successful, the value 0 is set in the offset retry counter ORC in order to initialize the offset retry counter ORC. doing. The offset retry counter ORC is a flag that is used in common with a malfunction detection process at the time of a magnetic detection switch offset adjustment execution request to be described later.

  On the other hand, when the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is unsuccessful (when the offset adjustment is being performed or when the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed)) in the determination of step S166, the offset adjustment unsuccessful flag OST- The value 1 is set in FLG (step S172), and the value 1 is added to the offset retry counter ORC (increment, step S174). In step S174, the offset retry counter ORC is incremented by incrementing the offset retry counter ORC.

  Subsequent to step S174, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to stop (step S176). In the process of step S176, the magnetic detection switch dedicated power source created by the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y shown in FIG. 30 is used for the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. In order to shut off a certain magnetic detection power supply of +12 V, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal is set to LOW (logic L) for the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x shown in FIG. Store in the output information storage area of the control built-in RAM. As a result, in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 45, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal becomes LOW (logic L) and is output to the magnetic detection power drive circuit 4100x. Thus, the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x cuts off the magnetic detection + 12V power supply from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y to the magnetic detection switch 3024.

  Subsequent to step S176, a restart standby timer RBTMR is started (step S178). As described above, the restart waiting timer RBTTMR starts supplying the magnetic detection switch + 24V, which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. This is a timer for measuring the standby period RBT (in this embodiment, set to 300 ms) until the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts to restart.

  Subsequent to step S178, the activation state determination timer SDTMR is stopped (step S180), and the activation of the next activation state determination timer SDTMR is performed based on the activation state determination timer SDTMR. The startup state determination timer SDTMR is set so that the execution period of the magnetic detection control side startup process by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c (that is, the period from timing MST0 to timing MST5 shown in FIG. 23) can be accurately measured again. Initialization is performed (step S182), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not within the offset adjustment determination period ODT based on the startup state determination timer SDTMR in the determination of step S162, that is, when the offset adjustment determination period ODT has elapsed, the connection state determination period CDT based on the startup state determination timer SDTMR. It is determined whether it is within (step S184). In the connection state determination period CDT, as described above, the logic of the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is determined by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. It is a period that is set to be able to. That is, as described above, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are synchronized, so that the normal connection signal is magnetically transmitted from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 indicates that the connection state determination period CDT that the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the detection switch 3024 can output and the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is a normal connection signal. And the connection state determination period CDT that can be determined. Thereby, from the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024, in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process performed by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. In the connection confirmation processing in step SM25, it is possible to specify whether or not there is a problem that the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A has changed. Note that the connection state determination period CDT is set to 1000 ms in the present embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S184 that it is not within the connection state determination period CDT based on the start-up state determination timer SDTMR, that is, if the offset adjustment determination period ODT and the connection state determination period CDT have also elapsed, this routine is terminated as it is. If it is determined in S184 that it is within the connection state determination period CDT based on the startup state determination timer SDTMR, a normal connection signal check process is performed (step S186). In this normal connection signal check process, when it is determined that the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is a normal connection signal, the logic of the normal connection signal is acquired and the normal connection signal check process is performed. Every time it is performed (that is, every 4 ms in which the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly performed), a process of creating logic history information of the normal connection signal is performed.

  Following step S186, it is determined whether or not a normal connection state is established (step S188). As described above, the normal connection signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is in the normal connection state when there is no change in the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. When the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is changed while the logic is maintained and set to LOW (logic L), When the logic is maintained and set to LOW (logic L) for 30 ms, the logic is maintained and set to HI (logic H) for 30 ms, and the logic L and logic H are alternately set for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 4 cycles). In the determination in step S188, the most recent consecutive number of times (in this embodiment, 70 is set based on the logic history information of the normal connection signal created in the normal connection signal check process in step S186. In other words, a period of 280 ms (= 70 times × 4 ms), which is 70 times continuously every 4 ms in which the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly performed, is set abnormally. The CTL0 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 cannot be determined that the logic L and the logic H that indicate the connection state are alternately half a cycle (in this embodiment, two cycles) of the predetermined cycle. While the logic of the CTL2 terminal has not changed, it is determined that it is in a normal connection state, while logic L and logic H that indicate that it is in an abnormal connection state are alternately placed. Among the periods, it is an abnormal connection state because the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 has changed when it can be determined that it is the half period (two periods in this embodiment). Is determined.

  When the normal connection state is determined in step S188, the normal connection flag NCK-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S190). Is set (step S192). The normal connection flag NCK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 has changed. When the logic changes, the value 0 is set as not being in a normal connection state (that is, in an abnormal connection state). When a value 0 is set in the normal connection flag NCK-FLG, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display command that is classified into the notification display shown in FIG. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S190 or step S192, the startup state determination timer SDTMR is stopped in step S180, and the next startup state determination timer SDTMR is started in step S182 based on the startup state determination timer SDTMR. The execution period of the magnetic detection control side activation process by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 23 (that is, the period from the timing MST0 to the timing MST5 shown in FIG. 23) can be accurately measured again. As described above, the startup state determination timer SDTMR is initialized, and this routine is terminated.

[15-6. Offset adjustment execution request processing]
Next, offset adjustment execution request processing for setting the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal at the OFFSET terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. This offset adjustment execution request process is performed in step S105C in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 45, which is repeated every 4 ms.

  When the offset adjustment execution request processing is started, the main control board 4100 causes the main control program to execute steps in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 45 as shown in FIG. 48 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above in the switch input processing of S104, the logic of the main frame door opening signal from the payout control board 4110 is acquired, and the main frame door is opened. It is determined whether the main frame door is closed or the main frame door is closed (step S200). In this determination, based on the logic of the main frame door opening signal, (1) the main body frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 (2) When the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3 while the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, (3) The door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. When the main frame door is in a closed state, it is determined that the main frame door is in a closed state, while (4) the door frame 5 is When the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in the closed state, (5) the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. (6) The door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. When one of the states is reached, it is determined that the main frame door is open.

  When the main frame door is open in the determination of step S200, the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is set to LOW (logic L) and output information is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above as output information. Store (step S202), set the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG to 0 (step S204), and terminate this routine as it is. This offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is a flag indicating that the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 illustrated in FIG. 19A instructs to perform the offset adjustment processing illustrated in FIG. The value is set to 0 when no offset adjustment is requested, and is set to 1 when offset adjustment is requested. Note that when the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is set to LOW (logic L), the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is connected to the magnetic detection control side shown in FIG. The offset adjustment process in step SM45 (the offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22) in the main process on the magnetic detection control side in the power-on process is not performed.

  When the main frame door is closed in the determination in step S200, it is determined whether or not the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is a value 1 (step S206).

  When the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is 1 in the determination in step S206, that is, when the execution of offset adjustment is requested, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S206, that is, when the offset adjustment execution is not requested, the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is set to HI (logic H). The output information is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above (step S208). Thereby, the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal becomes HI (logic H) in the port output processing of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 45, and is output to the OFFSET terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024. When the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is set to HI (logic H) in the process of step S208, the logic is set to LOW (logic L) after maintaining and setting for a predetermined period (100 ms in this embodiment). Set to maintain. When the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is set to HI (logic H), the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The offset adjustment process (offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22) of step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the power-on process is performed.

  Subsequent to step S208, assuming that the offset adjustment is requested to be executed, the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is set to 1 (step S210), and the main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is started (step S212). This routine is finished as it is. This main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is a main control for the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. A timer that accurately measures the offset adjustment determination period ODT described above that can be determined in the main control MPU 4100a of the board 4100 in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. The main control of the main control board 4100 The MPU 4100a and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are synchronized. In step S212, the main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is started to start measuring the offset adjustment determination period ODT.

  When the main frame door is closed in the determination in step S200, when the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S206, that is, the execution of the offset adjustment is requested. If not, in the case where the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is set to HI (logic H) in step S208, the logic is maintained and set only for a predetermined period, and then the logic is maintained and set to LOW (logic L). In step S200, the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is set to 1 because the offset adjustment is requested in step S200. On the other hand, when the main frame door is open in step S200, When the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is 1 in the determination of S206, that is, When you request the implementation of offset adjustment is made as to terminate the routine. In other words, the offset adjustment execution request flag OFS-FLG is a magnetic detection control of the magnetic detection switch 3024 only once when the main frame door is changed from the opened state to the closed state. The flag indicates that the IC 3024c has instructed to perform the offset adjustment processing illustrated in FIG.

  Further, as described above, the output information stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in which the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is set in step S202 or step S208 is the main control shown in FIG. In the port output process of step S118 in the side timer interrupt process, various signals are output based on the read information.

[15-7. Failure detection process when requesting for magnetic sensor switch offset adjustment]
Next, the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is obtained by requesting the magnetic detection switch 3024 to perform the offset adjustment in the offset adjustment execution request processing of FIG. The defect detection process at the time of requesting the magnetic detection switch offset adjustment to be able to identify the defect by determining the above will be described.

  As described above, the contents of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are (1) an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal indicating whether or not the offset adjustment has been successfully performed, depending on the timing, and (2) FIG. 19 (a), a normal connection signal indicating whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the CTL0 terminal and the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024, and (3) the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024. Can be changed in the direction in which the game ball flows down in a range extending from the reference point to a detection distance in which magnetism can be detected (region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the ball). It changes to any one of the magnet detection signals that tells whether or not the magnet is going to be performed by detecting the presence of the magnet having the capability. In the offset adjustment execution request process of FIG. 48, when the magnetic detection switch 3024 is requested to perform the offset adjustment, the magnetic detection switch 3024 is already activated, and the magnetic detection shown in FIG. Since the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the switch 3024 is repeatedly performing the magnetic detection control side main process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. Then, the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is either the offset adjustment failure signal of (1) or the magnet detection signal of (3) among (1) to (3). To identify the problem.

  When the magnetic detection switch offset adjustment request failure determination process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program controls the main frame door closed state determination as shown in FIG. 49 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. It is determined whether or not the timer WSDTMR is activated (step S220). As described above, the main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is an offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Is a timer that accurately measures the above-described offset adjustment determination period ODT set in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a of the substrate 4100 and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are synchronized.

  When the main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is not activated in the determination in step S220, the routine is terminated as it is, while in the determination of step S220, when the main frame door closed state determination timer WSDTMR is activated, Based on this main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR, it is determined whether or not it is within the offset adjustment determination period ODT (step S222). In the offset adjustment determination period ODT, as described above, the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. This is a period set so that it can be determined. That is, as described above, the synchronization between the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is achieved, so that the offset adjustment failure signal is output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024. That the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 can output, and the main control board 4100 that the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal. The main control MPU 4100a matches the offset adjustment determination period ODT that can be determined. Thereby, it is possible to identify whether or not a malfunction due to the offset adjustment has occurred in the offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22 from the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024. In this embodiment, it is set to 600 ms.

  If it is determined in step S222 that the time is within the offset adjustment determination period ODT based on the state determination timer WSDTMR when the main frame door is closed, an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal check process is performed (step S224). In this offset adjustment unsuccessful signal check process, the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal is obtained by determining that the content of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal, Every time the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal check process is performed (that is, every 4 ms in which the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly performed), a process of creating logic history information of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal is performed. .

  Subsequent to step S224, it is determined whether or not the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (step S226). In this determination, based on the history information of the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal created in the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal check process in step S224, the last consecutive number of times (in this embodiment, set to 5 times). In other words, a period of 20 ms (= 5 times × 4 ms), which is 5 times continuously for every 4 ms in which the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly performed, is set.) Offset When the logic indicating that the adjustment is successful is continued, it is determined that the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is successful, while when the logic indicating that the offset adjustment is successful is not continuous ( That is, when the offset is being adjusted or when the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed) Offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC3024c switch 3024 output is determined to have unsuccessful.

  If the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is successful in the determination of step S226, the offset adjustment unsuccessful flag OST-FLG is set to 0 (step S228). As described above, the offset adjustment unsuccess flag OST-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is unsuccessful, and has a value of 0 when the offset adjustment is successful. Offset adjustment is unsuccessful (when offset adjustment is in progress or when offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed)).

  Subsequent to step S228, a value 0 is set in the offset retry counter ORC (step S230). As described above, when the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is unsuccessful, the offset retry counter ORC shuts off the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 and starts supplying power again. It is a counter that counts the number of times it is activated to perform offset adjustment. In step S230, since it has already been determined in step S226 that the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 has been successful, the value 0 is set in the offset retry counter ORC in order to initialize the offset retry counter ORC. doing. Note that the offset retry counter ORC may be initialized by the process of step S170 in the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process shown in FIG. 47 or may be incremented by the process of step S174 in the same process. 47 is a counter that is used in common with the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process shown in FIG. When the offset retry counter ORC reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, it is set to 10), the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 41 as an abnormal state. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above as transmission information, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is supposed to send.

  Subsequent to step S230, the main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is stopped (step S232), and the next main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is activated based on the main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR. The state determination timer WSDTMR when the main frame door is closed is initialized so that the adjustment determination period ODT can be accurately measured again (step S234), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when the offset adjustment by the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is unsuccessful (when the offset adjustment is being performed or when the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed)) in the determination of step S226, the offset adjustment unsuccessful flag OST- The value 1 is set in FLG (step S236), and the value 1 is added to the offset retry counter ORC (increment, step S238). In step S238, the offset retry counter ORC is incremented by incrementing the offset retry counter ORC.

  Subsequent to step S238, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to stop (step S240). In the process of step S240, the magnetic detection switch dedicated power source created by the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y shown in FIG. 30 is used for the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. In order to shut off a certain magnetic detection power supply of +12 V, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal is set to LOW (logic L) for the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x shown in FIG. Store in the output information storage area of the control built-in RAM. As a result, in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 45, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal becomes LOW (logic L) and is output to the magnetic detection power drive circuit 4100x. Thus, the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x cuts off the magnetic detection + 12V power supply from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y to the magnetic detection switch 3024.

  Subsequent to step S240, a restart standby timer RBTMR is started (step S242). As described above, the restart waiting timer RBTTMR starts supplying the magnetic detection switch + 24V, which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. This is a timer for measuring the standby period RBT (in this embodiment, set to 300 ms) until the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts to restart.

  Following step S242, the main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is stopped in step S232, and the main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is started in step S234 to start the main frame door closing state determination timer. The main frame door closing state determination timer WSDTMR is initialized so that the offset adjustment determination period ODT can be accurately measured again based on WSDTMR, and this routine is ended.

[15-8. Starting and restarting the magnetic detection switch]
Next, activation and reactivation of the magnetic detection switch 3024 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, first, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as described above, performs the magnetic detection switch in the process of step S51 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the activation setting flag MISW-FLG, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to start in the process of step S152 in the magnetic detection switch activation start process shown in FIG. As a result, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x shown in FIG. 30 is set to HI (logic H), and step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the port output process, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal becomes HI (logic H) and is output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x, whereby the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x is output to the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y. Starts to supply + 12V for magnetic detection to the magnetic detection switch 3024 to activate the magnetic detection switch 3024 (timing ST0).

  Then, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A, as described above, starts the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the offset adjustment process (offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22) in step SM20 in the control side activation process (process A) is performed and the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed), the magnetic detection switch shown in FIG. From the OUT terminal 3024, an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal in which a logic to notify that is set is output to the main control board 4100 (timing ST1). Based on the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 to which this offset adjustment failure signal is input has caused the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to have failed (failed) in the offset adjustment. In some cases, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to stop in the process of step S176 in the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process shown in FIG. As a result, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x shown in FIG. 30 is set to LOW (logic L), and step S118 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. In the port output process, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal becomes LOW (logic L) and is output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x, whereby the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x is output to the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y. To the magnetic detection switch 3024 is cut off from the power source of +12 V for magnetic detection (timing ST2).

  Then, the restart standby timer RBTTMR is started in the process of step S178 in the magnetism detection switch activation trouble determination process shown in FIG. When the standby period RBT (in this embodiment, set to 300 ms) is reached based on the standby timer RBTTMR, the value 1 is set to the magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG in the process of step S148 in the process. Thus, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to start in the process of step S152 in the process. Thereby, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x shown in FIG. 30 is set to HI (logic H), and step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the port output process, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal becomes HI (logic H) and is output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x so that the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x Then, the power supply of + 12V for magnetic detection is started to be supplied to the magnetic detection switch 3024, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is restarted (timing ST3).

  When the magnetic detection switch 3024 is restarted and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the offset adjustment process in step SM20 (offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22) in process A) is performed and the offset adjustment is not unsuccessful (successful), the magnetic detection control side activation process (process A) of the same process Subsequently, when the magnetic detection control side main process (process B) in the process is repeatedly performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the offset adjustment execution request process shown in FIG. 48 as described above. In step S200 in step S206 and in step S206 in the process, step S in the process is performed. By setting the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal to HI (logic H) in the process of 08, only once when the main frame door changes from the open state to the closed state. However, in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. ST4). When the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is set to HI (logic H) in the process of step S208, the logic is set to LOW (logic L) after maintaining and setting for a predetermined period (100 ms in this embodiment). Set to maintain.

  Then, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 performs the offset adjustment process (the offset shown in FIG. 22) in the magnetic detection control side main process (process B) of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed) by performing the adjustment process), an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal in which a logic for indicating the fact is transmitted from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Output to 4100. Based on the logic of the offset adjustment failure signal, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 to which this offset adjustment failure signal is input has caused the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to have failed (failed) in the offset adjustment. In some cases, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to stop in the process of step S176 in the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process shown in FIG. As a result, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x shown in FIG. 30 is set to LOW (logic L), and step S118 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. In the port output process, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal becomes LOW (logic L) and is output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x, whereby the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x is output to the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y. To the magnetic detection switch 3024 is cut off from the power source of +12 V for magnetic detection (timing ST5).

  Then, the restart standby timer RBTTMR is started in the process of step S178 in the magnetism detection switch activation trouble determination process shown in FIG. When the standby period RBT (in this embodiment, set to 300 ms) is reached based on the standby timer RBTTMR, the value 1 is set to the magnetic detection switch activation setting flag MISW-FLG in the process of step S148 in the process. Thus, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set to start in the process of step S152 in the process. As a result, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x shown in FIG. 30 is set to HI (logic H), and step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the port output process, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal becomes HI (logic H) and is output to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x, whereby the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x is output to the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y. Then, the power supply of + 12V for magnetic detection is started to be supplied to the magnetic detection switch 3024, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 is restarted (timing ST6).

  When the magnetic detection switch 3024 is restarted and the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. Subsequent to the processing (processing A), the magnetic detection control side main processing (processing B) in the processing is repeated, and in the magnetic detection processing of step SM30 in the processing, the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is set as a reference point. As such, it has the ability to add a change in the direction in which the game ball flows down in a range (range from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere) that extends from the reference point to a detection distance where magnetism can be detected. When the presence of the magnet is detected and it is determined whether or not the magnet is going to be performed, and when it is determined that the magnet is detected, FIG. 19 (a) A magnet detection signal set logic to convey the fact from OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown outputted to the main control board 4100 (timing ST7). Based on the logic of the magnet detection signal, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 to which this magnet detection signal is input detects the magnetic detection state in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not.

  As described above, the contents of the output signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are (1) an offset adjustment unsuccessful signal indicating whether or not the offset adjustment has been successfully performed in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. (2) A normal connection signal that indicates whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the CTL0 terminal and the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A. (3) Detection of the magnetic detection switch 3024 With the center position of the surface as a reference point, there is a change in the direction in which the game ball flows down in a range extending from this reference point to a detection distance where magnetism can be detected (region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere). Which of the magnet detection signals tells whether a magnet is going to be detected by detecting the presence of a magnet with the ability to be added Thereby making it possible to identify the precise determination to failure and fraud.

[16. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a continuation of processing when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 51. FIG. 53 is a payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interruption process, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process, and FIG. 56 is a sprocket. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball spot determination process, and FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of a prize ball stock number addition process for a prize ball. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of the winning ball stock number addition process, and FIG. 60 shows an example of the stock monitoring process. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball movement determination setting process, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 63 is an example of the ball movement setting process. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process, and FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error release operation determination process. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) and input signal confirmation processing (A) from the CR unit at the time of payout operation by ball lending.

  First, payout control unit power-on processing will be described, then payout control unit timer interruption processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition for prize ball Processing, winning ball stock count addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball binding operation determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball binding operation setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error cancellation The operation determination process will be described. In addition, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball curl determination processing, prize ball award ball stock number addition processing, rental ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball fringe The operation determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are performed as one process of the main operation setting process in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball edge determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball prize ball number addition processing, ball rental award Priorities are set in the order of the ball stock count addition processing, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball engagement motion determination setting processing. .

[16-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 has a payout control program as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Process at the time of input. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode in the payout control MPU 4120a (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4120a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage. Then, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A warning signal (paid outage warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 860a is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. When it is determined that the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation switch 860a is operated by determining that the RAM clear is instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW. judge.

  When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 4120a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prize ball information storage area) The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. This is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later. (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, information at the time of power recovery is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 4120a (hereinafter referred to as “the payout control built-in ROM”). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the payout control program reads the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear process triggered by the detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 860a. As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether a power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is used as the power failure warning signal. 4100 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when not elapsed. Is set.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) has been input. Determine.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms have elapsed, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control, prize ball information on the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b, and the like are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or a payout motor 744 outputs a drive signal, and the number of balls that the payout motor 744 actually pays out the game balls As a force signal, it is output to the external terminal board 784 (in this embodiment, every time the payout motor 744 actually pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. The prize ball number information output determination counter is actually set by the payout motor 744. The number of game balls that have been paid out is counted based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 14 in the port input processing in step S550 described later, and the game actually paid out by the payout motor 744. The award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is updated by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls. In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls that have been paid out, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is set to a step described later. In the port input process in S550, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 is added and updated based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 shown in Fig. 14. In the port output process in step S548, When the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area and the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 (that is, the payout motor 744 is actually When the number of game balls paid out to 10 has reached 10), an award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of balls exceeding the number Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter. Or a display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when the determination is made as to whether or not a ball stagnation state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the ball swatch determination set as the determination condition is performed. Time, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, determination of whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. Whether the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 by the detection signal from the full ball determination switch 750, which is set as the determination condition when performing the game, is greater than or equal to a predetermined number In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage judgment time set as the judgment condition when judging whether or not, the number of game balls delivered and received by the recess of the payout rotating body, and the actual When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 are repeatedly paid out The management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time set with the determination condition is performed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Every time processing is performed, the full tank determination time, the ball breakage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0. Judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. Determine. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 4120 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set on the basis of payout information relating to payout (PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the signal logic state is set).

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 and, when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. Exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals generated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. The data is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 4120a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. That is, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process As an example of setting the error status output to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6 The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thereby, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal notifying that a payout operation for paying out a ball cannot be performed can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless lending request signal from the CR unit 6, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal in the port input process of step S550, that is, a pachinko game. When the machine 1 is powered on and when the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the payout of the ball is made. When the logic state of the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while the logic state of the PRDY signal is HI, In other words, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are used for lending devices such as game balls. When it is not electrically connected via the connection terminal board 869, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and the payout control MPU 4120a has a predetermined state. Is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the output port. Note that the logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 4110 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs a full tank and ball break check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether the game balls are full or the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the award ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball break switch 750. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the game balls stored is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms and the full tank and full ball check processing at this time. The detection signal from 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is turned OFF in the last full (2 ms before) full ball and ball check check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON from OFF. When the transition is made, the time for the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the above-mentioned state information memory stores the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area. .

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the award ball apparatus 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, When the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is turned ON from OFF. When the transition is made, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON in the full tank and ball break check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is OFF, the ball break is transmitted to the effect that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control program performs a shot ball feed control circuit error check process (step S557). In this shot ball feed control circuit error check process, status information is obtained from the shot ball feed fault monitoring circuit 4120ah shown in FIG. 14 to determine whether or not a fault has occurred in the shot ball feed control circuit 4120ag. As described above, the firing ball feed failure monitoring circuit 4120ah determines whether or not a failure has occurred in the firing ball feed control circuit 4120ag that performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and the ball feed control by the ball solenoid 585. Monitoring is performed, and the monitoring result (whether or not a defect occurs) can be stored and held as status information. The payout control program obtains status information from the launching ball sending defect monitoring circuit 4120ah to determine whether or not a trouble has occurred in the launching ball sending control circuit 4120ag. When the payout control program obtains the status information from the launching ball feed failure monitoring circuit 4120ah and determines that there is no malfunction in the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag, the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag performs the launch control of the game ball. In order to start, the launching operation permission is set for the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag, and the launching operation permission information for notifying that the launching operation is permitted is stored in the state information storage area, while the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag. When it is determined that a failure has occurred, the launching ball sending control circuit 4120ag is set to prohibit the launching operation in order to forcibly stop the launching control of the game ball by the launching ball feed control circuit 4120ag, and The launching operation prohibition information that indicates that the operation is prohibited is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S557, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 39) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 4110 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, the corresponding display data (In this embodiment, a display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error canceling navigation command, and frame state) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 42 based on the various information. 2 commands) is generated and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, a frame state 1 command is issued. When it is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100, or when the firing operation permission information is read from the state information storage area, a frame state 2 command (to notify that it is not a firing ball feed control circuit error) based on this firing operation permission information When the value 0 is set to B0 and transmitted to the main control board 4100 or when the firing operation prohibition information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 2 command ( A value 1 is set in B0 in order to notify that it is a shot ball feed control circuit error.) Is generated and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540. If this power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is not input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. When 2 ms has elapsed, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548 In step S550, port input processing is performed. In step S552, Immediate update processing is performed, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and out of ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, and main processing is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. . The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU4120a. Note that the processing of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a payout control unit power-on process upon power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[16-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 54 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Then, the register is switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, a value of 1 when 2 ms elapses, and a value of 0 when 2 ms elapses. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[16-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 14 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout control program from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 55 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). A history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the payout control program detects the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. It is determined that the shaft is in a state where the shaft has transitioned from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the blocked state to the non-blocked state in step S612, the payout control program performs a rotation process of the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S614). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process (step S618). . In the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the payout control program performs the same process as the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, such as B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the detection slit rotates after the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Depending on the state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 752 has been changed from the non-blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, Since the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[16-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotator is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is completed. Thereby, rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute a fixed position determination skip flag SKP− as shown in FIG. 56 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is to be performed, and is 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping). The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program stores the rotation angle switch history information in the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the above described detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 continuously in four timer interruption cycles. Is a state in which the state is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 14 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since these first gear, second gear, and third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation angle switch 752 55. Detection signal history, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 55, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, This is performed based on a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 when the latest four timer interruption periods occur. As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 744 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash. Can do. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program A value 1 is set to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is not performed (skip). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Subsequent to step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit has a rotation angle. A state in which the optical axis of the switch 752 has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determined state”), and (3) a detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a non-blocked state to a blocked state. And three states (the “fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state in (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position fixed state in (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state in (3). Corresponds to 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632 is performed. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 4 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply path of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) for connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case 740 in the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. Cheap.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the precision of the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is increased. In addition, since the period and period required for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[16-5. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this ball collision determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball collision state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program This routine is finished as it is, assuming that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and no ball-spinning state occurs. To do.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out at step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S642, a sphere is seen. A value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-spinning state has occurred due to the payout rotating body. When no operation is performed, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball collision determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When the ball stagnation determination time becomes valid, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[16-6. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball stock number addition process is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game ball is paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set so that the number of prize ball stock for lending is added.

[16-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition processing for the prize ball is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout control program as shown in FIG. 58 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program receives the prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). This award ball stock PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in this embodiment has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that after the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[16-6-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the award ball stock number adding process for lending is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout request as shown in FIG. 59 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is no lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when there is a lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program reads the prize ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The winning ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the rented ball number RBV is added to the winning ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is finished. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the payout control program deletes the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in this embodiment, the winning ball is prioritized (the winning ball and the lending are managed separately), so even if there is a lending request signal, the lending request signal is held. When a prize ball is paid out, a rental ball is paid out. Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[16-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues playing the game in a state where the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is processing to do.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to display the award ball information in the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 60 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the careful threshold value TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S674), and the routine is terminated. The caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of game balls not paid out (the number of prize balls described above) exceeds the caution threshold TH. This flag indicates that the value has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the caution threshold TH, and to a value of 0 when the threshold value does not exceed the caution threshold TH.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  The gaming state becomes a big hit, and the player is relaxed and sees the effects unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 shown in FIG. The player may inadvertently remove a game ball paid out as a prize ball for one round by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540. When the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the award ball stock PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold TH, and is provided in the door frame 5 as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that he / she wants to remove the game ball from the lower plate 302, and the player fills the lower plate 302 (the storage space of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.

[16-8. Dispensing ball edge motion determination setting process]
Next, the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process will be described. This paying ball sliding motion determination setting processing is performed by paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. This is a process for setting whether or not to discharge or not.

  When the paying-ball ball movement determination setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 has the payout control program built in the payout control described above as shown in FIG. 61 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

  Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 14 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S682, when the payout control program matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  If it is determined in step S682 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not operating abnormally, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball colliding flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. Is determined (step S686). This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-bending state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. A value of 1 is set when the motion is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the sphere motion is not being performed.

  If the ball-picking flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, if a ball-pushing operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the award ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744.

  When the winning ball stock PBS is larger than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full. Is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check process in step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls.

  When the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in step S692, the payout control program performs payout setting processing (to be described later) (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped when the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, when the ball bending flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball bending operation is being performed, the payout control program performs a ball bending operation setting process described later (step S700). Exit. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, a ball-spinning operation that cancels the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (CR unit 6). The logic of the PRDY signal from LOW, that is, held down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information And stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. In some cases (when the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

[16-8-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to set the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 62 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Read (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the payout control program stops outputting (stopping) the drive signal to the payout motor 744. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the real ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. This count will be described in detail later, but the count input from the count switch 751 shown in FIG. 14 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control section power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal. The real ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), a value 0 is set to the real ball count PB (Step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, the payout control program sets an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 744. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the payout control program adds 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and this routine is terminated. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, If the ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 was transmitted. to decide. Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. Thereby, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, a retry operation of paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, the possibility of unpaid game balls to the player can be extremely reduced, and a player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[16-8-2. Spherical motion setting process]
Next, the spherical cornering operation setting process will be described. This ball-spinning operation setting process is a process for performing a setting for canceling the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted.

  When the ball staking operation setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to pass the ball scouring determination time as shown in FIG. 63 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is made on the basis of the ball detection time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S750 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Subsequent to step S752, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to perform the ball collapsing operation (step S756), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value of 0 to the in-ball flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-bending operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-spinning state has occurred due to the payout rotating body. When no operation is being performed (end of the ball collapsing operation), the value is set to 0, respectively.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, The logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . As described above, “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that the logic LOW is maintained when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of HI is HI (the EXS signal is held high), the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value “0” to the ball-balling flag PBE-FLG as the ball-balling operation ends (step S766), and the routine is terminated.

[16-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a retry operation for paying out a game ball that should be paid out is performed normally.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute the rotation angle of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 64 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). The inconsistency counter INCC includes the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751, The number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotor coincides with the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. The value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 62, so that the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the actual counting switch Whether or not paying out game balls that do not match with the number of balls detected in 751 is repeatedly performed is determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778). .

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, the mismatch threshold value The value 5 is set as INCTH.

  In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 53, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM when power is restored. Information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC just before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information Can be done. As a result, in the determination in step S780, the game ball payout operation (retry operation) performed by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, a prize ball It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in a normal state, and it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even during power recovery. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays “Retry error”. In order to notify that “there is a payout control built-in RAM, retry error information for displaying the number“ 5 ”is set on the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that “the prize ball is in stock”, the payout control program sets the information in the prize ball stock to display the number “9” on the error LED indicator 860b and incorporates the above-described payout control. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the external factor occurs. When the operation switch 860a is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 13 as a RAM clear signal. The main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above under the control of the main control MPU 4100a, and displays the RAM clear notification command in the peripheral control board shown in FIG. 4140. Thereby, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  Note that the payout control program shows the retry error information (or information in the prize ball stock) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 in the command transmission process in step S566, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the process is performed. In the process, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the process is stored. Based on the error LED indicator 860b, To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 860b. In the main control board 4100 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 4140 emits a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red), and outputs a lighting signal on the door frame side. Are output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display the number "" on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. Thereby, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk of the hall, etc., confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified, it can be performed very quickly.

  In addition, it has been described above that it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Since the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a hall clerk or the like rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to an extremely low level.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, that the operation switch 860a is operated to cancel the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 860a or the like is illegally modified and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. Absent.

[16-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 This is a process for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 65 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794). Exit. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 751 and the number of game balls received and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls, and the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body is usually equal to the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. As a result, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 62 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, so that the ball of the game ball that is received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body by this retry operation The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to the discrepancy between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 are repeatedly paid. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit in due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the game board 4 and a frame body such as the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is mounted, and the game board 4 is exchanged (new stand replacement). Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740, the power supply board 851 for generating the driving power for the prize ball device 740 and the control power for the payout control board 4110 are common. Equipped on the frame side as a function. In the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed. The payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 53 stores an inconsistency counter INCC immediately before shutting off when the power is turned off. In the process of step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process shown in 52 (setting of the RAM work area when power is restored), the process is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

  Then, when the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is switched to a game board 4 'having a different game specification different from the game board 4 and turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the substrate 4110 starts processing again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 ′ attached thereto, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 before replacement is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 ′ mounted, the probability of 1 / million million happens, and the number of game balls that do not match is generated and the inconsistency counter INCC When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 'and is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 4120a in a short period. There is a risk. That is, in a short period of time after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′, a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. In spite of this, there is a possibility that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation.

  As described above, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 4 ′ is new and easily breaks down. May be given to players. The probability of a millionth of a game ball being paid out due to a retry operation is one millionth of the time when a pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and operated continuously for one week during the hall's business hours. Since the probability that one game ball that does not match due to the retry operation is paid out is the same, the probability of 1 / million from the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Thus, the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 The value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, when 5 weeks have elapsed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program performs the operation of step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 64 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751, and a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, and the like occur. 64 is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110 in order to notify that it is a “retry error” in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Retryer to display number “5” on error LED indicator 860b Set the information so that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the inconsistency counter INCC to 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, the inconsistency counter INCC that is generated with the probability of 1 / million million is increased. Invalidated. As a result, there is an error in the retry operation even though the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like have not occurred. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Note that the game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted by deliberately disabling the counting switch 751 is difficult to detect. In the case where the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short time even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, In this way, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that the store clerk or the like of the hall changes the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 I will rush to confirm. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. On the other hand, when the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not become the mismatch threshold INCTH or more, the mismatch counter INCC is set every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent action is that the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH and the count switch 751 is intentionally set as described above. Even if the player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[16-11. Error release operation determination process]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 14 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to release the error of the operation switch 860a as shown in FIG. 66 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not it has been operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that the error cancellation is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. When the operation switch 860a is determined not to be operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the error cancellation is instructed, and the operation switch 860a is operated. It is determined that

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs error flag state confirmation processing. This is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the prize ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Since the payout control program is set, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this status information setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the status information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control section power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. Based on the information, a status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits the main control program to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. On the control board 4140, the effect control program performs a retry operation error notification process for reporting that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” 2 times) By repeatedly flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is supposed to be. The store clerk or the like who heard the retry operation error notification announces the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 14, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the poor contact of various connectors, and the like. Compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, it can be confirmed very quickly. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red).

  Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs release setting processing (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the error flag state indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopped or the ball can be lent out by the error LED indicator 860b which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 4110. In this case, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the state where the PRDY signal is raised, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball is connected from the output terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. Or output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed. The retry error information stored in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the number “5” for informing that the “retry error” is present. This is forcibly overwritten on the information on which the graphic “-” for informing the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Output to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. .

  As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 64 and the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, this internal factor In response to the occurrence of the error, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process. On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, this causes an external factor. When this occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM when the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 860a clears the RAM to release the error. Similar to the case where the switch 860a is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

[16-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 53 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount is performed twice) is used as the number of rented balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Confirms the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms that is the interrupt timer period.

[16-12-1. Signal processing during payout by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out a rental ball. When the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to transmit the signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control unit MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player pushes the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, the ball rental switch 365b is switched on (turned on). The operation signal is input as a TDS shown in FIG. 15 from the frequency display board 365 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input has a payout control program that starts from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms. A predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the gaming device lending device connection terminal plate 869 until the time elapses. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as a monetary amount) is monitored whether or not a BRQ which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out the money rises.

  The CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, and the signal is Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, from the timing H2 to the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms), the payout control MPU 4120a holds the logic of the EXS signal HI, that is, keeps the raised state, in order to notify that one payout operation has started. Is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port and output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input has a lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) from the timing H3. The BRQ that has been started up and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 67 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Then, only the predetermined number of rented balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while keeping its logic at LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining number of game balls for 100 yen out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as a monetary amount to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as shown in FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. 869 is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a), and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 67 (c). The EXS signal that has been raised and held is set to the logic level LOW, that is, held in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum setting is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer update process in step S552 in the power-on process (payout control part main process).

  The payout control MPU 4120a does not communicate with the CR unit 6 when a ball breakage, ball rounding, counting switch error, retry error, full tank, etc. occurs (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6). 67), the PRDY signal that is raised and held from the timing H1 is set to the logic level LOW, that is, in the lowered state, as shown in FIG. 67 (d). It is held and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined | prescribed output port of control MPU4120a, and outputs to CR unit 6 via the lending apparatus connection terminal board 869, such as game balls, as EXS. “Keep the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. The logical HI is maintained when the EXS signal is held up.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a sets the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money as 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls having the number of lent out balls of 50 are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A hall clerk or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used for the upper plate 301 or When set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a monetary amount, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as a monetary number When set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and sets the number of game balls of 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of rented balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[16-12-2. Checking input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 is configured such that the CR unit 6 performs BRQ via the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball even when the lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed. When the signal is not started up or when the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC elapses, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869, even when the signal has not fallen or when the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. A ball or other lending device connection terminal board 869 is used to output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not started up, or as described above. Even after the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 4110 from the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball, and the signal is lowered. If not, the above-described PRDY and EXS are used to check whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67 (e) and 67 (f), the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and starts a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment) from this timing J0. , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 Then, PRDY is output to the CR unit 6 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a Is output to the CR unit 6 through the rental device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball. To force (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J1 after the elapse of a predetermined period JB (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J1 as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC from the timing J2 (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3). ).

  Subsequently, after the elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J3 as HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J4 after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4 as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 after the elapse of a predetermined period JF from the timing J5 (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6). ).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[17. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receive various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 70 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, and FIG. 73 shows the transition to the power saving mode during power recovery. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the determination process, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the power consumption monitoring process, and FIG. 75 shows the relationship between the value set as the master volume value for power suppression and the power consumption suppression stage. The figure (a) to show, the relationship between the brightness | luminance set as a brightness | luminance for electric power suppression, and an electric power consumption suppression stage is shown A (b).

  As shown in FIG. 16, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, power recovery The power saving mode transition determination processing, power consumption monitoring processing, LOCKN signal history creation processing, connection failure determination processing, and connection recovery processing will be described. The power saving power saving mode transition determination process is the process of step S1004 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described later, and the power consumption monitoring process is in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later. This is the process of step S1027. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by power consumption suppression signal interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception. Interrupt processing and peripheral control section V blank interrupt processing are set in this order.

[17-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[17-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 16 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, when the interrupt permission is set. Various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 17, effect backup information (1fr) that is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms)) ( ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the effect backup information which is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and the Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db also for the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d shown in FIG. (SRAM) is compared, and production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Subsequent to such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, after performing this initialization setting process, outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 17 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 16, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, a luminance setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In this liquid crystal display device luminance setting process, the same correction as the above-described luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, a power saving power saving mode transition determination process is performed (step S1004). The power saving mode transition determination process during power recovery will be described in detail later. Based on the power consumption status history information stored in the power consumption status history RAM 4150f shown in FIG. Immediately before disconnection), the power situation consumed by the pachinko machine 1 is ascertained at the time of power recovery, and it is determined whether or not to enter the power saving mode at the time of power recovery that suppresses the power consumed by the pachinko machine 1. When shifting to the power saving mode, the door frame 5 is provided with a setting for reducing the volume of the production sound flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Settings for reducing the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 and the LEDs for light emitting decoration are made.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 17 designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data storage area 4150caa in the lamp driving board side. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Various information obtained by rotating 405 (rotation direction) and pressing operation of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 (for example, the rotation pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 17 in which the rotation (rotation direction) history information and the pressing operation history information of the rotation pressing operation unit 405, etc. are set. The rotation direction of 405 and the presence / absence of the pressing operation of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 are monitored, and the rotation pressing Appropriately determine the state of the pressing operation of the rotation direction and the rotation pressing unit 405 of the work part 405 whether or not reflected in the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs projector monitoring processing (step S1015). In this projector monitoring process, in the projector information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external control RAM 4150c externally attached in the non-backup unmanaged work area 4150cf shown in FIG. 38, information indicating whether or not an operating signal is input from the air cooling device FAN0 included in the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 shown in FIG. 38, which is set in the air cooling device monitoring information acquisition storage area. On the basis of the information indicating whether or not the operating signal from the air cooling device FAN1 provided in the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is input, at least one of these operating signals is not input. Projectors 1850 and 1851 It is assumed that the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 provided respectively are not operated, or extend to the projector driving board 1800, the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140. Of the path and the path extending to the projector driving board 1801, the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, the projector driving board 1800 and the frame decoration are included. Wiring for electrically connecting the drive amplifier board 194, wiring for electrically connecting the projector driving board 1801 and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and electrical connection between the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 Wiring connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 Of the wiring that is electrically connected and the wiring that electrically connects the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140, it is assumed that one wiring or a plurality of wirings are disconnected, and the projectors 1850 and 1851 are respectively connected. A maintenance information output signal is sent to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1015, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation processing described later is sent from the channels CH1 to CH3 shown in FIG. It outputs to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821, respectively. Thereby, the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the entire upper plate upper panel 314 projected from the upper plate side display device 1820, and the inner wall of the right side decoration unit 200 projected from the door frame side display device 1821. Various screens are drawn on the entire screen 201.

  In the display data output process, a detection signal from the distance measurement sensor 1822 set in the distance measurement sensor information acquisition storage area 4150cam shown in FIG. 17 in the distance measurement sensor information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process described later. The distance dimension between the distance measuring sensor 1822 and the player's finger or hand is extracted from the history information of the player, and the player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. Or by measuring the moving speed of the player's finger or hand within the upper area of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300. When the movement state of the player's finger or hand in the area is acquired, the player's finger is placed in the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 When it is determined that the hand is in a state of being inserted, in order to prevent the effect image projected from the upper plate side display device 1820 from being reflected on the player's finger or hand, a sound source is incorporated in the display data creation process described later. Of the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 4160a, the drawing data output to the upper plate display device 1820 is sent from the sound source VDP 4160a to the upper plate display device 1820 from the channel CH2. Processing to control not to output is performed. At this time, when it is determined that the player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the effect image projected from the door frame side display device 1821 When it is determined that the player's finger or hand is located at a position that is not reflected on the player's finger or hand, one screen (1) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a by the display data creation process described later Among the drawing data for the frame), the drawing data output to the door frame side display device 1821 is controlled to be output from the channel CH3 to the door frame side display device 1821 by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When it is determined that the player's finger or hand is positioned at a position where the effect image projected from the side display device 1821 is reflected on the player's finger or hand, display data to be described later Of the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a by the composition process, the drawing data output to the door frame side display device 1821 is displayed by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a from the channel CH3. A process of controlling not to output to the side display device 1821 is performed.

  In the display data output process, if drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a is performed, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a sends the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channels CH1 to CH3 to the game board side. The output to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper dish side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 is canceled. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but a so-called frame drop occurs, but the various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 9 by the ramp data output process in step S1012. A speaker housed in a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 by an effect by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5, and a sound data output process described later, and It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with effects produced by music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sound and notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, in addition to the stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the notification sound and the notification sound Is also played in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update processing, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even when other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for the main prize ball information output signal set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is 10 balls. The number of output waveform data from the first output waveform data to be output among the output waveform data for generating a main prize ball information output signal that informs the hall computer as main prize ball information that the current value has been reached. The pointer is updated to indicate. The output waveform data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for the main prize ball information output signal is the number of main prize balls in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated by information output process. In the main prize ball number information output process that is repeatedly executed every time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the main prize ball information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784 in accordance with the output waveform data indicated by the pointer, and is specified in time series. The pointer is updated to the next output waveform data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. That is, since the output waveform data indicated by the pointer updated in the main prize ball number information output process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is temporarily changed in the main prize ball number information output process. Even if other output waveform data is instructed from the output waveform data that should be instructed for some reason, it is forcibly updated to instruct the output waveform data that should be instructed in the scheduler update processing. It has become.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands received from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The effect control program is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of a starting opening prize effect, a normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of normal symbols held (0 to 4), and a start of a symbol synchronization effect. Symbol tuning production start command for instructing, symbol storage command output when the number of start pending changes, a winning prize 1 count display command that is output each time a game ball is received at the winning prize opening 2103 (large winning mouth count Command) to recognize which gaming state it is currently in. As shown in FIG. 40, the various commands are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display, and status display shown in FIG. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified into others. The effect control program sets screen schedule data, emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive in order to set various schedule data for progressing the presentation based on the analyzed various commands. The source schedule data and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in 4150cae. The effect control program may determine the contents of the effect based on the random value extracted by random lottery for various effects and set various schedule data in the received command analysis process.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 41, the effect control program executes various abnormality notifications. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., set in the abnormal display mode of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit 4150 The data is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the effect control program performs main prize ball number information output determination processing (step S1025). In this main prize ball number information output determination process, when the effect control program is the main prize ball number information output command classified in the other shown in FIG. 41, the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 Based on the value of the peripheral control side main award ball number information output determination counter, the main award that informs the hall computer as main award ball information that the number of game balls to be paid out as 10 award balls has reached 10 It is determined whether or not to output a sphere information output signal to the external terminal board 784. This peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter is used as a prize ball based on the other main prize ball number information output command shown in FIG. 41 analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022. The number of game balls to be paid out is counted and is updated in a prize ball schedule information storage area (not shown) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Since the main prize ball number information output command classified into others shown in FIG. 41 is to notify that the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 as described above. When this main prize ball number information output command is received, the value 10 is added to the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter, and the value is stored and updated in a prize ball schedule information storage area (not shown) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It has become so.

  In the main prize ball number information output determination process, the effect control program is for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 is classified into the power-on shown in FIG. When it is a counter notification command, the main control board 4100 is provided on the game board 4 based on the content designated by the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. The main prize ball which counted the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in various prize openings such as the lower start opening 2102, the general prize opening 2104, 2201 and the big prize opening 2103 The value of the number information output determination counter is set as the initial value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter, while step S10. When the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of No. 2 is the main prize ball number information output command classified in the other shown in FIG. Since the number of balls has reached ten, the value 10 is added to the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information management counter.

  Also, in the main prize ball number information output determination process, the effect control program determines the power prize main prize ball number information output determination in which the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 is classified into the power on shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 4100 is provided on the game board 4 based on the contents instructed by the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. Main prize which counted the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as 2101, lower start opening 2102, general prize opening 2104, 2201 and big prize opening 2103 When setting the value of the counter for determining the number of balls information output as the initial value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls on the peripheral control side, In order to start operating the hall based on the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of S1002 and set in the time information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When it is determined that the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (or the power to the pachinko island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed), the peripheral control side main prize ball number information management By forcibly resetting the counter value and setting it to the default value, the initial value is returned to the value 0 (zero), and stored and updated in the award ball schedule information storage area (not shown) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (for example, in step S1022). The command analyzed in the received command analysis process is classified into the power-on shown in FIG. Main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. When the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command indicates that the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is value 9. In the case of the contents, even if this value 9 is set as the initial value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter, it is reset and returned to the default value 0 (zero) as the initial value. As a result, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 is the main prize ball number information output command classified in the other shown in FIG. Each time, the value 10 is added to the value of the peripheral control side main award ball number information output determination counter, that is, on the main control board 4100 side. The new main prize ball number information output determination counter value and the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter value updated on the peripheral control board 4140 side have the same value. ) On the other hand, when it is determined that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on to start the hall operation, but the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power interruption during the hall operation. The value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information management counter is not reset to the initial value by resetting the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information management counter to the default value, and the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information management counter (For example, the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 is the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command classified into power-on shown in FIG. When the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is the content indicating that the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is the value 9 This value 9 is set as the initial value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter, whereby the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 is classified into the other shown in FIG. When it is a main prize ball number information output command, every time this main prize ball number information output command is received, a main prize ball number information output judgment value which is the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output judgment counter The value 10 is added to the value 9 set as the counter value, that is, the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter updated on the main control board 4100 side and the peripheral control board 4140 side. The value of the updated peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter is not the same value).

  In the main prize ball number information output determination process, the effect control program determines the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information management counter based on the added value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information management counter. When the number exceeds 10, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball has reached ten, a main prize ball information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer as main prize ball information. The main prize ball information output signal schedule data to be output to the external terminal board 784 is set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. As a value of the control side main prize ball number information management counter, a prize ball schedule information storage area (not shown) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is shown. It is adapted to store updated.

  Here, in the main award ball number information output determination process, a main award ball information output signal that informs the hall computer as main award ball information that the number of game balls to be paid out as award ball has reached 10 The point of maintaining or resetting the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output to the external terminal board 784 at the time of power recovery will be described. First of all, at the time of power recovery, it is always determined in step S1022 without determining whether the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off or whether the power is restored after a power failure or instantaneous power failure. If the command analyzed in the received command analysis process is the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command shown in FIG. 9 is provided on the game board 4 based on the contents designated by the counter notification command for use, the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the general winning opening 2104, 2201, and the big winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 9. The main prize ball number information output judgment card that counts the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in various prize winning openings such as The issues will be described in the case of directly setting the values of the printer as the initial value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determining counter.

  First, as described above, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 enters the general winning ports 2104 and 2201 shown in FIG. 9 in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A detection signal from the general prize opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 13 for detecting a game ball that has been balled, and a count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 13 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2103 shown in FIG. 9, a detection signal from the upper starter switch 3022 shown in FIG. 13 for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper starter 2101 shown in FIG. 9, and a ball entering the lower starter 2102 shown in FIG. The main control built-in RAM is read as input information for each of the detection signals from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. In the input information storage area, the input information is read from the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and based on this input information, in the prize ball control process of step S108 in the same process, The number of game balls to be paid out is counted, the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter is updated and stored, and the main prize ball number information output is output based on the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter When the value of the determination counter has reached the value 10 (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10), FIG. In addition, a main prize ball number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area. Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits a main prize ball number information output command to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the same process.

  A staff member such as a hall clerk may perform maintenance with the pachinko gaming machine 1 turned on until late at midnight across the day after the hall is closed. Even if the power to the pachinko island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed is cut off, the power (power) stored in the capacitor BC0 as the backup power source provided in the power board 851 shown in FIG. However, power (electric power) is supplied to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time. As a result, the power (power) stored in the capacitor BC0 is completely discharged from the time when the power to the pachinko island facility is turned on until the time when the power to the pachinko island facility is turned on again in order to start operating the hall. If not, the capacitor BC0 causes the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM. Then, when an attendant such as a hall clerk does not operate the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 to initialize the main control built-in RAM for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. In step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that the gaming state of yesterday is restored. Since the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter yesterday is inherited as it is, the number of main prize balls in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. There arises a problem that an information output command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program is a power supply in which the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 is classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 40 in the main prize ball number information output determination process in step S1025. When it is a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at the time of turning on, the main control board 4100 is provided on the game board 4 based on the contents instructed by the counter notification command for outputting the main prize ball number information at the time of power-on Games to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in various prize openings such as the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the general winning opening 2104, 2201, and the big winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. The value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter that counts the number of balls is used as the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output judgment counter. Is set in the time information storage unit 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. This time information is set to a period before the start of business for starting business of the hall (or for starting maintenance of the pachinko machine 1) (in this embodiment, a period from 0:00 am to 9:00 am). And stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.) The power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to start the hall business). The peripheral control side main prize ball number information when it is determined that the power to the pachinko island facility is turned on) By forcibly resetting the value of the physical counter and setting it to the default value, the value is returned to the initial value 0 (zero), and is updated in the award ball schedule information storage area (not shown) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. If the information is within the period before the start of business for starting the business of the hall (or for starting maintenance of the pachinko machine 1) (in this embodiment, during the business period of the hall) Peripheral control side main prize when it is determined that the power supply to pachinko machine 1 is not turned on to start business, and that power is restored due to a power outage or momentary power interruption during hall operation Peripheral control side main prize ball number information without resetting to 0 (zero) as the initial value by forcibly resetting the value of the ball number information management counter and setting it to the default value A system that maintains the value of the management counter is adopted.

  As a result, there is a very low probability of a power outage or momentary power failure between the start and end of the hall, but if a power outage or power outage occurs, the hall business has already started. FIG. 9 shows that the main control board 4100 is provided in the game board 4 based on the contents of the counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination at power-on from the main control board 4100 when the power is restored. Counts the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in various winning openings such as the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening 2102, the general winning opening 2104, 2201, and the big winning opening 2103 When the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set as the initial value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter, The peripheral control-side main for determining whether or not to output to the external terminal board 784 a main prize ball information output signal that informs the hall computer as main prize ball information that the number of game balls has reached 10 Without forcibly resetting the value of the winning ball number information output judgment counter, the value of the main prize ball number information output judging counter immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure Alternatively, at the time of power recovery due to the recovery (recovery) of electric power after the momentary power failure, it is taken over as it is and set as the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter.

  On the other hand, when the hall operation is ended and the hall operation is started again, the fact that the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 is sent to the hall computer as main prize ball information. To forcibly reset the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output the main prize ball information output signal to be transmitted to the external terminal board 784 and set it to the default value. Is returned to the initial value of 0 (zero), and when the hall is closed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (or the pachinko island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed is turned off) The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter at the time of the power recovery to the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to start the hall operation (or the pachinko machine 1 is installed) When the power of the pachinko island facility is restored), even if it is set as the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output judgment counter, it is not taken over as it is, and this peripheral control side main prize ball number information output judgment Because the counter value is forcibly reset and set to the default value, it is reset to the initial value of 0 (zero), so it is updated from the start to the end of the hall operation. Based on the main prize ball number information output command from the main control board 4100 transmitted based on the stored value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter, the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output judgment counter Whether or not to output the main prize ball number information to the external terminal board 784 based on the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter by updating the value And it can now be determined. Thus, based on the value of the peripheral control side main prize ball number information output determination counter, accurate main prize ball information can be output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. As described above, the main prize ball number information is obtained from the light blue output terminal PT10 on the external terminal board 784, from the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the general winning opening 2104, 2201, shown in FIG. As a main prize ball number information output signal that informs the player every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of game balls that have entered the various prize openings such as the big prize opening 2103 Output to hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the number of game balls to be paid out until the hall business is started and ended.

  Subsequent to step S1025, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs power consumption monitoring processing (step S1027). This power consumption monitoring process is a process for adjusting the sound volume and the brightness of various LEDs in order to suppress this power consumption in accordance with the power consumption in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and will be described in detail later. To do.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. The game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 4 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. And various decorations on the door frame 5 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board, and various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, thereby playing the game board side liquid crystal display device 1 screen display area 1900, the entire upper plate upper panel 314 projected from the upper dish side display device 1820, and the entire inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 projected from the door frame side display device 1821. The drawing data for (one frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the hall and the door frame 5 are accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker 130 is reduced, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the volume is high (in this embodiment, The notification sound set to (maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state may be shifted to an advantageous game state. You can also announce that it is expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 17 into the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 17, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 17, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and the Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously, the top address of Bank3 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150dc The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P2 is specified, and the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) start address to the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in a second backup area 4150dc. Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 is approximately 30 fps per second as described above. Since it is set, the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[17-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 16, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be received is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Forcibly canceling the process in the middle and starting execution of the peripheral control unit steady process from the beginning. To prevent this, when the peripheral control unit is turned on in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. 68, the peripheral control unit steady process is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady process flag SP-FLG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[17-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 68 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 16 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame side display device 1821 is approximately 30 fps per second as described above. Since it is set, the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, when the occurrence of the 1st timer interrupt for the 33rd time happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). When the value 1 is added to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MP4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 17 are arranged in time series. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive source such as the motor and the solenoid, the electrical drive source such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the frame I / O port motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. Based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, the drive signal to the drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT for output is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is created in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame decoration drive en Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and via peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 9 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and created. Peripheral control RAM 415 shown in FIG. Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag of c. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, thereby history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from the various detection switches. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, whereby history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, rotary pressing operation) Operation unit information of peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Set in the acquisition storage area 4150cai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, the rotation direction of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 and the presence / absence of the pressing operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a projector information acquisition process is performed (step S1109). In this projector information acquisition process, the operating signal from the air cooling device FAN0 provided in the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820 shown in FIG. 38 and the air cooling provided in the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 shown in FIG. Based on the in-operation signal from the device FAN1, it is monitored whether one or both of these in-operation signals are not input, and is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. It is set in an air cooling device monitoring information acquisition storage area (not shown) in the non-backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Information on whether or not an operating signal is input from the air cooling device FAN0 provided in the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820, which is set in the air cooling device monitoring information acquisition storage area (not shown), and the door frame side display device Based on the information indicating whether or not the operating signal from the air cooling device FAN1 provided in the projector 1851 of 1821 is input, the operating state of the air cooling device FAN0 provided in the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820, and the door frame The operating state of the air cooling device FAN1 provided in the projector 1851 of the side display device 1821 can be respectively acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1109, distance measurement sensor information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this distance sensor information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the distance sensor 1822 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 shown in FIG. It is created and set in the distance measurement sensor information acquisition storage area 4150cam of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. As described above, the distance measuring sensor 1822 is located at the position where the player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. The distance dimension between the player's finger and hand) can be detected. A player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 from the history information of the detection signal from the distance sensor 1822 set in the distance sensor information acquisition storage area 4150cam. Or by measuring the moving speed of the player's finger or hand within the upper area of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300. The operation state of the player's finger or hand in the area can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, a main winning ball number information output process is performed (step S1112). In this main prize ball number information output process, when the schedule data for the main prize ball information output signal set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Output waveform data for generating a main prize ball information output signal that informs the hall computer as main prize ball information that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 balls arranged in a series The main prize ball information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 37 according to the output waveform data indicated by the pointer, and the pointer is updated to the next output waveform data defined in time series. Each time the main prize ball number information output process is executed, the pointer is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1112, power consumption status history information creation processing is performed (step S1113). In this power consumption status history information creation processing, the value (power consumption suppression stage) transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal from the power supply board 851 is sampled and the power consumption of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. Sequentially stored in the status history RAM 4150f. As described above, the power consumption suppression signal is output from the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da. As shown in FIG. 25A, the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da includes a power measurement circuit 855daa and a power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab. + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c is supplied to the + 5V power generation circuit 855db, the + 12V power generation circuit 855dc, and the + 24V power supply generation circuit 855dd via the power measurement circuit 855daa. The power measurement circuit 855daa measures the power consumption of + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c in real time and outputs it to the power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab. The power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab determines a power consumption suppression stage indicating how much power consumption should be suppressed based on the power consumption measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa. By setting the value of the power consumption suppression signal configured as a signal wiring and outputting it to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the power consumption suppression signal is input to the peripheral control unit 4150 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It has come to be. As described above, the power consumption suppression signal is configured as three signal wirings (that is, configured as three parallel signals), and transmits eight values from 0 to 7. Can be done.

  As described above, the power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab determines that it is stage 0 as the power consumption suppression stage when the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 0% or more and less than 10%. When the value of 0 is set as the value of the suppression signal and the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 10% or more and less than 20%, it is determined as stage 1 as the power consumption suppression stage and the power consumption suppression signal The value 1 is set as the value, and when the power consumption of +37 V measured by the power measuring circuit 855daa is 20% or more and less than 30%, it is determined as the stage 2 as the power consumption suppression stage and the value as the value of the power consumption suppression signal 2 and when the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 30% or more and less than 40%, When the power consumption suppression signal is determined to be stage 3 as the suppression stage and the value 3 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal and the power consumption of +37 V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 40% or more and less than 50%, the power consumption suppression stage When the power consumption suppression signal is determined to be step 4 and the value 4 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal and the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 50% or more and less than 60%, the power consumption suppression step is performed in step 5 If a value 5 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal after determination and the power consumption of +37 V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 60% or more and less than 70%, it is determined that the power consumption suppression stage is stage 6. When the value 6 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal, the power consumption of +37 V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 70% or more. It is adapted to set the value 7 as the value of the power consumption suppression signal to determine a phase 7 as a power consumption inhibiting step for.

  Thus, in the power consumption status history information creation process, every time this routine is executed, that is, every 1 ms, the value (value 0 to value 7) transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal from the power supply board 851 is sampled. By sequentially storing in the power consumption status history RAM 4150f of the peripheral control unit 4150 as the power consumption suppression steps (step 0 to step 7), the power consumption suppression steps are arranged as power consumption status history information in time series.

  Subsequent to step S1113, backup processing is performed (step S1114), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 17 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up. The production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1) of the backup first area 4150 cb Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in s) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the second backup area 4150cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 4150 cc of bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies the copy to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 4150cc. Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc from the content stored at the beginning address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 68, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted. Even in the production lot, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[17-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 16 starts the transmission of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, and this causes the main peripheral serial data to be built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 71 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated to generate noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. The environment is susceptible. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. 17 shows the status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, as shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning Remember. When storing the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[17-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 16 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure notification). It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off, and the projection on the whole upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 by the upper plate side display device 1820 is stopped (in the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820). Stop of the optical engine provided), stop projection on the entire inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 by the door frame side display device 1821 (stop of the optical engine provided in the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821), the game board 4 Peripheral control MPU4150a even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by sequentially executing excitation OFF to the motor and solenoid provided, turning off various LEDs, etc. Ensures stable operation for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which operation is possible. .

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 17 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb Then, from the contents stored at the head address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored. Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied successively in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The PU core 4150aa uses the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the data are copied sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc successively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 17 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 16 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 68 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[17-1-6. Power saving mode transition judgment process at power recovery]
Next, when the power is turned off (immediately before the power is turned off), the power state consumed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is grasped at the time of power restoration, and the power saving mode is switched to the power saving mode for suppressing power consumed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 In the case of shifting to the power saving mode at the time of power recovery, the volume of the effect sound flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is reduced. The power saving mode transition determination process at the time of power recovery will be described in which the setting for reducing the luminance of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 5 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is performed. This power saving mode transition determination process at the time of power recovery is performed in the process of step S1004 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the power saving power saving mode transition determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 16 identifies the power consumption suppression stage based on the power consumption status history information as shown in FIG. (Step S1350). As described above, the power consumption status history information is a value (which is transmitted by the power consumption suppression signal from the power supply board 851 in the power consumption status history information generation processing in step S1113 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. By sampling values 0 to 7) and sequentially storing them in the power consumption status history RAM 4150f of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 16 as the power consumption suppression stage (stage 0 to stage 7), the power consumption suppression stage is timed. Arranged in series. The power consumption status history RAM 4150f stores and holds the power consumption status history information of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f when the backup power is supplied from the battery 4150g of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. It is like that.

  In step S1350, among the power consumption status history information in which the values sampled and stored by the peripheral control MPU 4150a are arranged in time series, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (power failure or momentary power failure due to power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1). For example, in addition to power outages due to lightning strikes and momentary power outages due to lightning strikes, power outages supplied to halls, momentary power outages due to instability of power supplied to halls, pachinko machines by hall staffs, etc. Including the power shutdown to 1.) The value sampled and stored immediately before is extracted, and the power consumption suppression stage immediately before the power shutdown is specified. Thereby, the power consumption suppression stage immediately before the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be grasped.

  Following step S1350, it is determined whether the power consumption suppression stage has reached a threshold value (step S1352). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the power consumption suppression stage immediately before the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1 specified in step S1350 has reached a threshold value. In the present embodiment, stage 7 is set as the threshold value.

  When the power consumption suppression stage has not reached the threshold value in step S1352, the power saving mode transition flag ECO-FLG at power recovery is set to 0 (step S1354), and this routine is terminated, while power consumption is performed in step S1352. When the suppression stage has reached the threshold value, the power saving power saving mode transition flag ECO-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1356), and power saving power saving mode timer activation processing is performed (step S1358).

  The power saving mode transition flag ECO-FLG at the time of power recovery indicates that the effect sound flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored. Whether to shift to the power saving mode at the time of power recovery in which the setting for decreasing the volume, the setting for decreasing the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 This value is set to 0 when not entering the power saving mode during power recovery, and set to 1 when entering the power saving mode during power recovery.

  The power-saving power-saving mode timer activated in step S1358 measures the power-saving power-saving mode state maintenance period during which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated as the power-saving power-saving mode. In the embodiment, 5 minutes is set as the power saving mode state maintenance period at the time of power recovery. When the power saving power saving mode timer is started and the time of the power saving power saving mode state maintenance period is started and the power saving power saving mode state maintenance period elapses, the power saving power saving mode timer is stopped and the power saving power mode timer is stopped as shown in FIG. In order to suppress this power consumption according to the power consumption in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the power processing amount monitoring process in step S1027 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 3 is mounted on the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 and the volume of the effect sound flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the LED for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 5, and various decorative boards provided on the game board 4. The brightness of various LEDs is adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1358, a value 1 is added to the power saving mode shift number counter ECO-CT at power recovery (increment, step S1360), and this routine is terminated. The power saving mode transition frequency counter ECO-CT at the time of power recovery counts the number of times of transition to the power saving mode at the time of power recovery and obtains the total (the value of the integration result). In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 This counts the number of activations as the power saving mode. The power saving mode shift number counter ECO-CT at the time of power recovery is stored and held in the shift number holding area 4150fa of the power consumption status history RAM 4150f of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. The power saving mode shift frequency counter ECO-CT is set to a value of 0 (initial value) at the time of shipment by the manufacturer, and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the horch and operated. Then, every time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the power saving power saving mode, the value 1 is incremented and updated, but is not initialized.

[17-1-7. Power consumption monitoring process]
Next, the power consumption monitoring process for adjusting the volume and the brightness of various LEDs in order to suppress the power consumption according to the power consumption in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. This power consumption monitoring process is performed in the process of step S1027 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the power consumption monitoring process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 16 specifies the power consumption suppression stage based on the power consumption suppression signal as shown in FIG. 74 (step S1400). ). As described above, the power consumption suppression signal is output from the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da. As shown in FIG. 25A, the power consumption monitoring circuit 855da includes a power measurement circuit 855daa and a power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab. + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c is supplied to the + 5V power generation circuit 855db, the + 12V power generation circuit 855dc, and the + 24V power supply generation circuit 855dd via the power measurement circuit 855daa. The power measurement circuit 855daa measures the power consumption of + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c in real time and outputs it to the power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab. The power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab determines a power consumption suppression stage indicating how much power consumption should be suppressed based on the power consumption measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa. By setting the value of the power consumption suppression signal configured as a signal wiring and outputting it to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the power consumption suppression signal is input to the peripheral control unit 4150 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It has come to be. As described above, the power consumption suppression signal is configured as three signal wirings (that is, configured as three parallel signals), and transmits eight values from 0 to 7. Can be done.

  As described above, the power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab determines that it is stage 0 as the power consumption suppression stage when the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 0% or more and less than 10%. When the value of 0 is set as the value of the suppression signal and the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 10% or more and less than 20%, it is determined as stage 1 as the power consumption suppression stage and the power consumption suppression signal The value 1 is set as the value, and when the power consumption of +37 V measured by the power measuring circuit 855daa is 20% or more and less than 30%, it is determined as the stage 2 as the power consumption suppression stage and the value as the value of the power consumption suppression signal 2 and when the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 30% or more and less than 40%, When the power consumption suppression signal is determined to be stage 3 as the suppression stage and the value 3 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal and the power consumption of +37 V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 40% or more and less than 50%, the power consumption suppression stage When the power consumption suppression signal is determined to be step 4 and the value 4 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal and the power consumption of + 37V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 50% or more and less than 60%, the power consumption suppression step is performed in step 5 If a value 5 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal after determination and the power consumption of +37 V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 60% or more and less than 70%, it is determined that the power consumption suppression stage is stage 6. When the value 6 is set as the value of the power consumption suppression signal, the power consumption of +37 V measured by the power measurement circuit 855daa is 70% or more. It is adapted to set the value 7 as the value of the power consumption suppression signal to determine a phase 7 as a power consumption inhibiting step for.

  In step S1400, the value of the power consumption suppression signal set by the power consumption suppression level determination circuit 855dab can be acquired, and the power consumption suppression level can be identified from the acquired value.

  Subsequent to step S1400, it is determined whether or not the power saving mode transition flag ECO-FLG at the time of power recovery is a value 1 (step S1402). As described above, the power saving power saving mode transition flag ECO-FLG is set in the power saving power saving mode transition determination process in step S1004 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. At the time of power recovery of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a setting for reducing the volume of the production sound flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the light emission provided in the door frame 5 This is to set whether or not to shift to the power-saving power saving mode for setting the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the decorative LEDs and various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 to be reduced. The value is set to 0 when the mode is not shifted, and is set to 1 when the mode is shifted to the power saving mode at the time of power recovery.

  When the power saving power saving mode transition flag ECO-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S1402, that is, when the power saving power saving mode is not entered, a normal power suppression volume setting process is performed (step S1404). . In this normal power suppression volume setting process, the master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel specified in the sound command data constituting the sound generation schedule data is forcibly changed to the master volume value for power suppression. Change to

  The value set as the master volume value for power suppression will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 75A, the peripheral control MPU 4150a uses the stage 0 to stage 7 as the power consumption suppression stage on the horizontal axis. The ratio to the master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel specified in the command data (hereinafter referred to as “the master volume value specified in the sound command data”) (that is, as the master volume value for power suppression) Assuming that the set value) is the vertical axis, when the power consumption suppression stage is stage 0 or stage 1, that is, when the power consumption suppression stage acquired in step S1400 is stage 0 or stage 1, the master volume for power suppression As a value, 100% of the volume (in other words, power suppression) When the power consumption suppression stage is stage 2 or stage 3, that is, the power consumption suppression stage acquired in step S1400 is stage 2 or When it is stage 3, the volume of 90% is set as the master volume value for the sound command data as the master volume value for power suppression, and when the power consumption suppression stage is stage 4, that is, the power acquired in step S1400 When the consumption suppression stage is stage 4, a volume of 80% is set as the master volume value for power control as the master volume value for power suppression, and when the power consumption suppression stage is stage 5, that is, step S1400. When the power consumption suppression step acquired in step 5 is step 5, When the volume level is set to 70% with respect to the master volume value defined in the sound command data as the volume value and the power consumption suppression stage is stage 6, that is, when the power consumption suppression stage acquired in step S1400 is stage 6. As a master volume value for power suppression, a volume of 60% is set with respect to the master volume value defined in the sound command data, and when the power consumption suppression stage is stage 7, that is, the power consumption suppression stage acquired in step S1400 is staged. When it is 7, the volume of 50% is set as the master volume value for power suppression with respect to the master volume value defined by the sound command data.

  The plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source VDP 4160a. The sub volume value for adjusting the volume is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually obtained from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Amplification is performed up to a master volume value for power suppression, which is a flowing volume, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. In other words, when the normal power suppression volume setting process is performed, the content of the effect by the effect sound does not change, but the sound volume of the effect sound is the master volume defined by the sound command data in the power consumption suppression steps from stage 0 to stage 1. While the value itself becomes the volume, the volume set as the master volume value for power suppression becomes substantially smaller as the power consumption suppression stage proceeds from stage 2 to stage 7, so the volume of the production sound Has become smaller.

  Returning to FIG. 74, following step S1404, normal power suppression luminance setting processing is performed (step S1406), and this routine is terminated. In this normal power suppression luminance setting process, the luminance of various LEDs in the light emission mode of the various LEDs defined in the light emission data constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data is forcibly changed and set from the power suppression luminance.

  The brightness set as the power-suppressing brightness will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 75B, the peripheral control MPU 4150a uses the steps 0 to 7 as the power consumption suppression steps on the horizontal axis to generate the light emission data. When the vertical axis represents the ratio (that is, the luminance set as the luminance for power suppression) to the luminance of various LEDs (hereinafter referred to as “luminance specified for light emission data”) in the light emission mode of the various LEDs specified, When the power consumption suppression stage is one of stage 0, stage 1, stage 2, stage 3, and stage 4, that is, the power consumption suppression stage acquired in step S1400 is stage 0, stage 1, stage 2, Of the stage 3 and stage 4, when it is one stage, the brightness for power suppression is 100% of the brightness specified in the emission data (in other words, the brightness for power suppression). When the power consumption suppression stage is stage 5, that is, when the power consumption suppression stage acquired in step S1400 is stage 5, the brightness of the emission data regulations is set as the brightness for power suppression. On the other hand, when the luminance of 70% is set and the power consumption suppression stage is stage 6, that is, when the power consumption suppression stage acquired in step S1400 is stage 6, the luminance for power suppression is set to the luminance specified in the emission data. When the power consumption suppression stage is stage 7, that is, when the power consumption suppression stage acquired in step S1400 is stage 7, the brightness of the emission data is defined as the brightness for power suppression. Set the brightness to 50%.

  When the brightness setting processing for power suppression at normal time is performed, although the contents of effects by the light emission modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 and the LEDs for the light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 5 are not changed, The brightness of the LED is set as the brightness for power suppression as the power consumption suppression stage proceeds from stage 5 to stage 7 while the power consumption suppression stage reaches the brightness specified in the light emission data from stage 0 to stage 4. Since the brightness is reduced, the brightness of various LEDs is reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power saving power saving mode transition flag ECO-FLG is 1 (not 0) in step S1402, that is, when shifting to the power saving power saving mode, the power saving power saving mode timer has reached the upper limit time. It is determined whether or not (step S1408). As described above, the power-saving power-saving mode timer measures the power-saving power-saving mode state maintenance period during which the pachinko machine 1 is maintained in the power-saving power-saving mode. Then, 5 minutes is set as the power-saving power saving mode state maintenance period. The upper limit time used for the determination is 5 minutes of the power saving mode state maintenance period at the time of power recovery.

  In step S1408, when the power saving power saving mode timer has not reached the upper limit time, that is, when the power saving power saving mode timer has not reached 5 minutes of the power saving power saving mode state maintaining period, Setting processing is performed (step S1410). In this power reduction volume setting process for power recovery, similarly to the normal power suppression volume setting process in step S1404 described above, the volume of the output channel specified in the sound command data constituting the sound generation schedule data is set. Although it is forcibly changed from the master volume value for adjustment to the master volume value for power suppression, the volume level is always set to 50% of the master volume value specified in the sound command data as the master volume value for power suppression. It is different in point to do. In other words, in the power suppression volume setting process for power recovery, the master volume value for power suppression set when the power consumption suppression stage is stage 7 in the normal power suppression volume setting process is always set. ing.

  When the power reduction volume setting process at power recovery is performed, the content of the effect by the effect sound is not changed, but the sound volume of the effect sound is set to the lowest power consumption suppression stage of Step 7. (In other words, the volume of the effect sound is set such that the power consumption suppression stage is stage 7 and the power consumption is minimized).

  Subsequent to step S1410, a power setting luminance setting process for power reduction is performed (step S1412), and this routine is terminated. In the power setting luminance setting process for power recovery, in the light emission mode of various LEDs defined in the light emission data constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data, similarly to the normal power suppression luminance setting process in step S1406 described above. Although it is forcibly changed from the brightness of various LEDs to the brightness for power suppression, the difference is that the brightness of 50% is always set as the brightness for power suppression with respect to the brightness specified for the light emission data. That is, in the power setting luminance setting process for power recovery, the luminance for power suppression set when the power consumption suppression stage is stage 7 in the power setting luminance setting process for normal power is always set. .

  When the brightness setting process for power suppression at the time of power recovery is performed, although the effect contents according to the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards included in the LED and the decorative board provided in the door frame 5 are not changed, The brightness of various LEDs is set to the lowest power consumption suppression level of 7 (in other words, the brightness of each LED has the lowest power consumption of the power consumption suppression stage of 7). Stuff is set).

  On the other hand, when the power saving power saving mode timer reaches the upper limit time in step S1408, that is, when the power saving power saving mode timer reaches 5 minutes of the power saving power saving mode state maintenance period, the power saving power saving motor In order to end the transition, the power saving power saving mode transition flag ECO-FLG is set to 0 (step S1414), the power saving power saving mode timer is stopped (step S1416), and this routine is terminated. In the power saving power saving mode timer stop process, only the process of stopping the power saving power saving mode timer is performed, and the process of initializing (resetting) the power saving power saving mode timer is not included. This is because even if the power saving mode shift flag ECO-FLG during power recovery changes from the value 0 to the value 1 due to some cause (for example, due to the influence of noise), the process proceeds to step S1408 as determined in step S1402. In the power-saving power-saving mode timer stop process, the power-saving power-saving mode timer is stopped for 5 minutes of the power-saving power-saving mode state maintenance period, which is the upper-limit time. By maintaining the state that has reached the power saving power saving mode state maintenance period of 5 minutes, the process proceeds to step S1414 in the determination of step S1408, and the power saving power saving mode transition flag is set in step S1414. This is because the value of ECO-FLG can be forcibly returned to the normal value 0. In the initial setting process of step S1000 in the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 68, the power saving power saving mode timer is initialized (reset).

  Thus, in the power saving power saving mode transition determination process in step S1004 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. Setting for reducing the volume of the production sound flowing from the speaker housed in the provided speaker box 820 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the LED for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 5, and various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 When it is determined whether or not to shift to the power saving power saving mode for performing settings such as reducing the brightness of the various LEDs mounted, and this determination result is not to shift to the power saving power saving mode, In step S1400, the value of the power consumption suppression signal set by the power consumption suppression stage determination circuit 855dab is acquired, and the power consumption is calculated from the acquired value. Since the control stage can be specified, according to the power consumption in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the power consumption suppression stage is specified from among the stage 0 to the stage 7, The master volume value for power suppression forcibly changed and set in the above-described normal power suppression volume setting process in step S1404 corresponding to the stage, and the normal power suppression brightness setting in step S1406 corresponding to each stage. The progress of the production can be controlled by the power consumption luminance that is forcibly changed and set by the process, and with less power consumption. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a power failure from occurring due to the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to a power failure caused by the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself.

  On the other hand, in the power saving power saving mode transition determination process in step S1004 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 68, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the main body frame 3 when the power is restored. It is mounted on the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 and the setting for reducing the volume of the effect sound flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the light emitting decoration LED provided on the door frame 5, and various decorative boards provided on the game board 4. If it is determined whether or not to shift to the power saving power saving mode for setting the brightness of various LEDs to be reduced, and the determination result is to shift to the power saving power saving mode, the above-described steps are performed. Master volume value for power suppression forcibly changed and set in the power setting volume setting process for power reduction at S1410 (that is, volume setting process for normal power suppression) Power suppression master volume value set when the power consumption suppression stage is stage 7) and the power suppression brightness forcibly changed and set in the power recovery brightness suppression brightness setting process in step S1412 described above. (That is, the brightness for power suppression set when the power consumption suppression stage is stage 7 in the normal power suppression brightness setting process) The timer can be controlled until it reaches 5 minutes of the power saving power saving mode state maintenance period, which is the upper limit time. This does not cause a power outage or a momentary power failure due to power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 but a power failure, for example, when a power failure due to a lightning strike or a momentary power failure due to a lightning strike causes the pachinko gaming machine 1 to power off. In addition, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off due to a power outage of the power supplied to the hall or instability of the power supplied to the hall, and the staff of the hall or the like takes the pachinko gaming machine 1 Even when the power is shut off and the power is cut off, the power situation consumed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of power off (immediately before the power off) can be grasped at the time of power restoration. In step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be started in a state in which the performance can proceed with the smallest power consumption of step 7. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a power outage from occurring due to the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself even during power recovery. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to a power failure caused by the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when the normal power suppression volume setting process in step S1404 described above is performed, the content of the effect by the effect sound does not change, but the effect sound volume is changed from the power consumption suppression stage from stage 0 The volume of the master volume value stipulated by the sound command data is up to 1 while the volume set as the master volume value for power suppression is substantially reduced as the power consumption suppression stage proceeds from stage 2 to stage 7. Therefore, when the volume of the effect sound is reduced and the normal power suppression brightness setting process in step S1406 is performed, the LED for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 5 and various decorations provided in the game board 4 are provided. Although the content of the effect by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on the board does not change, the brightness of each LED is the power consumption suppression stage. While the luminance of the emission data is defined from step 0 to step 4, the luminance set as the power suppression luminance decreases as the power consumption suppression step proceeds from step 5 to step 7. The brightness of various LEDs is reduced. In this embodiment, when the power consumption suppression stage proceeds to stage 2, the volume of the effect sound is controlled to be smaller than the brightness of various LEDs first. This is because multiple types of pachinko machines are installed in the hall and each produces various production sounds at a high volume, so even if the production sound volume is reduced, the player is not aware of the production sound. The player's willingness to play is not reduced due to the decrease in the volume of the game, and the power consumed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed by reducing the volume of the effect sound.

[18. Examples of production using various display devices]
Next, an effect by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 9, an effect by the upper plate side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 shown in FIG. 7, and the left shown in FIG. The effects by the door frame side display device 1821 provided in the side decoration unit 240 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79, and then the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820 and the door frame side display device 1821. An adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1851 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of effects such as variable display displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device, and FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of an effect produced by the upper dish side display device provided in the upper decorative unit, and FIG. 79 is an effect produced by the door frame side display device provided in the left side decorative unit. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example, and FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of an adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector provided in each of the upper dish side display device and the door frame side display device. As described above, the inner side wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed so as to protrude forward along the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is a smooth surface that curves in an arc shape along the gaming window 101. However, in order to make the drawing easy to see, FIGS. 79 and 80 (c), (d) are shown as planes. First, an effect by the game board side liquid crystal display device will be described, and then an effect by the upper plate side display device, an effect by the door frame side display device, and an optical axis adjustment of the projector will be described.

[18-1. Production by game board side liquid crystal display device]
The effect by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is that the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 16 performs the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. By executing, it is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and proceeds. Thereby, various effects are advanced in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Here, effects such as variable display displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described.

  FIG. 9 shows the main control side main process of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 44 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 13, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper start opening 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the lower start opening 2102 shown in FIG. Then, the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing operation of the grand prize opening 2103 shown in FIG. 9 is 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds, and in each round within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), When a game ball enters the big prize opening 2103 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine), the round is digested. There every 1 sphere entering sphere, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) so that the game balls are paid out for.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the upper start port 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the lower start port 2102 is shown in FIG. 76 (a), the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 16 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 based on the effect commands related to the game effects, which are various commands shown in FIG. As described above, the display of the decorative pattern 1950a is started on the left side of the display area of the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative pattern 1950b is started in the center, and the decorative pattern 1950c is started on the right side. The fluctuation display of ˜1950c is stopped, and the player can recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. At this time, the first special lottery result or the first special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 shown in FIG. Two special lottery results can be confirmed. When the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are variably displayed, the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized. Is displayed variably from the upper center of the display area toward the lower center, and the decorative pattern 1950c is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. Yes.

  Specifically, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 71, the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives various commands from the main control board 4100. Then, in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. 68, the effect control program analyzes various commands received in the peripheral control part command reception interrupt process of FIG. I do. For example, if the analyzed command is a special figure 1 synchronized production start command classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronous production shown in FIG. 40, the production control program is designated as a mode indicating a variation of the production constituting the command. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, which are set in the variable display mode of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950b shown in FIG. The electrical drive source schedule data and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in 4150cae.

  For example, the screen generation schedule data set in the variable display mode of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950b is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the schedule of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. When set to 4150cae in the data storage area, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process in FIG. 68, and the display data creation process in step S1030 in the process The screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RA. Extracted from various control data copy area 4150ce of 4150c to output to the tone generator built VDP4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, thereby playing the game board side liquid crystal display device Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on 1900 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program corresponds to one screen (one frame) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process described above. ) Is output from the channel CH1 shown in FIG. 18 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Thereby, the variable display screens of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950b are displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as the game effect shown in FIG. 76 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), after the predetermined time has elapsed since the change display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started, if the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol, It will be a “big hit”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (b). If the same decorative design is not stopped and displayed, it will be “out of”.

  In addition, when the state where the game ball does not enter the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 continues and the state where the retained ball is digested and becomes zero is continued for a predetermined time (for example, in this embodiment, 60 76 seconds), the demonstration effect in the waiting state shown in FIG. 76 (c) is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. At this time, sound effects and music are set to mute. When the demonstration effect is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times in the present embodiment), the display proceeds to the power saving mode, and the game board side liquid crystal is displayed. A state in which nothing is displayed in the display area of the display device 1900 (that is, a state in which a black screen is formed) is achieved. At this time, various lamps provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 2 and various lamps provided on the game board 4 are also turned off.

[18-2. Production by the display device on the upper plate side]
The effect by the upper dish side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 is that the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. By executing the part steady process or the like, the whole upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 is displayed and advanced. Thereby, depending on the first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the upper start port 2101, the second special lottery result lottered by accepting game balls to the lower start port 2102, or the game state Various effects by the upper display device 1820 are advanced. Here, as an example of the production by the upper dish side display device 1820, in order to suggest the player the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the front upper / lower left / right direction of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is shown. An effect of urging the player to perform a pressing operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 disposed substantially in the center will be described.

[18-2-1. Production on the upper plate of the upper plate]
As described above, the upper dish side display device 1820 displays the image emitted from the projector 1850 shown in FIG. 8A on the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 arranged below the upper decoration unit 280. By projecting toward the front, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the gaming state can be clearly displayed on the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). It is like that.

  The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 receives an effect command related to the game effect, which is the various commands shown in FIG. 40, from the main control board 4100, and performs the pressing operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 using the upper plate upper panel 314. When the execution time of the effect for prompting is reached, by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140, first, as shown in FIG. The entire screen (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405) is projected with an image (motion image) in which a dark cloud rushes and lightning is released in all directions. Note that the “motion image” is an image in which the image is continuously changed over time, whereas the “still image” is an image in which the image is not changed over time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), “the image of the ladybird that is stationary (that is, the image of the ladybird (still image) as an image that matches the contour of the rotational pressure operation unit 405) on the upper surface of the rotational pressure operation unit 405. ) "Is projected and displayed, and the upper surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 excluding the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 is centered on the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405. Produce an image by projecting a “flash-released image (motion image)”. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), an image to be projected and displayed on the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 is displayed as “a mode of rotating when the ladybird image goes around the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 in the clockwise direction. And the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 excluding the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 with the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 as the center. The effect is advanced by projecting an “image in which the flashes are emitted by changing their colors one after another”. Further, in the process of producing the effect of projecting these images, the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 between the rotary pressing operation unit 405 and the lower side (front side) of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. A message “Press the rotating button!” Is displayed on the surface to notify the player that the rotary pressing operation unit 405 is pressed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect of prompting the pressing operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 using the upper plate upper panel 314 is “when the ladybird rotates around the upper surface of the rotating pressing operation unit 405 in the clockwise direction. When the effect of actually rotating the rotary press operation unit 405 is performed in accordance with the projection of the “mode image”, and “the image of the mode that rotates when the ladybird goes around the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 in the clockwise direction”. There is provided a case where an effect is produced in which the rotation press operation unit 405 does not actually rotate at all by being projected and displayed. In other words, whether or not the rotary pressing operation unit 405 is actually rotating is displayed by projecting and displaying “an image of a mode in which the ladybird rotates around the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405”. Regardless, the player can be informed that the rotation pressing operation unit 405 is rotating clockwise together with the ladybird image. In other words, the “image of a mode in which the ladybird rotates around the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 in a clockwise direction” is projected and displayed, so that the rotation pressing operation unit 405 can be rotated even if it is not actually rotating. It can be shown to the player as a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is rotating clockwise together with the ladybird image (an illusion can be made).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a projected rotation image in which a “image of a state in which the ladybird rotates around the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 in a clockwise direction” is projected and displayed, and the rotation pressing operation unit 405 includes the ladybird. A combination of the rotational drive state rotating clockwise with the image is set in association with the expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur. For example, when five stars are shown as the degree of expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur, the first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the upper start opening 2101 and the lottery by accepting game balls to the lower start opening 2102 Depending on the result of the second special lottery performed or the gaming state, when the expectation level that the big hit gaming state is generated is high (expectation: 4 to 5 stars), the effect by the projected rotation image is used. In addition, when it is set to a combination that is controlled by the rotational driving state, and the expectation level that the big hit gaming state occurs is neither high nor low (expectation level: two to three and a half stars), When it is set to a combination that is only an effect by the projected rotation image and is not controlled by the rotational driving state, and when the expectation level that the big hit gaming state occurs is low (expectation: one to one and a half stars), Projection rotation image That effect is not, and is set to a combination that is not controlled to rotate the drive state. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a novel effect that draws attention to the player by a combination of the projected rotation image and the rotational drive state, it is possible to improve the gaming interest compared to the conventional art. Further, in this embodiment, although not shown in the figure, instead of the “ladybug image” of the projection rotation image, another “type of image to be projected” and the rotation drive state can be combined. Yes. These combinations are the case where the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is in accordance with the effect pattern specified in the mode indicating the effect variation constituting the command received and analyzed from the main control board 4100. There is a case where the determination is made based on a random number value extracted by random number lottery. It should be noted that the degree of expectation that the big hit gaming state is generated is not limited to the combination of the projection rotation image and the rotation drive state described above, but is a state in which the projection rotation image and the rotation drive state are intermittently performed (that is, the rotation pressing state). A state in which the operation unit 405 rotates clockwise with the ladybird image, or a state in which the rotation stops and the rotation starts again), and a state in which the rotation speed in the projection rotation image and the rotation drive state is variable ( That is, the rotation pressing operation unit 405 may vary the speed of rotating clockwise with the ladybird image), and other combinations.

  Specifically, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 71, the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives various commands from the main control board 4100. Then, in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. 68, the effect control program analyzes various commands received in the peripheral control part command reception interrupt process of FIG. I do. When the analyzed command is, for example, a special figure 1 synchronized production start command classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronized production shown in FIG. 40, the production control program enters a mode indicating the variation of the production constituting the command. Based on the designated effect pattern, the screen generation schedule data so as to perform the effect mode (the effect mode that prompts the player to press the rotary pressing operation unit 405) shown in FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c). , Emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area.

  For example, the screen generation schedule data associated with the production modes shown in FIGS. 77A to 77C are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. When set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. In the display data creation processing of S1030, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4 of the peripheral control unit 4150. Extracted from 50c various control data copy area 4150ce outputs to the tone generator built VDP4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data to produce the upper plate side display device 1820. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be projected and displayed on the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs the signal from the channel CH2 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the player can perform the pressing operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 shown in FIGS. 77A to 77C on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). An urging effect is displayed. When the player presses the rotary pressing operation unit 405, the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 start to operate, and the decorations that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 are triggered by this. While the symbols 1950a to 1950c are variably displayed in the rectangular area at the right corner of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the size of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is moved in a reduced manner and the variation display is continued. Using the entire area other than the rectangular area at the right corner of the display area of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, for example, development effects that develop into effects related to various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 progress. It has become.

  The effect control program is a pressing operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 shown in FIGS. 77A to 77C on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). The player's finger or hand enters the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 so that the player presses the rotation pressing operation unit 405 when the effect that prompts the player is displayed. When it is determined that the player is in a state of being off, the display image creation process in step S1030 in the same process is performed so that the effect image projected from the upper dish display device 1820 is not reflected on the player's finger or hand. Of the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 4160a, the drawing data output to the upper plate display device 1820 is used in the same process. Since the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is controlled not to be output from the channel CH2 to the upper dish display device 1820 in the display data output process of step S1016, the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (rotation pressing operation part) 405, including the top surface of 405).

[18-2-2. Production on transparent sheets]
As described above, the upper dish side display device 1820 is a transparent projection sheet having a U-shape in the area between the game area 1100 formed on the game board 4 and the outer periphery extending from the center to the lower side of the center accessory 2300. When 1150A is attached to the front of the cell image of the game panel 1150, an image emitted from the projector 1850 shown in FIG. 8A is displayed on the transparent display device 1820. While the entire surface of the projection sheet 1150A and the entire surface of various units (the attacker unit 2100, the side prize port member 2200, the variable prize port unit 2100A) can be projected as projection surfaces, they can be displayed respectively. An effect image can be projected and displayed using the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 as a projection surface. In this way, the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A disposed below the upper dish side display device 1820 and the entire surface of various units (the attacker unit 2100, the side prize port member 2200, the variable prize port unit 2100A). , The predetermined effect image according to the gaming state can be clearly displayed on the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A, and is disposed below the upper decoration unit 280. By projecting toward the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state is displayed on the entire upper surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 is Include.) Can be displayed clearly.

  Here, the effect image projected toward the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A and the entire surfaces of various units (the attacker unit 2100, the side prize port member 2200, and the variable prize port unit 2100A) will be briefly described. . The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 receives the production commands related to the game effects, which are various commands shown in FIG. 40, from the main control board 4100, and controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140. The display from the projector 1850 provided on the upper plate side display device 1820 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol 1950a on the left side of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative symbol 1950b on the center, and the decorative symbol 1950c on the right side. Are projected toward the transparent projection sheet 1150A and various units (the attacker unit 2100, the side prize port member 2200, the variable prize port unit 2100A), and the effect proceeds.

  For example, the image from the projector 1850 provided in the upper dish display device 1820 is displayed on the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A (more precisely, on the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A, various units are not arranged). In addition, by projecting "fish swimming image (motion image)" or "shrimp and crab walking image (motion image)", etc. Can be expressed. Also, the image from the projector 1850 provided in the upper platen side display device 1820 is projected onto the entire front surface of the attacker unit 2100 and the entire front surface of the side prize port member 2200 among various units, respectively. Thus, the entire front surface of the attacker unit 2100 and the entire front surface of the side prize port member 2200 can be expressed as a three-dimensional rock by projection mapping. At this time, an octopus appears from the general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly upward on the right side of the attacker unit 2100, jumps out to the front surface of the attacker unit 2100, climbs up on the front surface, and the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is actually Although the closed state can be expressed by the above-described projection mapping, the octopus advances toward the big winning opening 2103 and enters the open / close member 2107. A mode of being closed can be expressed, and an octopus appears from a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly on the right side of the attacker unit 2100, jumps out to a cell image on the seabed, and starts swimming again. Of entering the upper start port 2101 It can be expressed. Of the two general winning ports 2201 in the side winning port member 2200, an anago appears from any one of the general winning ports 2201, jumps out to the cell image on the seabed, and starts swimming again. A mode of entering the general winning opening 2201 can be expressed, and an anago appears from any one of the two general winning openings 2201 in the side winning opening member 2200 and appears in a cell picture on the seabed. A mode of jumping out and swimming and entering a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 can be expressed.

  Further, an image from the projector 1850 provided in the upper platen side display device 1820 is projected as a “crab shell image (still image)” on the entire front surface of the variable prize opening unit 2100A among various units, and a pair of movable Project a “crab scissors image (still image)” over the entire surface of the piece 2106, and project a “crab foot and eye image” around the variable prize opening unit 2100A, which is a submarine cell image. Thus, the variable prize opening unit 2100A can be expressed as a three-dimensional crab. At this time, the image of the crab's eyes and feet can be a still image, the image of the crab's eyes moving jerkyly (motion image), or the crab's feet moving (motion image). Corresponding to the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2106, a “crab scissor image (still image)” can be projected on the entire surface of the pair of movable pieces 2106.

  Here, a fish school effect swimming on the seabed will be briefly described as an effect suggesting the possibility of a game state advantageous to the player (ie, an effect suggesting an expectation of occurrence of a big hit game state). In the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, an image of the seabed is displayed as a background image. The image of the seabed may be the same as or similar to that depicted in the cell image pasted on the surface of the game panel 1150, or may be anything that is reminiscent of the seabed.

  When the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is actually closed, the opening / closing member 2107 is opened and closed by the projection mapping described above. A school of fish emerges from the back of the winning opening 2103 and jumps out from the front of the attacker unit 2100 onto the sea floor cell image, and in the area of the center bonus 2300 and the side winning port member 2200, it moves toward the upper side on the sea floor cell image. Swim well, enter the inside from the left outer side of the center accessory 2300 and proceed from the left side to the right side of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Then, this school of fish vigorously jumps out from the right inner side to the right outer side of the center accessory 2300 on the cell image on the seabed and proceeds rightward to be formed in the right side decoration unit 200 shown in FIG. By advancing from the upper side to the lower side of the surface of the inner wall 201, the figure disappears. The effect of the entire inner wall 201 formed in the right side decoration unit 200 is advanced by the door frame side display device 1821 provided in the left side decoration unit 240.

  In the present embodiment, it is set in association with the degree of expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur depending on the size of the school of fish in the school of fish production. For example, when five stars are shown as the degree of expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur, the first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the upper start opening 2101 and the lottery by accepting game balls to the lower start opening 2102 If the expectation that the big hit gaming state is generated is high according to the result of the second special lottery performed or the gaming state (expectation: 4 to 5 stars), the game board side liquid crystal display device When the stage where the school of fish swims vigorously from the left side to the right side of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is set in the entire display area of 1900, the expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur is neither high nor low ( Expectation: 2 to 3 and a half stars), the school of fish formed in the size of about 50% of the entire display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (game board side in FIG. 78) Liquid crystal display device 19 (See the school of fish displayed in the 0 display area.) Is set to produce an effect of swimming vigorously from the left side to the right side of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the degree of expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur is low In the case (expectation: 1 to 1 and a half stars), a group of several fish are sparsely formed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 An effect of swimming vigorously from the left side to the right side of the display area is set. According to such a configuration, when the opening / closing member 2107 is opened / closed by the above-described projection mapping, a school of fish appears from the back of the big prize opening 2103 every time the opening / closing member 2107 is opened / closed. Jump out onto the cel image on the seabed, swim vigorously toward the upper side on the cel image on the seabed in the area of the center character 2300 and the side prize opening member 2200, and enter the inside from the left outer side of the center character 2300, Performing a novel effect that draws attention to the player by a fish school effect that can indicate the degree of expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur according to the size of the school of fish formed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 Therefore, it is possible to improve amusement interests as compared with the prior art. In the present embodiment, the projected image is not limited to the above-described crabs and rocks, and includes various underwater creatures, wood chips, blocks, and the like (not shown). When following the effect pattern specified in the mode indicating the effect variation constituting the command received and analyzed from the various commands from the control board 4100, and the randomness lottery extracted by the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a There are cases where it is determined based on numerical values.

  Specifically, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 71, the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives various commands from the main control board 4100. Then, in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. 68, the effect control program analyzes various commands received in the peripheral control part command reception interrupt process of FIG. I do. When the analyzed command is, for example, a special figure 1 synchronized production start command classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronous production shown in FIG. Based on the designated production pattern, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data so as to perform the production mode of the fish production shown in FIG. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in 4150cae.

  For example, the screen generation schedule data associated with the production mode of the fish school effect shown in FIG. 78 (a school of fish formed in a size of about 50% of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) When the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the control unit steady process. In the display data creation process of step S1030 in the process, the pointer of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Picture shown by The data extracted from various control data copy area 4150ce near control ROM4150b or peripheral control RAM4150c near the control unit 4150 outputs to the tone generator built VDP4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the upper plate side display device 1820. To the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150 </ b> A and the entire front surface of each unit and displayed, and also projected and displayed from the upper plate side display device 1820 to the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs the signal from the channel CH2 shown in FIG. As a result, an image corresponding to the progress of the fish school effect is projected onto the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A and the entire front surface of the various units. At this time, when an effect (not shown) related to the fish school effect is advanced on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405), the effect is displayed. It will be.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b on the basis of the input screen data to create sprite data to generate the game board side liquid crystal. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed in the display area of the display device 1900 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 shown in FIG. As a result, an image corresponding to the progress of the fish school effect is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data to display the door frame side. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be projected and displayed on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 from the device 1821 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs to the door frame side display device 1821 from the channel CH3 shown in FIG. As a result, an image corresponding to the progress of the fish school effect is projected from the upper side to the lower side of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200.

  In addition, the production control program advances the production (not shown) related to the fish production in parallel to the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405) (that is, In the case where a player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. When the determination is made, in order to prevent the effect image projected from the upper plate display device 1820 from being reflected on the player's finger or hand, the display data creation processing in step S1030 in the same processing is performed on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Among the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) generated in the same way, the drawing data output to the upper plate display device 1820 is used as the step in the same process. Since the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is controlled not to be output from the channel CH2 to the upper dish display device 1820 in the display data output process of S1016, the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (the rotation pressing operation unit 405). Include the top surface of). The effect control program projects the dish unit shown in FIG. 7 when an image corresponding to the progress of the fish effect is projected from the upper side to the lower side of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200. When it is determined that the player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314, the effect image projected from the door frame side display device 1821 is the player's finger or hand. When it is determined that the player's finger or hand is positioned at the position reflected in the hand, the production image projected from the door frame side display device 1821 is not reflected on the player's finger or hand. Of the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process of step S1030 in the process, the drawing data is output to the door frame side display device 1821. Since the image data is controlled so that the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is not output from the channel CH3 to the door frame side display device 1821 in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the inner wall of the right side decoration unit 200 is controlled. Nothing is displayed in 201.

[18-3. Production by door frame side display device]
The effect by the door frame side display device 1821 provided in the left side decoration unit 240 is the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. By executing the control unit steady process or the like, the image is displayed on the entire inner wall 201 formed in the right side decoration unit 200 shown in FIG. Thereby, depending on the first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the upper start port 2101, the second special lottery result lottered by accepting game balls to the lower start port 2102, or the game state Various effects by the door frame side display device 1821 are advanced. Here, as an example of an effect by the door frame side display device 1821, an effect of deriving and displaying a character in a special manner in order to suggest the player the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result will be described.

  As described above, the door frame side display device 1821 displays the image emitted from the projector 1851 shown in FIG. 8B on the front side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to face the left side decoration unit 240. By projecting toward the inner wall 201 formed on the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery, a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state is clearly displayed on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200. Can be displayed.

  The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 receives an effect command related to the game effect, which is the various commands shown in FIG. When the execution time of the effect for prompting has come, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, so that first, as shown in FIG. Projecting toward the approximate center of the inner wall 201 is an image (motion image) of a mode in which a plurality of small pieces rotate as a vortex having a size covering the entire area of the rectangular inner wall 201 in the clockwise direction. Then proceed with the production.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 79 (c), as time passes, a small broken piece gathers at the approximate center of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the twisted image gradually increases. The effect is advanced by projecting an image (motion image) in which the size of the vortex is reduced and formed. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), an image (motion image) in which a character formed by collecting small pieces gathered at approximately the center of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is derived and displayed. Is projected to advance the production.

  In the present embodiment, an image for deriving and displaying a character is set in association with an expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur. For example, when five stars are shown as the degree of expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur, the first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the upper start opening 2101 and the lottery by accepting game balls to the lower start opening 2102 When the expectation level that the big hit gaming state is generated is high according to the result of the second special lottery performed or the gaming state (expectation: 4 to 5 stars), FIG. When the image (motion image) in the mode shown in (d) is set to produce an effect that progresses in order with the passage of time, the expectation level for generating a big hit gaming state is neither high nor low (expectation level: In the case of two to three and a half stars, the image (motion image) of the mode shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and (b) or the mode shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to (c) An effect is set in which images (motion images) progress in order as time passes. When the degree of expectation that the big hit gaming state occurs is low (expectation: one to one and a half stars), the image (motion image) of the mode shown in FIG. By maintaining with this, an effect that does not proceed at all is set in the images (motion images) in the modes shown in FIGS. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a novel effect that draws attention to the player by the progress of the effect by the image for deriving and displaying the character, it is possible to improve the gaming interest compared to the past. . Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown, it is possible to use other “types of image to be projected” instead of the above-described character, or a combination thereof. It is also. The type of image to be projected and the combination thereof are determined according to the effect pattern designated in the mode indicating the effect variation that constitutes the command analyzed by receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control MPU 4150a. There is a case where an effect control program to be executed is determined based on a random number value extracted by random number lottery.

  Specifically, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 71, the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives various commands from the main control board 4100. Then, in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. 68, the effect control program analyzes various commands received in the peripheral control part command reception interrupt process of FIG. I do. When the analyzed command is, for example, a special figure 1 synchronized production start command classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronized production shown in FIG. 40, the production control program enters a mode indicating the variation of the production constituting the command. Based on the designated production pattern, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, so as to perform the production modes shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (d) (the production mode for deriving and displaying the character), Sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and stored in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in 4150cae. set.

  For example, the screen generation schedule data associated with the production modes shown in FIGS. 79A to 79D are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. When set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. In the display data creation processing of S1030, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4 of the peripheral control unit 4150. Extracted from 50c various control data copy area 4150ce outputs to the tone generator built VDP4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the door frame side display device 1821. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be projected and displayed on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs to the door frame side display device 1821 from the channel CH3 shown in FIG. Thereby, the effect which derives and displays the character shown in FIGS. 79A to 79D is displayed on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200.

  The effect control program is shown in FIG. 7 when the effect of deriving and displaying the characters shown in FIGS. 79A to 79D is displayed on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200. When it is determined that the player's finger or hand is in the upper area of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, the effect image projected from the door frame side display device 1821 is the player. In order to prevent the effect image projected from the door frame side display device 1821 from appearing on the player's finger or hand when it is determined that the player's finger or hand is located at the position reflected on the player's finger or hand Of the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process of step S1030 in the same process, it is output to the door frame side display device 1821. Since the drawing data is controlled so that the built-in sound source VDP 4160a is not output from the channel CH3 to the door frame side display device 1821 in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the inner wall of the right side decoration unit 200 is controlled. Nothing is displayed in 201.

[18-4. Adjusting the projector's optical axis]
Grapes in the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3 (when the game balls falling through the game area 100 are closed together with the following game balls between the obstacle nails, the falling game balls are stacked one after another. In order to remove this, a staff member such as a hall clerk opens the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 or periodically releases the game board. In some cases, the door frame 5 may be opened from the main body frame 3 in order to perform maintenance 4 (cleaning dust, cigarette dust, etc.). Further, the game balls supplied from the Pachinko Island facilities are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply path of the prize ball device 740, and clogged when introduced to the prize ball device 740. Then, in order to solve this, an attendant such as a store clerk in the hall may open the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 in some cases. The projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 by such vibration generated by opening the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 or opening the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2. The optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 provided in the left side decoration unit 240 is deviated from the reference axis. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to correct such a deviation, the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 is adjusted and the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is adjusted. Can be done. First, the optical axis adjustment of the projector of the upper plate side display device will be described, and then the optical axis adjustment of the projector of the door frame side display device will be described.

[18-4-1. Adjusting the optical axis of the projector of the upper plate display device]
The adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 is shown in FIG. 68 by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Further, the peripheral control unit steady process such as the peripheral control unit power-on process is executed to be displayed on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the upper dish side display device 1820 displays the image emitted from the projector 1850 shown in FIG. 8A on the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 arranged below the upper decoration unit 280. By projecting toward the front, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the gaming state can be clearly displayed on the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). It is like that.

  When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, it is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 and input to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is shown in FIG. 41 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 receives a door opening command from the main control board 4100 and controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. As an adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 on the entire surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405), the “rotation pressing operation” An optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA composed of a circle larger than the upper surface of the unit 405 and a circle smaller than the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 is projected. In FIG. 80A, the projected optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA is shifted to the lower left from the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405, and the center position of the projected optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA is displayed. And the center position of the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 is shifted. In such a shifted state, it indicates that the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 is shifted from the reference axis, and this shift is shown in FIG. 8 (a). This can be corrected by manually rotating the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a and the rotational left / right direction adjustment knob 1825b.

  As described above, the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a is rotated in one direction (forward rotation), so that the optical axis of the projector 1850 gradually moves forward as the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front in accordance with the rotation operation. On the other hand, by rotating (reversely rotating) in the direction opposite to the one direction, the optical axis of the projector 1850 gradually moves backward as the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front in accordance with the rotation operation. To be directed to. As described above, the left / right direction adjustment knob 1825b is rotated in one direction (forward rotation), so that the optical axis of the projector 1850 gradually moves to the left when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front along with the rotation operation. On the other hand, by rotating (reversely rotating) in the direction opposite to the one direction, the optical axis of the projector 1850 is rotated to the right when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front. Is gradually being turned to.

  In FIG. 80 (a), the projected optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA is shifted to the lower left from the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405, so that a staff member such as a hall clerk can adjust the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a. Is rotated in the reverse direction so that the optical axis of the projector 1850 is gradually directed rearward when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front in accordance with the rotation operation, and the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA And a straight line in the horizontal direction passing through the center position of the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 are adjusted so as to be aligned on the same straight line (that is, at the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA). When the horizontal position and the horizontal position at the center position of the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 are aligned on the same straight line), the left / right direction adjustment knob 1825b is rotated backward. Rotate the optical axis of the projector 1850 in accordance with the rotational operation so that the optical axis of the projector 1850 gradually turns to the right when viewed from the front and passes through the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA. By adjusting so that the straight line in the direction and the straight line in the front-rear direction passing through the center position of the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 are aligned on the same straight line (that is, vertical at the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA) By adjusting the position and the vertical position at the center position of the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 so that they are aligned on the same straight line), as shown in FIG. When the center position and the center position of the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 match (that is, by the circle smaller than the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 and the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). When a larger circle than the upper surface of the rotating pressing element 405, by but in a state of being arranged in concentric circles), so that the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper tray side display device 1820 matches the reference axis.

  As described above, since the optical axis of the projector 1850 provided in the upper dish side display device 1820 can be adjusted with certainty, an image matched with the contour of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 (FIG. 77 (a) to FIG. 77). The image of the ladybird shown in (c)) is accurately projected on the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 from the upper dish side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280, so that the rotary press operation unit 405 does not have any conventional. Since the decoration by the new outer surface of the gaming machine can be realized, the decoration effect of the outer surface of the gaming machine can be enhanced as compared with the conventional case, and as a result, the gaming interest can be enhanced. Therefore, the decoration effect on the outer surface of the gaming machine can be enhanced and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  While the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 are opened, as described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is output from the green output terminal PT2 provided on the external terminal plate 784 shown in FIG. By being output to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are opened while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. And an adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 on the entire surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). It can be understood that the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA is projected.

  The optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA is emitted from the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, the light is irradiated from the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820. This is because the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) by the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 5 is open to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2, either one or both of the states, This is because it is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an instruction for door opening notification.

  Specifically, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 71, the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives various commands from the main control board 4100. Then, in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. 68, the effect control program analyzes various commands received in the peripheral control part command reception interrupt process of FIG. I do. When the analyzed command is the door opening command shown in FIG. 41, the effect control program performs the effect of projecting the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b). In addition, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc. And is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c.

  For example, the screen generation schedule data associated with the production mode for projecting the optical axis adjustment reference circular image CALA shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B is the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. 68. When the data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce and set in 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. In the display data creation process of step S1030 in the same process, the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is updated by the peripheral control unit 4150. Peripheral control Extracted from various control data copy area 4150ce of OM4150b or peripheral control RAM4150c outputs to the tone generator built VDP4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data to produce the upper plate side display device 1820. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be projected and displayed on the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs the signal from the channel CH2 shown in FIG. As a result, the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B is displayed on the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). It becomes.

  In this way, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the probability that the optical axis will shift is increased. The optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B is displayed on the entire panel 314 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). In addition to this, in the present embodiment, a clerk such as a hall clerk does not open the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3, according to the above-described setting mode screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is also possible to irradiate the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 with the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA from the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820. Thereby, a clerk such as a clerk in the hall can inspect whether or not the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 matches the reference axis. As described above, in the setting mode, when the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device. 1900 is displayed, and when the rotary press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, A screen for performing the mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, in the setting mode, the display on the upper plate side is displayed during a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and during a period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a waiting state and is being demonstrated by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The time for irradiating the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA from the projector 1850 of the apparatus 1820 can be set, respectively, so that the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA from the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display apparatus 1820 is not irradiated at all. Can be set individually.

  As described above, grapes are dropped in the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3 (the game ball falling when the game ball dropping the game area 100 closes between the obstacle nail and the obstacle nail together with the following game ball) When the balls are piled up one after the other, a game ball cluster is formed), in order to remove this, a staff member such as a hall clerk opens the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3, In some cases, the door frame 5 may be opened from the main body frame 3 in order to periodically maintain the game board 4 (cleaning dust, cigarettes, etc.). In addition, as described above, the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the ball clogging occurs, an attendant such as a hall clerk may release the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 in order to eliminate this. Thus, every time the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA from the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 is displayed. When irradiation is performed, a staff member such as a player or a hall clerk may feel the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA bothersome. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 in the setting mode, the light from the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 is displayed. It is possible to set so that the axis adjustment reference circle image CALA is not irradiated at all.

[18-4-2. Adjusting the optical axis of the projector of the door frame side display device]
The adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 provided in the left side decoration unit 240 is shown in FIG. 68 by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. By executing the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in the figure, the entire inner wall 201 formed on the right side decoration unit 200 shown in FIG. 7 is displayed and advanced. Yes.

  As described above, the door frame side display device 1821 displays the image emitted from the projector 1851 shown in FIG. 8B on the front side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to face the left side decoration unit 240. By projecting toward the inner wall 201 formed on the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery, a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state is clearly displayed on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200. Can be displayed.

  When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, it is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 and input to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is shown in FIG. 41 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 receives a door opening command from the main control board 4100 and controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. As an adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 over the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200, “a rectangular optical axis that is slightly smaller than the entire surface of the inner wall 201” The adjustment reference rectangular image CALB "is projected. In FIG. 80C, the projected optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB is shifted to the upper right from the entire surface of the inner wall 201, and the center position of the projected optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB is The center position of the entire surface of the inner wall 201 is shifted. In such a shifted state, it is indicated that the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is shifted from the reference axis, and this shift is shown in FIG. 8B. This can be corrected by manually rotating the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a and the pivotable vertical direction adjustment knob 1826b.

  As described above, the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1826a is rotated in one direction (forward rotation), so that the optical axis of the projector 1851 gradually moves forward when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front along with the rotation operation. On the other hand, by rotating (reversely rotating) in the direction opposite to the one direction, the optical axis of the projector 1851 gradually moves backward as viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the rotation operation. To be directed to. As described above, the vertical adjustment knob 1826b is rotated in one direction (forward rotation), so that the optical axis of the projector 1851 is gradually increased upward when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front along with the rotation operation. On the other hand, by rotating (reversely rotating) in the direction opposite to the one direction, the optical axis of the projector 1851 is gradually lowered downward when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front. To be directed to.

  In FIG. 80 (c), the projected optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB is shifted to the upper right from the entire surface of the inner wall 201. Therefore, a clerk such as a hall clerk can adjust the longitudinal adjustment knob 1826a. By rotating in the reverse direction, the optical axis of the projector 1851 is gradually turned to the rear when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, and the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB is set. When the vertical line passing through and the vertical line passing through the center position of the entire surface of the inner wall 201 are adjusted so as to be aligned on the same straight line (that is, the vertical position at the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB) And the vertical position at the center position of the entire surface of the inner wall 201 are aligned on the same straight line), and then the vertical adjustment knob 1826b is rotated in the reverse direction. As a result of the operation, the optical axis of the projector 1851 is gradually directed downward when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, and a straight line in the front-rear direction passing through the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB. By adjusting the straight line in the front-rear direction passing through the center position of the entire surface of the inner wall 201 to be aligned on the same straight line (that is, the horizontal position at the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB and the inner wall As shown in FIG. 80D, the center position of the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB and the inner wall 201 are adjusted so that the horizontal position at the center position of the entire surface of 201 is aligned on the same straight line. (I.e., the rectangular optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB that is slightly smaller than the entire surface of the inner wall 201 and the inner wall 2). A rectangular according entire surface, but by in a state of being arranged in concentric circles), so that the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 matches the reference axis.

  As described above, since the optical axis of the projector 1851 provided in the door frame side display device 1821 can be reliably adjusted, images that match the entire surface of the inner wall 201 (FIGS. 79A to 79A). The image of the character shown in d) is accurately projected on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 formed on the right side decoration unit 200 from the door frame side display device 1821 provided in the left side decoration unit 240, so that the right side The interior wall 201 formed in the decoration unit 200 can realize decoration with a completely new gaming machine outer surface, which is not conventional, thereby enhancing the decoration effect on the outer surface of the gaming machine as compared with the prior art and, as a result, enhancing the gaming interest. Can do. Therefore, the decoration effect on the outer surface of the gaming machine can be enhanced and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  While the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 are opened, as described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is output from the green output terminal PT2 provided on the external terminal plate 784 shown in FIG. By being output to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are opened while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. In order to adjust the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 on the entire surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405). In addition to the projection of the optical axis adjustment reference circle image CALA as the adjustment image, the door frame side display device 1821 is applied to the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200. Optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB as the adjustment image for adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1851 is understandable that it is projected.

  The optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB is irradiated from the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. In FIG. 5, the light is emitted from the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821. This is because the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) by the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 5 is open to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2, either one or both of the states, This is because it is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an instruction for door opening notification.

  Specifically, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 71, the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives various commands from the main control board 4100. Then, in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. 68, the effect control program analyzes various commands received in the peripheral control part command reception interrupt process of FIG. I do. When the analyzed command is the door opening command shown in FIG. 41, the effect control program performs the effect of projecting the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB shown in FIGS. 80 (c) and 80 (d). In addition, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c.

  For example, the screen generation schedule data associated with the production mode for projecting the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB shown in FIGS. 80C and 80D is the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. 68. When the data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce and set in 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. In the display data creation process of step S1030 in the same process, the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is updated by the peripheral control unit 4150. Peripheral system Extracted from various control data copy area 4150ce of ROM4150b or peripheral control RAM4150c outputs to the tone generator built VDP4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the door frame side display device 1821. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be projected and displayed on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs to the door frame side display device 1821 from the channel CH3 shown in FIG. As a result, the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB shown in FIGS. 80C and 80D is displayed on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200.

  In this way, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the probability that the optical axis will shift is increased. The optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB shown in FIGS. 80C and 80D is displayed on the entire surface of the wall 201. In addition to this, in the present embodiment, a clerk such as a hall clerk does not open the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3, according to the above-described setting mode screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is also possible to irradiate the entire surface of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 with the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB from the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821. Thereby, a clerk such as a clerk in the hall can inspect whether or not the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 matches the reference axis. As described above, in the setting mode, when the rotary pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device. 1900 is displayed, and when the rotary press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, A screen for performing the mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, in the setting mode, the door frame side display is displayed during a predetermined time after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and during a period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a waiting state and is being demonstrated by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The irradiation time of the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB from the projector 1851 of the apparatus 1821 can be set, respectively, and the irradiation of the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB from the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is not performed at all. You can also set each.

  As described above, grapes are dropped in the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3 (the game ball falling when the game ball dropping the game area 100 closes between the obstacle nail and the obstacle nail together with the following game ball) When the balls are piled up one after the other, a game ball cluster is formed), in order to remove this, a staff member such as a hall clerk opens the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3, In some cases, the door frame 5 may be opened from the main body frame 3 in order to periodically maintain the game board 4 (cleaning dust, cigarettes, etc.). In addition, as described above, the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the ball clogging occurs, an attendant such as a hall clerk may release the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 in order to eliminate this. Thus, every time the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB from the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is displayed. When irradiation is performed, a staff member such as a player or a hall clerk may feel the optical axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB bothersome. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 in the setting mode, the light from the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is displayed. It can be set so that the axis adjustment reference rectangular image CALB is not irradiated at all.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, a panel is mounted inside the main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the machine frame (outer frame) installed on the island facility, and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a window capable of visually recognizing a gaming area is provided in the center of a door (door frame) (for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2014-004129 (paragraph [0009] and FIG. 1)). In game machines, decorative lamps are provided on the panel door (door frame) to make the appearance gorgeous and enhance the decoration effect on the outer surface of the game machine. Since it is adopted, it is difficult to differentiate from other gaming machines, and it is difficult to further improve the game entertainment by the decoration effect on the outer surface of the gaming machine.

  In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, a game board is mounted inside a main body frame that can be freely opened and closed with respect to a machine frame (outer frame) installed on an island facility, and a panel that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the main body frame A gaming machine has been proposed in which a window through which a game area can be visually recognized is provided at the center of a door (door frame) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004129 (paragraph [0029] and FIG. 3)). In the gaming machine described in this document, an effect display device capable of effect display by variably displaying a plurality of effect symbols is provided at substantially the center of the game board. However, since such a configuration has been widely adopted in recent gaming machines, it is difficult to differentiate from other gaming machines, and it is difficult to further improve the game entertainment by the effect display device. .

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 4100 (game control means) of FIG. 13 is provided. The main control board 4100 can control the progress of the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a circuit (power supply cut-off) further comprising the magnetic detection switch 3024 (abnormal magnetic detection means) in FIG. 9, the magnetic detection power drive circuit 4100x and the magnetic detection power circuit 4100y in FIG. Means). The magnetic detection switch 3024 can detect the occurrence of abnormal magnetism. The circuit constituted by the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x and the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y is capable of supplying the magnetic detection switch 3024 with + 12V for magnetic detection and cutting off the power.

  The magnetic detection switch 3024 (magnetic detection control IC 3024c) performs offset adjustment processing in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation processing in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21 (processing in step SM115 in the offset adjustment processing in FIG. 22). The magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 at the time of start-up by the supply of magnetic detection +12 from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y can be set as a reference (reference setting control means). The magnetic detection switch 3024 (magnetic detection control IC 3024c) performs offset adjustment processing in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation processing in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21 (determination in step SM120 in the offset adjustment processing in FIG. 22). , It can be determined whether or not the magnetic state in the environment surrounding the magnetic detection switch 3024 can be set as a reference (reference setting determination control means). The magnetic detection switch 3024 (magnetic detection control IC 3024c) is the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. 21 (in the determination of step SM120 in the offset adjustment process of FIG. 22). If YES, the output of the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 of FIG. 19A set in the process of step SM105 in the same process as the determination result is maintained and set at logic L, while step SM120 in the process is maintained. When the determination is NO, the output of the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. 19A can be set to logic H in the process of step SM125 in the same process as the determination result (reference setting determination result) Output control means) This determination result includes the power supply for magnetic detection The fact that the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 at the time of start-up by the power supply of + 12V for magnetic detection from 4100y can be set as a reference (that is, the processing at power-on of the magnetic detection control side in FIG. 21) 22), which is YES in the determination of step SM120 in the offset adjustment process of FIG. 22 which is the offset adjustment process of step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side, and + 12V for magnetic detection from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y That the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 at the start of the start by the power supply of the power supply could not be set as a reference (that is, the magnetic detection control side activation in the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. It is an offset adjustment process of step SM20 in the process And that informing of) a NO is determined in step SM120 in the offset adjustment process 22, there is.

  The main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) supplies the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal, which is a control signal, to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x in step S152 in the magnetic detection switch activation start process of FIG. By setting and outputting to a certain logic H, it is possible to supply + 12V for magnetic detection from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y to the magnetic detection switch 3024 (power supply control means). The main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) supplies the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal, which is a control signal, to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x in step S176 in the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process of FIG. By setting and outputting the logic L which is shut off, it is possible to shut off the + 12V power for magnetism detection from the power circuit 4100y for magnetism detection to the magnetism detection switch 3024 (power cutoff control means).

  When power is restored, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) receives a magnetic detection power supply signal that is a control signal for the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x in step S152 in the magnetic detection switch activation start process of FIG. When the logic is set to logic H, which is the power supply, and output, the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y supplies the magnetic detection switch 3024 to the magnetic detection switch 3024 and the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts to be activated. The fact that the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 at the time when the switch 3024 starts to be activated cannot be set as a reference (that is, the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. 21) The offset adjustment process of step SM20 in FIG. 22), the output of the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. 19A is set to logic H in the process of step SM125 in the offset adjustment process of FIG. When it is set and output, the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal that is a control signal for the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x is turned off in step S176 in the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process of FIG. After the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y cuts off the magnetic detection + 12V power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 by setting it to logic L and outputs it, in step S152 in the magnetic detection switch activation start process of FIG. 46 again. A magnetism as a control signal for the power supply drive circuit 4100x for magnetic detection By setting the logic of the power supply signal for detection to logic H that is power supply and outputting it, the magnetic detection switch 3024 supplies the magnetic detection + 12V to the magnetic detection switch 3024 from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y. It can be started. The “recovery” includes not only power-on but also a case where power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  In this way, when the magnetic detection switch 3024 is supplied with power and starts to start, and when the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts to start, the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 itself cannot be set as a reference. After the magnetic detection switch 3024 is powered off, the power can be supplied again to start (restart). Thus, the power supply to the magnetic detection switch 3024 and the power supply are cut off until the setting based on the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 itself at the time when the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts to start can be reliably performed. (That is, the magnetic detection switch 3024 is repeatedly restarted), the magnetic detection switch 3024 is abnormal with reference to the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 itself at the time of starting the start. Generation of magnetism can be detected. Therefore, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 4100 (game control means) of FIG. 13 is provided. The main control board 4100 can control the progress of the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a circuit (power supply cut-off) further comprising the magnetic detection switch 3024 (abnormal magnetic detection means) in FIG. 9, the magnetic detection power drive circuit 4100x and the magnetic detection power circuit 4100y in FIG. Means). The magnetic detection switch 3024 can detect the occurrence of abnormal magnetism. The circuit constituted by the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x and the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y is capable of supplying the magnetic detection switch 3024 with + 12V for magnetic detection and cutting off the power.

  The magnetic detection switch 3024 (magnetic detection control IC 3024c) performs offset adjustment processing in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation processing in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21 (processing in step SM115 in the offset adjustment processing in FIG. 22). In FIG. 5, whether or not the process for setting the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 at the time of starting to start by the power supply of the magnetic detection +12 from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y can be successfully executed. Can be output to the main control board 4100 (reference setting success determination result output control means). The magnetic detection switch 3024 (magnetic detection control IC 3024c) determines the electrical connection state of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in the connection confirmation process in step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. The process of checking can be executed to output a determination result as to whether or not an abnormal connection state exists to the main control board 4100 (abnormal connection state determination result output control means). The magnetism detection switch 3024 (magnetism detection control IC 3024c) is arranged in the surrounding environment of the magnetism detection switch 3024 in the magnetism detection process of step SM30 in the magnetism detection control side main process of the magnetism detection control side power-on process of FIG. a) A determination result as to whether or not the occurrence of abnormal magnetism is detected based on the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b shown can be output to the main control board 4100 (abnormal magnetism detection determination) Result output control means).

  When the magnetic detection switch 3024 (magnetic detection control IC 3024c) starts to be activated, the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. The connection detection process in step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. 21, and the magnetic detection in step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. Based on the progress of the processing in order (accordingly), the offset adjustment processing in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation processing in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21 (in step SM115 in the offset adjustment processing in FIG. 22). Processing) and the magnetic detection control side power source of FIG. The determination result by the connection confirmation process of step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the on-time process, and the determination result by the magnetic detection process of step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. Can be output to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) supplies the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal, which is a control signal, to the magnetic detection power supply drive circuit 4100x in step S152 in the magnetic detection switch activation start process of FIG. By setting and outputting to a certain logic H, it is possible to supply + 12V for magnetic detection from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y to the magnetic detection switch 3024 (power supply control means). The main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) outputs the determination result from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that is output based on (in accordance with) the above-described predetermined order as step S166 in the malfunction detection processing at the time of starting the magnetic detection switch in FIG. In this determination, the determination result by the offset adjustment process in step SM20 (the process of step SM115 in the offset adjustment process of FIG. 22) in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. In the determination of step S184 in the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process in FIG. 47, the connection confirmation in step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. Can determine the result of processing Then, in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG. 45, the magnetic detection of step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. The determination result by the process can be determined (determination result determination control means).

  The main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) has, as a predetermined condition, when power is restored (when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on) or when the main frame door is opened. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is only once when the main frame door is changed from the closed state to the closed state. The magnetic detection control side of the power-on process shown in FIG. When the offset adjustment process (offset adjustment process shown in FIG. 22) in step SM45 in the main process is performed and the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed), the power to the magnetic detection switch 3024 is cut off and then the power is supplied again to detect the magnetism. When the switch 3024 is restarted, the magnetic detection power supply driver is turned on in step S152 in the magnetic detection switch start start process of FIG. The magnetic detection power supply signal, which is a control signal, is set to logic H, which is a power supply, and is output to the magnetic circuit 4100x to output + 12V for magnetic detection from the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y to the magnetic detection switch 3024. When the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts to be started after the power is supplied, the determination result from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that is output based on (in accordance with) the above-described predetermined order is the failure determination at the time of starting the magnetic detection switch in FIG. By the determination in step S166 and the determination in step S188 in the process, and the fraud detection process in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process in FIG. 45, the magnetic detection control side activation process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. Offset adjustment processing in step SM20 in FIG. In step SM184 in FIG. 47 and the determination in step S184 in the magnetic detection switch start-up failure determination process in FIG. 47, the magnetic detection control side start-up process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. It is determined which of the determination result by the SM25 connection confirmation process and the determination result by the magnetic detection process of step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. Be able to.

  As described above, when the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) provides a control signal to the magnetic detection power source drive circuit 4100x in step S152 in the magnetic detection switch activation start process of FIG. By setting the logic of the magnetic detection power supply signal to logic H as the power supply and outputting it, the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y supplies magnetic detection + 12V to the magnetic detection switch 3024, thereby providing magnetism. When the detection switch 3024 starts to be activated, the determination result from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that is output based on (in accordance with) the above-described predetermined order is the result of the determination in step S166 in the magnetic detection switch activation failure determination process of FIG. Determination in step S188 and main control timer interruption in FIG. By the fraud detection process of step S112 in the process, the offset adjustment process of step SM20 (the process of step SM115 in the offset adjustment process of FIG. 22) in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. In the determination result and the determination of step S184 in the magnetic detection switch activation trouble determination process of FIG. 47, the determination result of the connection confirmation process of step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. And the determination result by the magnetic detection process of step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. 21 can be determined. . As a result, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) determines that the determination result from the magnetic detection switch 3024 is based on the magnetic detection process of step SM30 in the main process of the magnetic detection control side in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. Since it is possible to accurately determine whether the result is a result, it is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of abnormal magnetism of the magnet due to fraud. Therefore, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the front frame composed of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 of FIG. 1 and the main control board 4100 (game control means) of FIG. 13 are provided. Yes. The main body frame 3 constituting the front frame is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 of FIG. 1 installed in the pachinko island facility which is a game island so as to be freely opened and closed, and can be mounted with the game board 4 of FIG. It is. The main control board 4100 can control the progress of the game.

  The game board 4 includes the magnetic detection switch 3024 (abnormal magnetic detection means) shown in FIG. The magnetic detection switch 3024 can detect the occurrence of abnormal magnetism, and is based on the input of a request signal from the outside when the power is turned on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). Thus, the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 can be set as a reference (measurement reference position). Specifically, the magnetic detection switch 3024 sets the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b in FIG. 19A that can detect minute magnetism with high accuracy as measurement reference positions. As shown in FIG. 21, the offset adjustment process in step SM20 is automatically performed in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the power supply to the magnetic detection control side shown in FIG. 21 is turned on based on the input of the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 of FIG. 27 as a request signal from the outside. The offset adjustment process in step SM45 in the main process on the magnetic detection control side of the process can be performed.

  The main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) has detected whether or not the occurrence of abnormal magnetism output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. Based on the fact that a magnet detection signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not goto is being performed, is input, and the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 after the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, the offset adjustment execution request signal which is a request signal in the offset adjustment execution request processing in step S105C (offset adjustment execution request processing in FIG. 48) in the main control timer interrupt processing in FIG. 45 is changed to the magnetic detection switch in FIG. 3024 can be output to the OFFSET terminal.

  As described above, the magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism provided in the game board 4 includes the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. If the geomagnetism changes in this state, the detection of abnormal magnetism is affected (that is, the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b are affected). ). For example, if any trouble occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk of a game hall (hall) opens the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 and shuts off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 to solve the trouble. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on after the cancellation and the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 again, the magnetic detection switch 3024 causes the magnetic state in the surrounding environment in the state where the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 Is set as a reference (measurement reference position), the offset adjustment process of step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 after the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, an offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game. Is input to the magnetic detection switch 3024, and the magnetic state in the surrounding environment in the state where the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 is set as a reference (measurement reference position). Therefore, the offset adjustment process of step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 can be performed. Thereby, in a state where the main body frame 3 which is a state in which the player plays a game is closed to the outer frame 2, the setting based on the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the magnetic detection switch 3024 itself is surely set (measurement reference position). Can be done. Therefore, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the front frame composed of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 of FIG. 1 and the main control board 4100 (game control means) of FIG. 13 are provided. Yes. The main body frame 3 constituting the front frame is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 of FIG. 1 installed in the pachinko island facility which is a game island so as to be freely opened and closed, and can be mounted with the game board 4 of FIG. It is. The main control board 4100 can control the progress of the game.

  The game board 4 includes the magnetic detection switch 3024 (magnetic detection means) shown in FIG. The magnetism detection switch 3024 performs an illegal act by a magnet based on detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b in FIG. 19A that can detect minute magnetism with high accuracy. It is possible to determine whether or not a magnet is going to be detected by detecting the presence of a magnet having the ability to change in the direction in which the game ball flows down.

  The magnetic detection switch 3024 is a process for setting the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b to the measurement reference position, which is a measurement reference, when the power is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure). The offset adjustment process of step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the input of the offset adjustment execution request signal from the 27 main control board 4100, the offset adjustment process of step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 is performed. Be able to.

  The main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) determines whether or not an illegal act by the magnet output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in FIG. Is based on the fact that the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 after the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, the offset adjustment execution request signal which is a request signal in the offset adjustment execution request processing in step S105C (offset adjustment execution request processing in FIG. 48) in the main control timer interrupt processing in FIG. 45 is changed to the magnetic detection switch in FIG. 3024 can be output to the OFFSET terminal.

  As described above, the gaming board 4 performs an illegal act by the magnet based on the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b that can detect minute magnetism with high accuracy (that is, A magnetic detection switch 3024 that can determine whether or not a magnet is going to be detected by detecting the presence of a magnet having the ability to change in the direction in which the game ball flows down). Therefore, the detection signals from the two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a and 3024b due to the change in geomagnetism between the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 Will be affected. For example, if any trouble occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk of a game hall (hall) opens the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 and shuts off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 to solve the trouble. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on after the cancellation and the main body frame 3 is closed again to the outer frame 2, the magnetic detection switch 3024 has two magnetic impedance sensor elements 3024a in a state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. , 3024b, the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. If the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 after the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the progress of the game is controlled. Two magneto-impedance sensor elements in a state where the main body frame 3 which is a state in which a player plays a game is closed to the outer frame 2 by inputting an offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 to the magnetic detection switch 3024 As a process for setting the detection signals from 3024a and 3024b to the measurement reference position which is a measurement reference, the offset adjustment process in step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. 21 is performed. Be able to. As a result, the magnetic detection control side power-on shown in FIG. 21 is set as a process for setting the measurement reference position, which is a measurement reference, when the main body frame 3 in a state where the player is playing is closed to the outer frame 2. The offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process in the time process and the offset adjustment process in step SM45 in the magnetic detection control side main process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process shown in FIG. Can be done. Therefore, an illegal act by a magnet can be accurately detected.

  In the embodiment described above, the wiring from the magnetic detection switch 3024 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. For this reason, for example, when a plurality of magnetic detection switches 3024 are provided on the game board 4, or when a plurality of magnetic detection switches 3024 are provided on the game board 4 and the door frame 5, respectively, the plurality of magnetic detection switches 3024 The wiring can be combined into one in the panel relay terminal plate 4161, and the panel relay terminal plate 4161 and the main control board 4100 are combined into one strip-like cable (so-called flat cable) in which a plurality of wirings are bundled on a plane. Can be electrically connected.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game using a game ball (game medium) can be performed, and a predetermined profit (a variety of game states (for example, normal time) can be determined based on the game result. State, probability variation state, time shortening state, probability variation short state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.)), the game board 4 (game board) of FIG. An upper plate of the upper decoration unit 280 provided in the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 (production display device) of the game board 4, the U-shaped transparent projection sheet 1150A (projection surface) of FIG. 11, and the door frame 5 of FIG. The projector 1850 (projection unit) of the side display device 1820 and the peripheral control MPU 4150a (effect control unit) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In the game board 4 of FIG. 11, a game area 1100 is formed. The gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of the gaming board 4 in FIG. 11 can visually recognize the display surface from a predetermined part of the gaming board 4 in FIG. The display area (that is, the display surface) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory device 2300 to be arranged. A transparent projection sheet 1150A having a U-shape in FIG. 11 is provided in a part of the game board 4 in FIG. 11 different from a predetermined part in which the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 in FIG. 11 is provided. Specifically, it is provided in the area of the game area 1100 and the outer periphery extending from the center to the lower side of the center accessory 2300. The upper decorative unit 280 provided on the door frame 5 in FIG. 7 can display a predetermined image from the outside of the transparent projection sheet 1150A and project it on the transparent projection sheet 1150A. . Peripheral control MPU 4150a can control the production based on the progress of the game by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG.

  Specifically, as described above, the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the gaming area 1100, but the player can play the gaming area. A hand or the like is inserted into the game area 1100 so that the game ball, the obstacle nail, the various winning holes, the bonuses, etc. in the game area 1100 cannot be touched.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a cell image of the sea floor is pasted on the surface of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, and the game area 1100 and the center accessory 2300 formed on the game board 4 are also displayed. In the area from the center to the outer periphery, as shown in FIG. 11, a transparent projection sheet 1150A having a U-shape is attached to the front surface of the cell image of the game panel 1150.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the effect display by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of FIG. 11 by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 68 based on the progress of the game. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the projector 1850 of the upper pan side display device 1820 of the upper decoration unit 280 can be controlled to project a decoration effect image on the transparent projection sheet 1150A. ing.

  Specifically, a school of fish swimming on the seabed is performed as an effect that suggests the possibility of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (ie, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur).

  An effect control program in which such effect control is executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a will be briefly described. The effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, for example, the main control board in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. Various commands received from the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 71 in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Perform analysis. When the analyzed command is, for example, a special figure 1 synchronized production start command classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronized production shown in FIG. 40, the production control program enters a mode indicating the variation of the production constituting the command. Based on the designated production pattern (which is based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established by following the production pattern designated in the mode indicating the variation of this production), the fish production shown in FIG. 78 is performed. As shown, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are copied to the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. Peripheral control RAM 4150 extracted from area 4150ce It is set to 4150cae to schedule data storage area of.

  For example, the screen generation schedule data associated with the production mode of the fish school effect shown in FIG. 78 (a school of fish formed in a size of about 50% of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) When the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the control unit steady process. In the display data creation process of step S1030 in the process, the pointer of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Picture shown by The data extracted from various control data copy area 4150ce near control ROM4150b or peripheral control RAM4150c near the control unit 4150 outputs to the tone generator built VDP4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the upper plate side display device 1820. To the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150 </ b> A and the entire front surface of each unit and displayed, and also projected and displayed from the upper plate side display device 1820 to the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs the signal from the channel CH2 shown in FIG. As a result, an image corresponding to the progress of the fish school effect is projected onto the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A and the entire front surface of the various units. At this time, when an effect (not shown) related to the fish school effect is advanced on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405), the effect is displayed. It will be.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b on the basis of the input screen data to create sprite data to generate the game board side liquid crystal. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed in the display area of the display device 1900 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Then, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process, the effect control program stores the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the above-described display data creation process. The VDP 4160a outputs to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 shown in FIG. As a result, an image corresponding to the progress of the fish school effect is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  As described above, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided in a predetermined part of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 11, and the game board is different from the predetermined part in which the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. A transparent projection sheet 1150 </ b> A having a U-shape is provided at a portion 4. As a predetermined image, a decoration effect image is projected toward the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A and the entire surfaces of various units (the attacker unit 2100, the side prize port member 2200, the variable prize port unit 2100A). The effect image to be projected is projected onto the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A from the upper pan side display device 1820 provided in the door frame 5 of FIG. 7 which is outside the transparent projection sheet 1150A. Therefore, the entire surface of the transparent projection sheet 1150A having a U-shape can realize a completely new decoration effect that has never been achieved before. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the decoration effect and enhance the gaming interest.

  Moreover, the rotation pressing operation part 405 arrange | positioned in the approximate center of the front-view front-back left-right direction of the upper-plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 of FIG. 7 as a decoration is an operation part which a player can operate. Peripheral control MPU 4150a shows variations of effects constituting commands received and analyzed from various commands from main control board 4100 by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. According to the effect pattern specified in the mode, a predetermined condition is established, and based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the ladybird images shown in FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c) (that is, 7 on the door frame 5 of FIG. 7 so as to project from the outside of the rotary press operation unit 405 and project the image on the rotary press operation unit 405. Since the upper display unit 1820 (projection means) of the upper decoration unit 280 can be controlled, the image displayed on the rotary pressing operation unit 405 (that is, the “ladybug image” of the projection rotation image described above) ”Or“ Ladybird image ”instead of other“ type of image to be projected ”) can indicate to the player the outcome of the game (expected degree of occurrence of a big hit gaming state).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays, as an image matched with the contour of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 as the operation unit, by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. On the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 shown in FIG. 77, “an image of a stationary ladybird (that is, an image of a ladybird as an image that matches the contour of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 (still image))” is shown in FIG. On the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405, “an image of a mode in which a ladybird image rotates around the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 in a clockwise direction (motion image)” is selectively displayed (that is, a still image) The effect can be advanced by projecting and then the action image can be selected (in other words, the effect can be advanced by switching from the still image to the action image). Because, still image by decorative effects to be displayed on the rotation pressing unit 405, and it is possible to achieve the decorative effect of the operation image, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect. In addition to the combination of still images and motion images, a combination of still images and motion images, such as a combination of still images, motion images, and still images, or a combination of motion images, still images, and motion images Since the decorative effect can be achieved, the variation of the production can be further increased.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a replaces the rotary pressing operation unit 405 as the operation unit with the operation unit 400 in FIG. 7 in the motor and solenoid drive processing (drive control means) in step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. It can drive with the drive motor 414 (electric drive source) with which it is equipped. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is controlled by the upper dish side display device 1820 (projection means) of the upper decoration unit 280 provided in the door frame 5 of FIG. 7 by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The display mode of the image displayed on the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and the rotation pressing that drives the drive motor 414 included in the operation unit 400 by the motor and solenoid drive processing in step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption processing of FIG. The combination of the operation mode of the operation unit 405 and the game result can be suggested to the player. Therefore, the display mode of the image displayed on the rotation press operation unit 405 and the rotation press operation unit 405 The game result (expected degree of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) by combining with the driving mode of the player Since it can be suggested, it is possible to find the relationship between such a combination and the result of the game (expectation of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) by the player's own idea, which contributes to the suppression of the player's game decline. be able to.

  Then, the upper dish side display device 1820 (projecting means) of the upper decoration unit 280 provided in the door frame 5 of FIG. 7 serves as a decoration body in the front-rear and left-right directions of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 of FIG. The upper decoration unit 280 is provided with a distance measuring sensor 1822 (object detection means) that can detect in a non-contact manner whether or not an object has entered a region projected on the rotary pressing operation unit 405 disposed substantially at the center. ing. The distance measuring sensor 1822 is a position where the player's finger or hand (object) enters the upper area of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (more precisely, the distance measuring sensor 1822 and the player's finger or hand). The distance dimension) can be detected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the player's finger or hand has not entered the area projected on the rotary pressing operation unit 405 by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. When this is done, a predetermined condition is established by following the effect pattern specified in the mode indicating the effect variation constituting the command received and analyzed from the main control board 4100. Is changed, the image projected on the rotary press operation unit 405 is changed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player's finger or hand enters the area projected on the rotary press operation unit 405, the rotary press is performed. It is possible to stop projecting an image on the operation unit 405. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image projected on the rotary press operation unit 405 from being displayed on the finger or hand of the player who has entered the area projected on the rotary press operation unit 405. The shade by the player's finger or hand can be prevented from being reflected on the rotation pressing operation unit 405 (and the surface of the upper plate upper panel 314). Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a has the player's fingers and hands enter the upper region of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. It is determined that the player's finger or hand is positioned at a position where the effect image projected from the door frame side display device 1821 is not reflected on the player's finger or hand. When it does, the projection to the whole inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 by the door frame side display device 1821 is continued, while the effect image projected from the door frame side display device 1821 is reflected on the player's finger or hand When it is determined that the player's finger or hand is positioned, the projection on the entire inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 by the door frame side display device 1821 is stopped.

[19. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the output signal from the OUT terminal that is the output terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 illustrated in FIG. 19A is the above-described offset adjustment failure signal, normal connection signal, depending on the timing. , And the magnet detection signal. By setting the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal to HI (logic H), it is possible to notify the main control board 4100 that the offset adjustment has been unsuccessful (failed), and the logic of the normal connection signal is HI ( The logic H) is maintained and set for 30 ms, and the logic L and the logic H are alternately repeated for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four periods) to indicate that there is an abnormal connection state. The logic of the magnet detection signal is set to HI (logic H), so that the magnet detection state can be transmitted to the main control board 4100. In these cases, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) creates the same command, that is, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display command that is classified into the notification display shown in FIG. Although it was stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 45, it is not the same command, It may be an individual command.

  For example, when the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal is set to HI (logic H) and the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed), the above-described offset retry counter ORC has a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 10 times)), an offset adjustment unsuccessful display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interruption process of 45. Further, the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained and set to HI (logic H) for 30 ms, and the logic L and logic H are alternately repeated to reach a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four periods). When the state is a state, the above-described normal connection flag NCK-FLG is set to a value of 0, and an abnormal connection display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created. It can be stored in the area and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Further, when the magnet detection signal is set to HI (logic H) and the magnet detection state is set, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display command classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 41 is created and transmitted as an abnormal state. Information can be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process of FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, the output signal from the OUT terminal that is the output terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A is the above-described offset adjustment failure signal, normal connection signal, depending on the timing. , And the magnet detection signal. By setting the logic of the offset adjustment unsuccessful signal to HI (logic H), it is possible to notify the main control board 4100 that the offset adjustment has been unsuccessful (failed), and the logic of the normal connection signal is HI ( The logic H) is maintained and set for 30 ms, and the logic L and the logic H are alternately repeated for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four periods) to indicate that there is an abnormal connection state. The logic of the magnet detection signal is set to HI (logic H), so that the magnet detection state can be transmitted to the main control board 4100. In these cases, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) outputs a single signal, ie, a magnetic detection switch abnormality signal that indicates that the magnetic detection switch is in an abnormal state from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. The magnetic detection switch abnormality signal is configured so that the Hall computer can determine which one of the unsuccessful (failure), abnormal connection state, and magnet detection state in the offset adjustment is performed. May be configured to be different (for example, the ON / OFF signal ratio (duty ratio) is changed as the ON / OFF signal waveform). In this way, in the hall computer electrically connected to the external terminal board 786, the magnetic detection switch is used when it is determined that the offset adjustment is unsuccessful (failed) or abnormally connected based on the waveform of the magnetic detection switch abnormal signal. A state where an abnormality has occurred in 3024 can be grasped, and when a magnet detection state is determined, the presence of a magnet goto can be grasped.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y that creates + 12V for magnetic detection that is a dedicated power supply for the magnetic detection switch with respect to the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 30 shown in FIG. And a magnetic detection power source drive circuit 4100x capable of supplying and shutting off the power of + 12V for magnetic detection by the magnetic detection power supply circuit 4100y are provided on the main control board 4100, respectively. 4161 may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, only one detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 22 cm is provided on the main control board 4100. However, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is provided. May be selected from a plurality of preset detection distances SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024. For example, as the detection distance setting circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100, a 24cm detection distance setting circuit 4100za for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 24 cm and a detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are set to 22 cm. 22 cm detection distance setting circuit 4100zb, 20 cm detection distance setting circuit 4100zc for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 20 cm, and 18 cm detection distance setting for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 18 cm The circuit 4100zd may be provided, or the 22cm detection distance setting circuit 4100zb for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 22 cm and the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 are set to 20cm. 20cm detection distance setting circuit 4100zc may be provided, or the 24cm detection distance setting circuit 4100za for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 24 cm and the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 may be set. 22 cm detection distance setting circuit 4100zb for setting to 22 cm, 20 cm detection distance setting circuit 4100zc for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 20 cm, and detection distance SR for setting the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 18 cm 18 cm detection distance setting circuit 4100zd, 16 cm detection distance setting circuit 4100ze for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 16 cm, 14 cm detection distance for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 14 cm Teikairo 4100Zf, and detection distance SR in the magnetic detection switch 3024 may be configured with a 12cm detection range setting circuit 4100zg for setting the 12cm.

  In the embodiment described above, the detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 22 cm is provided on the main control board 4100. However, the detection distance setting circuit 4100z may be provided on the panel relay terminal plate 4161. . As described above, the detection distance SR is narrowed down by experiment to the extent to which the detection distance SR is set with respect to the fixed position of the magnetic detection switch 3024 designed by the game board designer, and the detected detection distance SR is set as the detection distance setting circuit. Although the detection distance SR is set at 4100z, the detection distance SR is assumed based on the assumption that the approach of an illegal magnet cannot be accurately determined with the detection distance SR narrowed down by an experiment according to the environment in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall. Panel relay terminal plate 4161 provided with detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting to 24 cm, panel relay terminal plate 4161 provided with detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting detection distance SR to 22 cm, and detection distance SR Panel relay terminal board 4161 provided with detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting to 20 cm Panel relay terminal plate 4161 provided with a detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR to 18 cm, panel relay terminal plate 4161 provided with a detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR to 16 cm, Panel relay terminal plate 4161 provided with a detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR to 14 cm, and panel relay terminal plate 4161 provided with a detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR to 12 cm. Of these, only those that can be attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed in the hall one by one and can accurately determine the approach of an unauthorized magnet can be employed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. 21, and the magnetic detection control side in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. The processing proceeded in the order of the connection confirmation processing in step SM25 in the startup processing and the magnetic detection in step SM30 in the magnetic detection control side main processing in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. The offset adjustment process in step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process in the detection control side power-on process, the connection confirmation process in step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. In the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. Step SM20 ′ as connection confirmation processing, magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. 21 in magnetic detection control side activation processing, step SM25 ′ as offset adjustment processing in step SM20, and magnetic detection control side power-on processing in FIG. The process may proceed in the order of magnetic detection at step SM30 in the main process of the magnetic detection control side.

  In such a case, it is necessary to reverse the order of the determination of the offset adjustment determination substrate ODT and the determination of the connection state determination period CDT in the failure detection processing at the time of starting the magnetic detection switch in FIG. The control flow from the determination in step S162 to the process in step S182 in the magnetic detection switch activation defect determination process, and the process in step S192 from the determination in step S184 in the magnetic detection switch activation defect determination process in FIG. The order of the control flow up to the process or the control flow to the process of step S182 following the process or the process of step S192 and the process of step S182 is also reversed. That is, if the determination in step S160 is NO (the startup state determination timer SDTMR is not started), this routine is terminated as it is, while the determination in step S160 is YES (the startup state determination timer SDTMR is In step S184, it is determined based on the startup state determination timer SDTMR whether or not it is within the connection state determination period CDT. If the determination in step S184 is YES (within the connection state determination period CDT), the control flow from the process in step S186 to the process in step S192 (following the process in step S190 or the process in step S192) The process proceeds as S180, and the control flow proceeds to the process of step S182.) The process proceeds and the routine is terminated as it is, while the determination of step S184 is NO (not within the connection state determination period CDT). In step S162, it is determined whether or not it is within the offset adjustment determination period ODT based on the startup state determination processing timer SDTMR. If the determination in step S162 is YES (within the offset adjustment determination period ODT), the process proceeds as a control flow from the process in step S164 to the process in step S182, and this routine is terminated while step S162 is completed. If the determination is NO (not within the offset adjustment determination period ODT), this routine is terminated as it is.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 22 cm is provided on the main control board 4100, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The voltage applied to the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal can be set. Of these CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminals, the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is selected for a specific terminal (for example, the CTL terminal 0). In addition to the function that can set a range (region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere) from the reference point to the detection distance where the magnetism can be detected. Abnormality due to the connection confirmation process in step SM25 in the magnetism detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of 21 In the case of having a function capable of setting an instruction as to whether or not to output a determination result as to whether or not the connection is in the connected state, the voltage applied to the specific terminal is connected to the main control board 4100 from the main control MPU 4100a. It may be set by a confirmation determination result request signal.

  Specifically, when the power supply of +12 V for magnetic detection is started to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A, the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c checks the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in the CTL terminal input process of step SM10 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. Therefore, before this processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the voltage applied to the CTL0 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 (the logic of the connection confirmation determination result request signal is LOW (logic L)). By pulling down to the ground side, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 performs the CTL terminal input process of step SM10 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. The CTL1 terminal is grounded by the hardware of the detection distance setting circuit 4100z provided on the main control board 4100, and the CTL2 terminal is pulled up to the + 12V side for magnetic detection by the pull-up resistor MR10, so that the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 Terminal logic is LOW (logic L , The logic of the CTL2 terminal is determined to be set to the HI (logic H). Then, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 performs the magnetic detection distance setting process in step SM15 in the magnetic detection control side activation process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. Processing is performed, and then connection confirmation processing in step SM25 is performed. In the connection process of step SM25, as described above, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shows the logic of the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. A connection confirmation timer (not shown) is used as a timer for measuring the connection state determination period CDT (in this embodiment, 1000 ms is set) so that the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Start up.

  Based on the connection confirmation timer, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts from the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 before the output preparation period (in this embodiment, it is set to 20 ms). Based on the logic of the connection confirmation determination result request signal, the logic set in the CTL0 terminal is set to the inverted logic and then restored to the original logic (in this example, the logic L set in the CTL0 terminal is inverted. When the output preparation period elapses, the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal checked in the CTL terminal input process in step SM10 is checked again, and the CTL0 terminal to CTL2 is set. When even one of the terminal logics has changed, it is determined that there is an abnormal connection state, and the connection state determination period In CDT, if the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained at LOW (logic L) for 30 ms from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A to the main control board 4100, the logic is set to HI (logic H ) Is maintained for 30 ms, and logic L and logic H are alternately repeated and output for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 4 periods), while at least one of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to CTL2 terminal is logic When there is no change, it is determined that the connection state is normal, and the logic of the normal connection signal from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A toward the main control board 4100 in the connection state determination period CDT. Is maintained at LOW (logic L) and output. When the connection state determination period CDT elapses, the connection confirmation timer is stopped and the connection confirmation timer is initialized in preparation for the next activation. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is based on the logic of the connection confirmation determination result request signal from the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 based on the connection confirmation timer until the output preparation period elapses. , When there is no change in the logic set in the CTL0 terminal (in this example, when the logic L set in the CTL0 terminal is maintained), when the output preparation period elapses, the CTL terminal input in step SM10 Even if the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal examined in the processing is examined once again and one of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal has changed in logic, it is determined that the abnormal connection state exists. a) toward the main control board 4100 from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Sets and outputs maintain logical connection signal to LOW (logic L).

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the OFFSET terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 of FIG. 19A is the OFFSET terminal input process of step SM35 in the magnetic detection control side main process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. , The logic state of the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 is checked, and when the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal is HI (logic H), the offset adjustment process of step SM45 is performed. Is set to indicate whether or not to output the determination result as to whether or not the abnormal connection state is caused by the connection confirmation processing in step SM25 in the magnetic detection control side activation processing in the magnetic detection control side power-on processing of FIG. The main control MPU 4100 of the main control board 4100 if it also has a function as a terminal that can be used. It may be allowed to be set by the connection confirmation determination result request signal from the. As described above, the offset adjustment execution request signal from the main control board 4100 is (1) the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 and closed with the door frame 5 closed to the main body frame 3. (2) When the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3 while the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, (3) ) The door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the main body frame 3 is 2, when the state is closed, the logic is maintained at HI (logic H) for a predetermined period (100 ms in this embodiment), The logic is maintained at LOW (logic L).

  Specifically, when the power supply of +12 V for magnetic detection is started to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A, the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c of FIG. 21 includes a CTL terminal input process at step SM10, a magnetic detection distance setting process at step SM15, and an offset adjustment process at step SM20 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. Subsequently, the connection confirmation processing in step SM25 is performed. In the connection process of step SM25, as described above, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shows the logic of the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. A connection confirmation timer (not shown) is used as a timer for measuring the connection state determination period CDT (in this embodiment, 1000 ms is set) so that the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Start up.

  Based on the connection confirmation timer, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 starts from the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 before the output preparation period (in this embodiment, it is set to 20 ms). Based on the logic of the connection confirmation determination result request signal (in the period from power-on to this point of time, since none of the above (1) to (3) corresponds to any of the above, the offset offset adjustment execution request signal The logic is still set to LOW (logic L), and the logic of the connection confirmation determination result request signal is also set to LOW (logic L).), The logic set to the OFFSET terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 When L is set to the inverted logic H and then returned (set) to the original logic L again, when the output preparation period elapses, step SM1 The logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal examined in the CTL terminal input process is checked once more, and when any one of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal has changed, it is determined that the connection is abnormal. In the connection state determination period CDT, if the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained at LOW (logic L) for 30 ms from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. HI (logic H) is maintained and set for 30 ms, and logic L and logic H are alternately repeated to output a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 4 periods), while the logic of the CTL0 terminal to CTL2 terminal is When even one of the logics has not changed, it is determined that the connection state is normal, and the magnetic field shown in FIG. Toward the OUT terminal of the detection switch 3024 to the main control board 4100 and outputs the set maintains the logic of the successful connection signal to LOW (logic L). When the connection state determination period CDT elapses, the connection confirmation timer is stopped and the connection confirmation timer is initialized in preparation for the next activation. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is based on the logic of the connection confirmation determination result request signal from the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 based on the connection confirmation timer until the output preparation period elapses. When the logic set in the OFFSET terminal does not change (in this example, when the logic L set in the OFFSET terminal is maintained), the output preparation period elapses and the CTL terminal in step SM10 Even if the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal checked in the input processing is checked once again and one of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal has changed in logic, it is determined that the abnormal connection state exists. From the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in (a) to the main control board 4100 Te and outputs the set maintains the logic of the successful connection signal to LOW (logic L).

  In the above-described embodiment, a detection distance setting circuit 4100z for setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to 22 cm is provided on the main control board 4100, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The voltage applied to the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal can be set, but the voltage applied to the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal is set by a detection distance setting signal from the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. You may be able to do that.

  Specifically, when the power supply of +12 V for magnetic detection is started to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A, the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c checks the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in the CTL terminal input process of step SM10 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. For this reason, before this process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the voltage applied to the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 to the ground side with respect to the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal. The detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 can be set to 22 cm by setting and outputting the logic of the detection distance setting signal that can be pulled up to the + 12V side for magnetic detection with respect to the CTL2 terminal. Of these CTL0 terminal to CTL2 terminals, a specific terminal (for example, CTL terminal 0) is a detection that can detect magnetism from this reference point with the center position of the detection surface of the magnetic detection switch 3024 as a reference point. In addition to the function of setting a range extending to the distance (region extending from the reference point to the radius SR of the sphere), the steps in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. In the case of having a function capable of setting an instruction as to whether or not to output a determination result as to whether or not an abnormal connection state is detected by the SM25 connection confirmation processing, the voltage applied to the specific terminal is set to the main control board 4100. May be set by a connection confirmation determination result request signal from the main control MPU 4100a.

  Specifically, when the power supply of +12 V for magnetic detection is started to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A, the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The magnetic detection control IC 3024c checks the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 in the CTL terminal input process of step SM10 in the magnetic detection control side activation process of the magnetic detection control side power-on process of FIG. At this time, the voltage applied to the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal is pulled down to the ground side and applied to the CTL2 terminal by the logic of the detection distance setting signal set and output by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. Therefore, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 has the logic of the CTL0 terminal and the CTL1 terminal set to LOW (logic L) and the logic of the CTL2 terminal set to HI (logic H). ) Is set to each. Then, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 performs the magnetic detection distance setting process in step SM15 in the magnetic detection control side activation process in the magnetic detection control side power-on process in FIG. Processing is performed, and then connection confirmation processing in step SM25 is performed. In the connection process of step SM25, as described above, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shows the logic of the normal connection signal output from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. A connection confirmation timer (not shown) is used as a timer for measuring the connection state determination period CDT (in this embodiment, 1000 ms is set) so that the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Start up.

  Based on the connection confirmation timer, the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 receives the control signal to the CTR0 terminal until the output preparation period (in this embodiment, it is set to 20 ms). When the setting signal is switched to the connection confirmation determination result request signal, the logic set in the CTL0 terminal is set to the inverted logic, and the control signal to the CTR0 terminal is switched again from the connection confirmation determination result request signal to the detection distance setting signal. When returning in place, the logic is restored to the original logic (in this example, the logic L of the detection distance setting signal set and output by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is set at the CTL0 terminal). The logic of the connection confirmation determination result request signal is set to the logic H of the inverted logic L, and the logic of the connection confirmation determination result request signal is By returning to the logic of the detection distance setting signal set and output by the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100, the original logic L is set to the CTL0 terminal), and when the output preparation period elapses, the CTL terminal input process of step SM10 The logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal checked in step S1 is checked again, and if any of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal has changed, it is determined that the connection state is abnormal, and the connection state determination period CDT When the logic of the normal connection signal is maintained at LOW (logic L) for 30 ms from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 19A toward the main control board 4100, the logic is set to HI (logic H). Is maintained for 30 ms, and logic L and logic H are alternately repeated for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, four cycles). On the other hand, when one of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal is not changed, it is determined that the connection state is normal, and the connection state determination period CDT is shown in FIG. 19A. The logic of the normal connection signal is maintained and set to LOW (logic L) from the OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 toward the main control board 4100 and output. When the connection state determination period CDT elapses, the connection confirmation timer is stopped and the connection confirmation timer is initialized in preparation for the next activation. Note that the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 indicates that the control signal from the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 to the CTR0 terminal is a detection distance setting signal before the output preparation period elapses based on the connection confirmation timer. Is not switched to the connection confirmation determination result request signal, and when there is no change in the logic of the CTL0 terminal (in this example, when the logic L set in the CTL0 terminal is maintained), the output preparation period is When the time has elapsed, the logic of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal checked in the CTL terminal input process in step SM10 is checked again, and if any one of the logics of the CTL0 terminal to the CTL2 terminal has changed, it is in an abnormal connection state. The OUT terminal of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. The logic of the successful connection signal towards the main control board 4100 LOW set maintained (logic L) outputted from.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main frame door opening signal from the dispensing control board 4110 is input to the main control board 4100, and (1) the door frame 5 is connected to the main body frame 3 based on the logic of the main frame door opening signal. When the main body frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a closed state, (2) the door frame 5 is closed with the main body frame 3 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the body frame 3, (3) the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the state shown in FIG. In the offset adjustment execution request process in step S105C in the main control timer interrupt process The offset adjustment shown in FIG. 22 with respect to the magnetic detection control IC 3024c of the magnetic detection switch 3024 only once when the main frame door is changed from the opened state to the closed state. Since the logic of the offset adjustment execution request signal can be set so as to perform processing, the game board 4 is provided with the magnetic detection switch 3024 (magnetic detection means) in FIG. The magnetic detection switch 3024 may be provided in the door frame 5 among the front frame constituted by 3 and the door frame 5. As a case where the magnetic detection switch 3024 is disposed on the door frame 5, on the back side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. It is preferable to arrange it between the portion 405. In this way, by setting the detection distance SR of the magnetic detection switch 3024 (for example, 22 cm), the two general winning ports 2201 of the side winning port member 2200 shown in FIG. 2201, left and right general winning ports 2104 and 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, an upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, a lower starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100, a large winning port 2013 of the attacker unit 2100, and an out port 1151. be able to.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring from the magnetic detection switch 3024 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. However, the wiring from the magnetic detection switch 3024 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100. Alternatively, it may be directly connected.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, on the straight line between the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2300 and passing through the upper middle point of the gaming panel 1150 and the lower middle point of the gaming panel 1150 shown in FIG. That is, by arranging the magnetic detection switch 3024 on the vertical center line of the game panel 1150 and setting the detection distance SR to 22 cm, the two general winning ports of the side winning port member 2200 shown in FIG. 2201, 2201, left and right general winning ports 2104, 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, an upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, a lower starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100, a large winning port 2013 of the attacker unit 2100, and an out port 1151 It was supposed to be able to fit, but side entry The two general winning ports 2201 and 2201 of the mouth member 2200, the left and right general winning ports 2104 and 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the lower starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100, and the large of the attacker unit 2100 In addition to the winning port 2013 and the out port 1151, the arrangement of the magnetic detection switch 3024 and the detection distance SR may be set so as to accommodate the warp inlet 2302 of the center accessory 2300. For example, the magnetic detection switch 3024 is disposed above the second shelf 2203 of the side prize opening member 2200 shown in FIG. 9, and the magnetic detection SR is set to 24 cm.

  In the above-described embodiment, the transparent projection sheet 1150A having the U-shape in FIG. 11 is formed as one projection sheet, and the transparent projection sheet 1150A has a U-shape, and thus has a symmetrical shape. However, it may be divided into a transparent left projection sheet 1150AL and a transparent right projection sheet 1150AR.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the transparent projection sheet 1150A having the U-shape in FIG. The projection sheet 1150 </ b> A may be formed on the surface of the game panel 1150 with a size corresponding to the size of the game area 1100. At this time, the size of the game area 1100 may be formed by dividing the transparent projection sheet 1150A into a plurality of sheets.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the transparent projection sheet 1150A having the U shape of FIG. 11 is provided in the area between the game area 1100 and the outer periphery extending from the center to the lower side of the center accessory 2300. The projection sheet 1150A may be provided on the surface of the gaming panel 1150 by forming the projection sheet 1150A in a shape corresponding to the size only in the left region of the gaming region 1100 (when divided in the middle of the gaming region 1100). The game area 1100 may be formed on the surface of the game panel 1150 in a shape corresponding to the size only in the right area of the game area 1100 (when the game area 1100 is divided into left and right in the center).

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the transparent projection sheet 1150A having the U-shape in FIG. It may be provided on a surface (rolling surface) on which the game ball can roll.

  And in embodiment mentioned above, it forms as a smooth surface so that the whole front surface of the side prize port member 2200 of the game board 4 of FIG. 11 can display an effect image as a projection surface, and is black (it may be gray). 11, the entire front surface of the attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 of FIG. 11 is formed as a smooth surface so that the effect image can be displayed as a projection surface, painted in black (may be gray), and The entire front surface (including the entire front surface of the movable piece 2106) of the 11 variable prize opening units 2100A is formed as a smooth surface so that it can display an effect image as a projection surface and painted in black (may be gray) However, other single colors may be used. Compared to black (gray), the other single color is applied to the entire front face of the side prize opening member 2200, the entire front face of the attacker unit 2100, and the entire front face of the variable prize opening unit 2100A in the door frame 5 of FIG. This is because the hue used in the effect image projected from the upper dish side display device 1820 provided may be clearly displayed in some cases.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a predetermined condition is established by following an effect pattern specified in a mode indicating an effect variation that constitutes a command analyzed by receiving and analyzing various commands from the main control board 4100, Based on the fact that this predetermined condition is satisfied, an image of a mode in which a ladybird image displayed (displayed) on the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 rotates when it rotates around the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 in a clockwise direction. In addition to the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405, the flash light changes in all directions on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 except the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405. The production was progressed with images that were changed and released one after another, but the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 and the rotation The upper dish side display device provided in the upper decoration unit 280 provided in the door frame 5 of FIG. 7 by one or both of the entire surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 excluding the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. You may enable it to set so that the production | presentation by 1820 may advance. For example, when the rotary press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. When the rotary press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is being demonstrated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal. Since it is displayed on the display device 1900, in this setting mode, the upper surface of the rotation press operation unit 405 and the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 excluding the upper surface of the rotation press operation unit 405 , Display a setting screen on which one or both of them can be set, and power on the pachinko gaming machine 1 After that, if it is within a predetermined time, an attendant such as a hall clerk operates the rotary pressing operation unit 405 to remove the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 and the upper plate of the dish unit 300 excluding the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405. The entire surface of the upper panel 314 can be set so that an effect by the upper plate side display device 1820 can be advanced by one or both of them, and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. If it is within a certain period, an attendant such as a store clerk in the hall or a player operates the rotary pressing operation unit 405 to remove the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 and the upper surface of the dish unit 300 excluding the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405. It can set so that the production | presentation by the upper plate | pan side display apparatus 1820 may advance by either one or both among the surface of the whole plate upper panel 314.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a predetermined condition is established by following an effect pattern specified in a mode indicating an effect variation that constitutes a command that is analyzed by receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, and Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, an image of a mode in which the ladybird image displayed (displayed) on the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 rotates around the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 in a clockwise direction. In addition to the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405, the flash light changes in all directions on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 except the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405. The production progressed with images that were released after being changed one after another. As a mode indicating the position of the upper plate, either the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 or the entire upper surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the pan unit 300 excluding the upper surface of the rotary press operation unit 405 may be used. It may be designed in advance so as to designate an effect pattern having a combination of progressing effects by the side display device 1820, or based on a random value extracted by random number lottery by an effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The upper plate side display device 1820 uses either one or both of the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 and the entire surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 excluding the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405. You may determine the combination of progressing production. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as the decorative body, the rotary pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the approximate center in the front-rear and left-right directions of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 in FIG. You may comprise so that multiple rotation press operation parts may be provided in the upper plate | upper upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 as a some decoration body. For example, as a plurality of decorative bodies, rotational press operation parts 405A, 405B, 405C are arranged on the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 so as to be spaced apart from each other, and on the upper surfaces of the rotary press operation parts 405A, 405B, 405C, respectively. A stationary ladybird image may be projected and displayed to change to a rotating image when the ladybird image goes round, or a stationary ladybird image may be projected on the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405A. The image of the beetle that is displayed and changed to rotate around the image of the beetle is displayed, and the image of the beetle that is stationary is displayed on the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405B, and the image of the image that rotates when the image of the beetle is rotated is changed. An image of a butterfly that is stationary on the upper surface of the rotary pressing operation unit 405C is displayed. May be changed to an image aspect image butterfly is rotated round and round with. In this case, you may comprise so that an effect can be advanced by selecting any one among rotation press operation part 405A, 405B, 405C, or an effect is advanced by selecting any two. You may comprise so that it can do, and you may comprise so that presentation can be advanced by selecting all three. Note that such a selection may be designed in advance so as to designate a production pattern having a combination as a mode indicating a variation of production that constitutes various commands from the main control board 4100, or peripheral control. The combination may be determined based on the random number value extracted by the random number lottery by the effect control program executed by the MPU 4150a.

  And in embodiment mentioned above, the production control program is the rotation press shown to FIG. 77 (a)-(c) in the upper plate upper panel 314 whole (including the upper surface of the rotation press operation part 405) of the plate unit 300. FIG. The player is displayed in the upper region of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 in order to press the rotary pressing operation unit 405 when the player displays an effect prompting the player to press the operation unit 405. 68 to prevent the effect image projected from the upper display device 1820 from appearing on the player's finger or hand when it is determined that the player's finger or hand is in the state. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated in the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process in step S1030 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the power-on process Among them, the drawing data output to the upper dish display device 1820 is controlled so that the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is not output from the channel CH2 to the upper dish display device 1820 in the display data output process of step S1016 in the same process. Therefore, nothing is displayed on the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405), and therefore the entire upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (the rotation Including the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405.) It is not possible to know how the effect that progresses in the end will be developed. The player does not press the rotation pressing operation unit 405, so that the stage effect on the entire upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (including the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405) is finally developed. However, in this case, there arises a problem that the player cannot obtain a privilege due to the pressing operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405.

  Therefore, for example, instead of the pressing operation of the rotation pressing operation unit 405, the entire upper plate upper panel 314 (the upper surface of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 is configured by providing a pressing operation unit on another member. In addition, the player can confirm how the effect that is proceeding in the final stage will be developed, and the player presses the pressing operation portion provided on the other member to rotate and press. Assuming that the operation unit 405 has been pressed, the player can obtain a privilege due to the pressing operation of the rotary pressing operation unit 405. As a configuration in which the pressing operation unit is provided on the other member, for example, the player rotates the front of the rotating handle body 506 by providing the pressing operation unit in the vicinity of the single button described above in the handle device 500 shown in FIG. It may be designed so that the pressing operation unit can be pressed with the right thumb that is being operated, or by providing a pressing operation unit at a position rotated about 120 degrees clockwise from the single button described above, It may be designed such that the player can press the pressing operation portion with the right index finger that is turning the front 506 of the rotary handle. With this configuration, a player who feels troublesome pressing operation by extending a finger or a hand to the rotation pressing operation unit 405 can also be provided in the handle device 500 so that the player can The pressing operation unit can be operated with the right hand that is turning 506, and it can be made difficult to feel troublesome.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotary pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the approximate center in the front-rear and left-right directions of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 in FIG. You may comprise so that the three-dimensional molded object on which the image of this may be projected may be provided. For example, a case where a three-dimensional model is provided on the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 shown in FIG. 7 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a three-dimensional model is provided on the inner side wall of the right side decoration unit. As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the character body 205 projects toward the game window 101 as a three-dimensional shaped object in a region extending from approximately the center to the upper side of the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200. It is provided in the state. As shown in FIG. 81A, the door frame 5 in FIG. 7 in which an image (a uniform image having a striped pattern in the front-rear direction (horizontal striped pattern)) that matches the outline of the character body 205 is outside the character body 205. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), an image (an up-and-down striped pattern (vertical striped pattern) that is projected from the door frame side display device 1821 of the left side decoration unit 240 provided in FIG. Is projected from the door frame side display device 1821 of the left side decoration unit 240 provided in the door frame 5 of FIG. In this way, the character body 205 provided on the inner wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200 is projected from the door frame side display device 1821 of the left side decoration unit 240 so that the character body 205 is completely changed. No novel frame decoration can be realized. In addition, since the character body 205 is provided as a three-dimensional model body in a state extending toward the game window 101 in a region extending from approximately the center to the upper side of the inner side wall 201 of the right side decoration unit 200, the right side decoration The character body 205 is dressed by projecting the dressing of the character body 205 provided on the inner wall 201 of the unit 200 from the door frame side display device 1821 of the left side decoration unit 240 and the inside of the right side decoration unit 200. In addition to a message that conveys the contents related to the game and effects, an image that suggests the game result and the like are projected from the door frame side display device 1821 of the left side decoration unit 240 to an area extending from approximately the center to the lower side of the wall 201. Thus, it can be displayed below the character body 205.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotary pressing operation unit 405 disposed in the approximate center in the front-rear and left-right directions of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 in FIG. You may comprise so that the three-dimensional molded object on which the image of this may be projected may be provided. For example, a case where a three-dimensional model is provided in place of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in the case where a three-dimensional shaped body is provided in the approximate center in the front-rear and left-right directions of the upper plate upper panel of the dish unit. As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 is formed as a three-dimensional shaped body in place of the rotation pressing operation unit 405 at the approximate center in the front / rear / right / left direction of the upper plate upper panel 314. A hemisphere 406 is provided so as to protrude upward from the top. When a soccer reach effect with soccer as a motif is developed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 9, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), an image matched with the outline of the hemisphere 406 As shown in FIG. 7, an image of a soccer ball that is projected from the upper platen side display device 1820 provided on the door frame 5 of FIG. 7 outside the hemisphere 406 and is stationary is displayed as a still image or is rotated. An image of a soccer ball may be displayed as an operation image (an operation image including an image of a state in which the soccer ball is deformed into a kicked state and moves in the vertical and horizontal directions). Further, when a baseball reach effect based on baseball is developed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 9, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), it matches the contour of the hemisphere 406. As an image, an image of a baseball ball that is projected from the upper dish side display device 1820 provided on the door frame 5 of FIG. An image of a rotating baseball ball is displayed as an operation image (an operation image including an image of a state in which the baseball ball is deformed and moved in the vertical and horizontal directions while flying at high speed). Thus, the character body 205 is dressed by projecting the dressing of the hemispherical body 406 provided substantially in the center in the front / rear / left / right direction of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the door frame side display device 1821 of the left side decoration unit 240. It is possible to realize a novel frame decoration that has never been seen before.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as the decorative body, the rotary pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the approximate center in the front-rear and left-right directions of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 in FIG. You may comprise so that the rotation press operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 may be attached to another member. In this way, the front surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 can be used as one flat production area. Here, as a configuration for attaching the rotary pressing operation unit 405 that is a function of the operation unit 400 to another member, for example, by providing a pressing operation unit in the vicinity of the single button described above in the handle device 500 shown in FIG. The player may be designed so that the player can press the pressing portion with the right thumb that is turning the rotary handle main body 506. The player can rotate about 120 degrees clockwise from the single button described above. It may be designed so that the player can press and operate the pressing operation unit with the right index finger that is turning the front of the rotary handle body 506 by providing the pressing operation unit at the position. With this configuration, a player who feels troublesome pressing operation by extending a finger or a hand to the rotation pressing operation unit 405 can also be provided in the handle device 500 so that the player can The pressing operation unit can be operated with the right hand that is turning 506, and it can be made difficult to feel troublesome.

  In the embodiment described above, the entire surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 in FIG. 7 is painted black (may be gray), but may be another single color. When compared to black (gray), the effect image projected from the upper dish side display device 1820 of the upper decoration unit 280 provided in the door frame 5 of FIG. 7 is obtained by coating the entire surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 with another single color. This is because there is a case where the color used in the image can be clearly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light blue output terminal PT10 provided on the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 37 is shown in FIG. 8 based on a command (main prize ball number information output command) from the main control board 4100. The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in the various winning openings such as the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening 2102, the general winning opening 2104, 2201, and the large winning opening 2103 When the number reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.128 seconds. Further, the yellowish green output terminal PT11 provided on the external terminal plate 784 is either one of the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 provided in the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820 and the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821, respectively. If both of them are not working, or a path extending to the projector drive board 1800, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, and the projector drive board Among the paths extending to 1801, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, the projector drive board 1800 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 Electrically connected wiring, projector drive board 1801 and frame Wiring that electrically connects the drive amplifier board 194, wiring that electrically connects the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Of the wiring that electrically connects and the wiring that electrically connects the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140, assuming that one wiring or a plurality of wirings are disconnected, the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 are A maintenance information output signal was output to inform the inspection. As described above, the output terminal PT10 and the output terminal PT11 are configured to be able to output different signals. However, the output terminal PT10 and the output terminal PT11 are combined into one output terminal (for example, an output terminal). You may comprise so that it may share with PT10). The main prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10, whereas the maintenance information output signal is one of the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1. It is in an output state when one or both are not operating. Therefore, when the maintenance information output signal is not output, each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10, the convex type is output for a period of 0.128 seconds of the main prize ball number information output signal. The rectangular waveform can inform the hall computer that both of the air-cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 are operating and the number of scheduled game balls has reached ten, and a maintenance information output signal Is outputted, every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10, a concave rectangular waveform is generated for a period of 0.128 seconds of the main prize ball number information output signal (in other words, , By stopping the output of the maintenance information output signal for a period of 0.128 seconds of the main prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output By making a concave rectangular waveform (inverted rectangular waveform) around 0.128 seconds of the signal, either or both of the air-cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 are not operating, and the number of scheduled game balls Can tell the hall computer that has reached 10 balls. A control program that can accurately identify a hall computer even when a maintenance information output signal output from one output terminal (for example, output terminal PT10) and a main prize ball number information output signal are mixed. Is incorporated.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the projector 1850 and door frame of the upper dish display device 1820 in the projector monitoring process of step S1015 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. If either or both of the operating signals from the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 provided in the projector 1851 of the side display device 1821 are not input, it is assumed that either or both of the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 are not operating. Or a path extending to the projector driving board 1800, the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 4140, and the projector driving board 1801 and the frame decoration driving amplifier board. 194, peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 Of the paths extending to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140, wiring for electrically connecting the projector drive board 1800 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the projector drive board 1801 and the frame decoration drive amplifier Wiring for electrically connecting the board 194, wiring for electrically connecting the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and electrical connection between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 The air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 are inspected on the assumption that one wiring or a plurality of wirings are disconnected among the wiring connected to the frame and the wiring connecting the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control board 4140. A pachinko machine from the yellow-green output terminal PT11 provided on the external terminal board 784 with a maintenance information output signal for informing Output to the hall computer that is external to the wiring system, the wiring system that outputs from the output terminal PT11 to the hall computer, and the wiring system that outputs to the data counter disposed above the pachinko gaming machine 1 You may comprise so that each may branch. In this way, the data counter is in a state where, for example, blue light is emitted as an air-cooling device inspection light-emitting mode in which the air-cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 are inspected during a period in which the maintenance information output signal output from the output terminal PT11 is input. By maintaining the above, it is possible to notify a staff member such as a hall clerk who circulates in the hall.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes the projector 1850 and the door of the upper dish side display device 1820 in the projector monitoring process of step S1015 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. If one or both of the operating signals from the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 provided in the projector 1851 of the frame side display device 1821 are not input, either or both of the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 are not operated. A maintenance information output signal is transmitted from the yellow-green output terminal PT11 provided on the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 are inspected. Air cooling devices FAN0, FAN1 The operation in the signal et, through the external terminal board 784 may be configured to output the maintenance information output signal to the hall computer which is an external pachinko machine 1. In this case, an output terminal PT12 is newly provided on the external terminal plate 784, and an operating signal from the air cooling device FAN0 is output from the output terminal PT11 to the hall computer as a maintenance information output signal, and an operating signal from the air cooling device FAN1. Is output from the output terminal PT12 to the hall computer as a maintenance information output signal. The hall computer incorporates a control program that can identify and monitor the operating state of the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 based on the maintenance information output signals output from the output terminals PT11 and PT12. When the air-cooling device FAN0 is not in operation, an operation disable signal is output from the projector 1850 of the upper pan-side display device 1820 as a maintenance information output signal to the hall computer outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the external terminal plate 784. When the air-cooling device FAN1 is not in operation, a maintenance signal is output from the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 to the hall computer outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the external terminal plate 784. You may comprise so that it may output as a signal. In this case, the operation disable signal from the projector 1850 is output from the output terminal PT11 to the hall computer as a maintenance information output signal, and the operation disable signal from the projector 1851 is output from the output terminal PT12 to the hall computer as a maintenance information output signal. The hall computer incorporates a control program capable of monitoring the operating state of the air cooling devices FAN0 and FAN1 based on the maintenance information output signals output from the output terminals PT11 and PT12.

  In the above-described embodiment, the upper plate side is obtained by manually rotating the rotary front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a and the rotary left / right direction adjustment knob 1825b shown in FIG. Although the state in which the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the display device 1820 is shifted from the reference axis can be corrected, the front-rear direction adjustment knob that can electrically rotate the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1825a. A horizontal motor 1825a ′ (optical axis adjusting electric drive source) and a horizontal adjustment knob rotating motor 1825b ′ (optical axis adjusting electric drive) capable of electrically rotating the horizontal adjustment knob 1825b are provided. 70), the effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt of FIG. In the motor and solenoid drive process (optical axis adjustment drive control means) in step S1104 in the process, the front / rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825a ′ is driven to move the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a (forward or reverse rotation). And the left and right direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825b 'is driven and controlled so that the left and right direction adjustment knob 1825b is movable (rotated forward or backward). A reference that can project an image of a ladybird with the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the dish-side display device 1820 to the outline of the rotary press operation unit 405 from the outside of the rotary press operation unit 405 and project it on the rotary press operation unit 405. You may comprise so that control which adjusts to the state which agree | coincides with an axis | shaft can be performed.In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the power-on state, the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 is automatically adjusted, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall. When performing various operation inspections of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the installation work by eliminating the work of adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 by the installation operator. it can. Moreover, the light of the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 can be automated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself without the maintenance work of adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 by an attendant such as a hall clerk. Axis adjustment can be performed. In addition to manually rotating the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a and the left / right direction adjustment knob 1825b, the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a and the left / right direction adjustment knob 1825b can be rotated by an electric drive source. Therefore, the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 can be adjusted by either of the manual rotation operation and the rotation operation by the electric drive source. The projector 1850 automatically adjusts the optical axis of the projector 1850 as described above. For example, the projector 1850 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 installed in the pachinko island facility of the hall so as to be freely opened and closed. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 (that is, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 which are frame members) (or when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. There are a predetermined time later and a period during which the demonstration is performed while waiting for customers. The optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 provided in the upper decoration unit 280 is caused by vibration generated by opening the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 or opening the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the probability that such an optical axis is displaced increases because of deviation from the reference axis. The optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 can be adjusted by automation by the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself. Further, the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820 is automated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and during a period when a demonstration is performed while waiting for a customer. The optical axis can be adjusted.

  In such a configuration, the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1825a that can electrically rotate the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1825a ′ is driven and controlled to control the projector of the upper display unit 1820 of the upper decoration unit 280. The photo sensor 1825aa ′ (original position standby detection means) capable of detecting whether or not the current position of 1850 matches the original position in the front / rear direction and the left / right adjustment knob 1825b are electrically rotated. It is possible to detect whether the current position of the projector 1850 of the upper display unit 1820 of the upper decoration unit 280 matches the original position in the left-right direction by driving and controlling the left-right direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825b ′. And a photo sensor 1825ba ′ (original position standby detection means) for horizontal direction that can be The effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is the front-rear direction photosensor 1825aa ′ and the left-right direction photosensor in the motor and solenoid drive process of step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG. Based on the detection signal from 1825ba ′ (for example, in the movable body information acquisition process in step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG. 70, the external control MPU 4150a externally created and shown in FIG. (Based on history information of detection signals from the front and rear photosensors 1825aa ′ and 1825ba ′ set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control RAM 4150c), the upper plate side display device 1820 When it is determined that the projector 1850 is not waiting at the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the left-right direction, the front-rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825a ′ is driven and controlled to move the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1825a ( By rotating and controlling the left / right direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825b ′ and moving the left / right direction adjustment knob 1825b (rotating in the forward direction or the reverse direction), A ladybird that moves the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 to the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the horizontal direction so that the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 matches the contour of the rotary press operation unit 405. Can be projected from the outside of the rotary press operation unit 405 and projected on the rotary press operation unit 405. When it is determined that the projector 1850 of the upper pan side display device 1820 is in a standby state at the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the left-right direction, The direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825a ′ is driven and controlled so that the front and rear direction adjustment knob 1825a is not movable (not rotated forward or backward), and the left and right direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825b ′ is driven and controlled. Then, the left and right direction adjustment knob 1825b is not moved (not rotated forward or backward), and the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 is kept in the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the left-right direction. An image of a ladybird in which the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper plate display device 1820 is matched with the contour of the rotary press operation unit 405. May be configured to be able to perform control to maintain the state that matches the reference axis can be displayed in the rotation pressing unit 405 is projected from the outside of the. In this way, the front-rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825a ′ is driven and controlled so that the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1825a is movable (rotated forward or backward), and the left-right direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825b ′ is moved. By driving and controlling the horizontal adjustment knob 1825b (moving forward or backward), the projector 1850 of the upper pan side display device 1820 is returned to the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the left-right direction. Then, an image of a ladybird that matches the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 and the outline of the rotary press operation unit 405 is projected from the outside of the rotary press operation unit 405 and displayed on the rotary press operation unit 405. Can be automatically matched to the reference axis that can be used, and the projector 1820 By determining whether or not the monitor 1850 is waiting at the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the left-right direction, the determination result is obtained based on the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper plate side display device 1820, and Whether or not a reference axis that can project an image of a ladybird that matches the contour of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 from the outside of the rotary pressing operation unit 405 and project it on the rotary pressing operation unit 405 is in agreement. It can be handled as a discrimination result.

  In the case of such a configuration, in the motor and solenoid drive processing in step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of FIG. 70, based on detection signals from the front-rear direction photosensor 1825aa ′ and the left-right direction photosensor 1825ba ′. (For example, in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process of FIG. 70, the movable body information acquisition of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 17 is shown. (Based on history information of detection signals from the front-rear direction photosensor 1825aa ′ and the left-right direction photosensor 1825ba ′) set in the storage area 4150cah), the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 When it is determined that the vehicle is not waiting at the original position in the right direction, the front / rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825a ′ is driven to move the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1825a (forward rotation or reverse rotation). And the horizontal adjustment knob rotation motor 1825b 'is driven to move the horizontal adjustment knob 1825b (forward or reverse rotation), thereby allowing the upper dish side display device 1820 to move. The projector 1850 is moved to the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the left-right direction to rotate and press the ladybird image in which the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 is aligned with the outline of the rotary press operation unit 405. Control that adjusts to a state that matches the reference axis that can be projected from the outside of the unit 405 and projected onto the rotary pressing operation unit 405 When the projector 1850 of the upper platen side display device 1820 cannot be moved to the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the left-right direction even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed, the front-rear direction adjustment knob The drive control to the rotation motor 1825a ′ and the horizontal adjustment knob rotation motor 1825b ′ is configured to be stopped, and the warning process (step S1024) in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. In the notification control means), drive control to the front / rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825a ′ and the left / right direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1825b ′ by the motor and solenoid drive processing in step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process of FIG. 70 is performed. When stopped, the light of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 A difficult state in which the axis cannot be matched with the reference axis that can be projected from the outside of the rotary press operation unit 405 and projected on the rotary press operation unit 405 by projecting an image of a ladybird that matches the contour of the rotary press operation unit 405 From the side speaker 130 (notification means) in FIG. 1, “It is in a state where the optical axis adjustment of the projector provided in the upper plate display device cannot be performed. Please call an attendant. May be configured to be able to perform a control for notification by playing a voice "" or a projector provided in the upper plate side display device in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (notification means) in FIG. You may be able to perform control that displays the message “Please call a staff member”. In this way, a ladybird image in which the optical axis of the projector 1850 of the upper dish side display device 1820 is aligned with the contour of the rotary press operation unit 405 is projected from the outside of the rotary press operation unit 405 to the rotary press operation unit 405. The side speaker 130 and the technical board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can inform the player who is playing the game that it is difficult to match the reference axis that can be projected, and the hall. You can also tell a staff member such as a store clerk who visits the inside.

  It should be noted that the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is manually operated by turning the rotary front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a and the rotary vertical adjustment knob 1826b shown in FIG. It is possible to correct the state in which the optical axis of the lens is deviated from the reference axis. However, the front-rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1826a ′ (light) that can electrically rotate the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1826a. A vertical adjustment knob rotation motor 1826b ′ (optical axis adjustment electrical drive source) capable of electrically rotating the vertical adjustment knob 1826b is provided. The effect control program configured and executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is the step S in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG. In the 104 motor and solenoid drive processing (optical axis adjustment drive control means), the front / rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1826a ′ is driven and controlled to move the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a (rotation operation to forward rotation or reverse rotation). And the vertical adjustment knob rotating motor 1826b ′ is driven and controlled to move the vertical adjustment knob 1826b (rotating in the forward or reverse direction) so that the door frame side of the left side decoration unit 240 is moved. 79A to 79D in which the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the display device 1821 is aligned with the entire surface of the inner wall 201 formed on the right side decoration unit 200, the character images shown in FIGS. Control to adjust to a state that matches the reference axis that can be projected from the side and projected onto the entire surface of the inner wall 201. It may be configured such that it can. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the power-on state, the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is automatically adjusted, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall. When performing various operation inspections of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the installation work by eliminating the work of adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 by the installation operator. it can. Moreover, the light of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is automated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself without the maintenance work of adjusting the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 by a staff member such as a hall clerk. Axis adjustment can be performed. In addition to manually rotating the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a and the vertical direction adjustment knob 1826b, the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a and the vertical direction adjustment knob 1826b can be rotated by an electric drive source. Therefore, the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 can be adjusted by either of the manual rotation operation and the rotation operation by the electric drive source. Note that the time when the optical axis of the projector 1851 is automatically adjusted is a predetermined time as described above, and is, for example, pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 installed in the pachinko island facility of the hall so as to be freely opened and closed. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 (that is, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 which are frame members) (or when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. There are a predetermined time later and a period during which the demonstration is performed while waiting for customers. The optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 provided in the left side decoration unit 240 due to vibration generated by opening the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 or opening the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the probability that the optical axis is displaced becomes high. The optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 can be adjusted by automation by the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself. The projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is also automated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and during a period when the customer is waiting for demonstration. The optical axis can be adjusted.

  In such a configuration, the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1826a that can electrically rotate the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1826a is driven to control the door frame side display device 1821 of the left side decoration unit 240. The front-rear direction photosensor 1826aa ′ (original position standby detection means) capable of detecting whether or not the current position of the projector 1851 matches the original position in the front-rear direction and the vertical adjustment knob 1826b are electrically turned. Whether or not the current position of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 of the left side decoration unit 240 coincides with the original position in the vertical direction by driving and controlling the vertical adjustment knob rotation motor 1826b ′ that can move. A vertical direction photo sensor 1826ba ′ (original position standby detection means) capable of detecting The effect control program executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a front-rear direction photosensor 1826aa ′ and a vertical direction in the motor and solenoid drive process of step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG. Based on the detection signal from the photosensor 1826ba ′ (for example, in the movable body information acquisition process in step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG. 70, the peripheral control MPU 4150a externally created and shown in FIG. Door frame side display device 1 based on the history information of detection signals from the front and rear photosensors 1826aa ′ and 1826ba ′ set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. When it is determined that 21 projectors 1851 are not waiting at the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the up-down direction, the front-rear direction adjustment knob rotating motor 1826a ′ is driven and controlled to move the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1826a. And rotating the vertical adjustment knob rotation motor 1826b ′ to move the vertical adjustment knob 1826b (moving it forward or reverse). Accordingly, the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is moved to the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the vertical direction, and the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is formed in the right side decoration unit 200. The character images shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (d) that match the entire surface of the inner wall 201 are the inner wall 20. The projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 controls the original position in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction while performing control to adjust to a reference axis that can be projected from the outside of 1 and projected on the entire surface of the inner wall 201. When it is determined that the vehicle is waiting at the original position in the direction, the front-rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1826a 'is driven and controlled, and the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1826a is not moved (rotation operation to forward rotation or reverse rotation). And the vertical adjustment knob rotation motor 1826b ′ is driven and controlled so that the vertical adjustment knob 1826b does not move (does not rotate in the forward or reverse rotation). The projector 1851 is made to stand by at the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the vertical direction, and the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is changed to the right side decoration. 79A to 79D are projected from the outside of the inner side wall 201 and projected onto the entire surface of the inner side wall 201 in accordance with the entire surface of the inner side wall 201 formed on the knit 200. It may be configured to perform control to maintain a state that matches a reference axis that can be In this way, the front-rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1826a ′ is driven and controlled to move the front-rear direction adjustment knob 1826a (rotate forward or reverse), and the up-down direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1826b ′. The projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is returned to the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the up-down direction by moving the vertical adjustment knob 1826b by controlling the drive so that the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is rotated forward or backward. 79A to 79D matched with the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 and the entire surface of the inner side wall 201 formed on the right side decoration unit 200. Is automatically aligned with a reference axis that can be projected from the outside of the inner wall 201 and projected onto the entire surface of the inner wall 201. And determining whether or not the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is waiting at the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the vertical direction. 79A to 79D that match the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the side display device 1821 and the entire surface of the inner side wall 201 formed in the right side decoration unit 200 are the images of the character shown in FIGS. It can be handled as a determination result as to whether or not the reference axis that can be projected from the outside and projected on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 is in agreement.

  In the case of such a configuration, in the motor and solenoid drive processing in step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of FIG. 70, based on detection signals from the front-rear direction photosensor 1826aa ′ and the up-down direction photosensor 1826ba ′. (For example, in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process of FIG. 70, the movable body information acquisition of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 17 is shown. (Based on the history information of the detection signals from the front and rear photosensors 1826aa ′ and 1826ba ′ set in the storage area 4150cah), the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 When it is determined that the vehicle is not waiting at the original position in the downward direction, the front / rear direction adjustment knob rotation motor 1826a ′ is driven to move the front / rear direction adjustment knob 1826a (forward rotation or reverse rotation). And the vertical adjustment knob rotation motor 1826b 'is driven and controlled so that the vertical adjustment knob 1826b is movable (rotated in the forward or reverse direction) to thereby display the door frame side display device 1821. The projector 1851 is moved to the original position in the front-rear direction and the original position in the vertical direction so that the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is aligned with the entire surface of the inner wall 201 formed in the right side decoration unit 200. 79A to 79D are projected from the outside of the inner wall 201 to the entire surface of the inner wall 201. Even when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) elapses, the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is controlled to adjust to a state that matches the reference axis that can be projected. 68, the drive control to the front / rear direction adjustment knob turning motor 1826a 'and the up / down direction adjustment knob turning motor 1826b' is stopped. In the warning process (notification control means) in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the on-time process, the front and rear direction adjustment knob rotating motor 1826a by the motor and solenoid drive process in step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG. 'And the drive control to the vertical adjustment knob rotation motor 1826b' is stopped. 79A to 79D in which the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is aligned with the entire surface of the inner wall 201 formed on the right side decoration unit 200. 1 from the outside of the inner wall 201 and the fact that it is difficult to match the reference axis that can be projected on the entire surface of the inner wall 201 (side notification means) in FIG. From “The projector's optical axis adjustment in the door frame side display device cannot be adjusted. Please call an attendant. May be configured to be able to perform a control for notification by playing a voice "" or a projector provided in the door frame side display device in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (notification means) in FIG. You may be able to perform control that displays the message “Please call a staff member”. In this way, the character of the character shown in FIGS. 79A to 79D in which the optical axis of the projector 1851 of the door frame side display device 1821 is matched to the entire surface of the inner wall 201 formed in the right side decoration unit 200. The side speaker 130 or the technical board side liquid crystal display indicates that the image cannot be matched with the reference axis that can be projected from the outside of the inner wall 201 and projected on the entire surface of the inner wall 201. With the device 1900, it can be communicated to a player who is playing a game, or can be communicated to a staff member such as a store clerk traveling around the hall.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example. However, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than a pachinko gaming machine, such as a slot machine ( The present invention can also be applied to a spinning game machine) or a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that uses a game ball to play a slot game). In either case, the same operational effects as those described above can be obtained.

  As a basic configuration of such a rotating type gaming machine or a gaming machine formed by combining the rotating type gaming machine, for example, a rotating display body (rotating display means) including a plurality of reels (rotating bodies) with a plurality of types of symbols, A housing provided with the rotating display, an operating lever (first operating means) provided outside the housing, and a plurality of devices provided outside the housing corresponding to the plurality of reels, respectively. And a stop button (second operation means), wherein the plurality of reels are rotated by the operation of the operation lever (corresponding to the establishment of the start condition) as a trigger. Rotating body control means for stopping the rotation of each corresponding reel according to the operation sequence of the buttons, and an internal lottery for determining whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied when the start lever is operated Run Game control means (main control board described above) having lottery means and game state control means for shifting from the normal game state to the special game state advantageous to the player after the predetermined winning condition is satisfied 4100) and production control means for controlling the production operation according to the establishment condition of the predetermined winning condition by the control of the game control means (substantially equivalent to the function of the peripheral control board 4140 described above) The display control means performs display operation as a part of the effect operation (substantially equivalent to the function of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above), and is attached to the plurality of reels under the control of the game control means. A payout device (payout hand) for performing a game medium payout operation according to a combination mode of a plurality of symbols stopped in a symbol display area in which a variation mode of the plurality of symbols is visually recognized ) And it includes a.

  More specifically, a slot machine as an example of a swivel game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine. As shown in FIG. 83, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. Front door 6002 and main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, the front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a key hole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. In the protruding portion, a medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a storage and settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, a storage settlement button 6022, and the like are a main control board (main control MPU) that controls the progress of a game (not shown). ) Is electrically connected. Note that the upper surface of the projecting portion on which the medal slot 6008 and the bet buttons 6010 and 601 are arranged is a surface having a forward downward slope (front downward inclined surface). A rotation pressing operation unit 6405 corresponding to the rotation pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG.

  The front door 6002 has a right side decoration unit 6200 (corresponding to the right side decoration unit 200 shown in FIG. 7) attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming panel 6006 and the right side decoration unit 6200 facing the right side decoration unit 6200. A left side decoration unit 6240 attached to the left outer periphery (corresponding to the left side decoration unit 240 shown in FIG. 7) and an upper decoration unit 6280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game panel 6006 (the upper decoration unit shown in FIG. 7). 280)). The upper decoration unit 6280 is provided with a protruding portion side display device 61820 corresponding to the upper plate side display device 1820 shown in FIG. The protruding portion side display device 61820 can project and display an effect image with the entire upper surface of the protruding portion as a projection plane, facing the slot machine 6000 from the front and below the protruding portion side display device 61820. It has become. In addition, the upper surface of the protrusion is a surface having a forward downward inclination (front downward inclined surface). The effect image displayed on the entire upper surface of the projecting portion can be made easier to see for a player sitting on the front surface of the slot machine 6000.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Three variable rotators (not shown) installed in the slot machine 6000 through the display window, a plurality of liquid crystal display devices, and the like Can be seen through. A transparent projection sheet (shown in FIG. 11) having a concave shape (not shown) except for a portion in which a rectangular display window is formed in a region extending from approximately the center to the lower side of the front surface of the game panel 6006. Further, it corresponds to a transparent projection sheet 1150A having a U-shape). This transparent projection sheet (not shown) can display an effect image projected from the protrusion side display device 61820 provided in the upper decoration unit 6280.

  On these variable rotators, translucent symbol bands on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information are affixed to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by a main control board (main control MPU), and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from above to the bottom from the display window. It seems to change to. The plurality of liquid crystal display devices are display-controlled by an effect control board (one VDP with a built-in sound source) that controls the progress of the effect (not shown), and these display controls are performed based on various commands from the main control board. ing. In addition, the effect control board controls the progress of the effect by the protrusion side display device 61820 based on various commands from the main control board. In addition, the effect control board receives signals from various switches (corresponding to various switches (not shown) that detect the operation of the rotary press operation unit 405 shown in FIG. 7) that detect the operation of the rotary press operation unit 6405. It has become so. In addition, the effect control board can drive and control a drive motor (not shown) (corresponding to the drive motor 414 shown in FIG. 7) that can rotate the rotary pressing operation unit 6405 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction. It has become. Thereby, the slot machine 6000 can realize the effects corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 77A to 77C in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. The main control board and the effect control board are installed in the slot machine 6000.

  On the main control board (main control MPU), a predetermined number of medals are inserted as medal into the medal slot 6008, and the symbol information fluctuation display is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the button 6018 and the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. The main control board (main control MPU) generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and receives a large amount of medals as game media in the tray 6026. Pay out.

  In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board (main control MPU) has a predetermined number of game balls thrown in the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium, and the start lever The symbol information variation display is started based on the operation 6014, and the symbol information variation display is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board (main control MPU) generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and receives a large amount of game balls as a game medium in the receiving tray 6026. Pay out.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main body frame, 4 ... Game board, 5 ... Door frame, 192 ... Handle relay terminal board, 200 ... Right side decoration unit, 201 ... Inner side wall, 240 ... Left side decoration unit, 280 ... Upper decoration unit, 300 ... Dish unit, 314 ... Upper plate upper panel, 405 ... Rotation press operation unit, 650 ... Hitting ball launcher, 740 ... Prize ball apparatus, 744 ... Dispensing motor, 751 ... Count switch, 784 ... external terminal board, 851 ... power supply board, 855 ... power supply control unit, 855d ... power supply generation circuit, 855da ... power consumption monitoring circuit, 855daa ... power measurement circuit, 855dab ... power consumption suppression stage determination circuit, 860a ... Operation switch, 860b ... error LED display, 1100 ... gaming area, 1150 ... gaming panel, 1150A ... projection sheet, 1800 ... Jector drive board, 1801 ... Projector drive board, 1820 ... Upper plate side display device, 1821 ... Door frame side display device, 1825 ... Case, 1825a ... Front / rear direction adjustment knob, 1825b ... Left / right direction adjustment knob, 1826 ... Case, 1850... Projector, 1851... Projector, 1900. Impedance sensor element, 4100 ... main control board (game control means), 4100a ... main control MPU, 4100x ... magnetic detection power supply drive circuit (power supply cutoff means), 4100y ... magnetic detection power supply circuit (power supply cutoff means), 4110 ... Dispensing control board 4120 ... Discharge control unit, 4120a ... Discharge control MPU, 4120ag ... Launch ball transport control circuit, 4120ah ... Launch ball transport fault monitoring circuit, 4140 ... Peripheral control board, 4150 ... Peripheral control unit, 4150a ... Peripheral control MPU, 4150f ... Power Consumption status history RAM, 4150fa ... transition count holding area, 4150g ... battery, 4160 ... liquid crystal and sound control unit, 4160a ... VDP with built-in sound source, 4165 ... RTC control unit, 4165a ... RTC, 4165b ... battery, 4170 ... lamp driving board, 4180: Motor drive substrate, BC0: Capacitor, MC2: Electrolytic capacitor.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a front frame that is pivotally supported by an outer frame installed on a gaming island so as to be freely opened and closed and on which a game board can be mounted, and a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game board or the front frame is
Comprising abnormal magnetic detection means for detecting the occurrence of abnormal magnetism in a detection region set within a predetermined distance from the detection surface ;
The abnormal magnetic detection means is
First reference setting control means for setting the magnetic state in the ambient environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means as a reference regardless of whether or not an external request signal is input when the power is turned on;
After the first reference setting control means sets the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means as a reference, the surroundings of the abnormal magnetic detection means are based on the input of the request signal from the outside. A second reference setting control means for resetting the magnetic state in the environment as a reference;
Having at least
The first reference setting control means includes:
A setting determination result output control means for performing determination in a predetermined setting determination period and outputting a setting determination result to the outside by determining whether or not the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means can be set;
A connection determination result output control means for performing a determination as to whether or not the electrical connection state to the abnormal magnetic detection means is a normal state in a predetermined connection determination period and outputting a connection determination result to the outside;
Including at least
The game control means is input from the abnormal magnetic detection means as a notification that the signal that conveys the setting determination result can be set based on the magnetic state in the surrounding environment of the abnormal magnetic detection means, and After the signal indicating the connection determination result is input from the abnormal magnetism detection unit as a signal indicating that the electrical connection state to the abnormal magnetism detection unit is normal, the abnormal magnetism is generated. together with a signal to tell whether the detection is inputted from the anomalous magnetic detection means, wherein the front frame is the request signal based on which the front frame after being opened is closed to the outer frame from the outer frame Is output to the abnormal magnetic detection means,
Detection area of the detection surface before Symbol anomalous magnetic detection means, for discharging the game ball entering the sphere part provided on the game board, the game balls that did not enter the sphere in the recreation sphere ball entrance portion from the game board And a discharge unit for the game machine.